G3X Garmin

™
G3X Touch
Pilot's Guide for Certified Aircraft
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
EIS
CNS INTERFACE
GPS NAVIGATION
FLIGHT PLANNING
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AFCS
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
APPENDIX
INDEX
©2022 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 9.00 or later. Some differences
in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later
software versions.
Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Garmin Product Support: www.fly.garmin.com
Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Garmin (Europe) Ltd, Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park, Southampton, Hampshire
SO40 9LR, U.K.
Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road, Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
Web Site Address: www.garmin.com

Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied,
transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without
the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a
single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic
storage medium to be viewed for personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy
of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided
further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is
strictly prohibited.
Garmin, GNC, GDL, FliteCharts, SafeTaxi, and MapSource are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd.
or its subsidiaries.
ANT+, GTN, GNX, GDU, and G3X Touch are trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These
trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
Jeppesen is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.
NavData is a trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.
SiriusXM Weather is provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio, Inc.
SiriusXM Radio is provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio, Inc.
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and
any use of such marks by Garmin is under license
This product is ANT+™ certified. Visit www.thisisant.com/directory for a list of compatible products
and apps.
January, 2022 190-02472-00 Rev. D Printed in the U.S.A.

Warnings, Cautions & Notes
WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon

the use of the terrain function. The G3X Touch ™ Terrain Proximity feature is
NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance and
does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surround-
ings during flight. The Terrain Proximity feature is only to be used as an aid
for terrain avoidance and is not certified for use in applications requiring a
certified terrain awareness system. Terrain data is obtained from third party
sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain
data.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and

understand all aspects of the G3X Touch Pilot’s Guide documentation and
the Pilot’s Operating Handbook of the aircraft. Thoroughly practice basic
operation prior to actual use. During flight operations, carefully compare
indications from the G3X Touch to all available navigation sources, including
the information from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings, charts, etc. For safety
purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory
in nature and should not be relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and
terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical charts
for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: The altitude calculated by G3X Touch internal GPS receivers is

geometric height above Mean Sea Level and could vary significantly from
the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters. Always use pressure altitude
displayed by the G3X Touch PFD when determining or selecting aircraft alti-
tude.
WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used in the

G3X Touch system must be updated regularly in order to ensure the informa-
tion remains current. Pilots using any outdated database do so entirely at
their own risk.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in,
near, or around areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within
data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather condi-
tions.
Garmin G3X Touch™ Pilot’s Guide for Certified Aircraft 190-02472-00 Rev. D
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to deter-
mine the age of the weather information shown by the data link weather
product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing weather
data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data
link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated weather
product age.
WARNING: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes
from government agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates
the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
WARNING: The illustrations in this guide are only examples. Never use the
G3X Touch to attempt to penetrate a thunderstorm. Both the FAA Advisory
Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms, and the Aeronautical Information Manual
(AIM) recommend avoiding “by at least 20 miles any thunderstorm identified
as severe or giving an intense radar echo.”
WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, operating the

G3X Touch within the following areas could result in loss of reliable heading
indications. North of 72° North latitude at all longitudes; South of 70° South
latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude between longitude
75° W and 120° W. (Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between
longitude 70° W and 128° W. (Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude
between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia); South of 55° South
latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia
and New Zealand)
WARNING: The United States government operates the Global Positioning

System and is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS
system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and performance
of all GPS equipment. Portions of the Garmin G3X Touch utilize GPS as a
precision electronic NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs,
information presented by the G3X Touch can be misused or misinterpreted
and, therefore, become unsafe.
190-02472-00 Rev. D Garmin G3X Touch™ Pilot’s Guide for Certified Aircraft
WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for
primary navigation. Basemap data is intended only to supplement other
approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to
enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not use the approach information provided by the VFR navi-
gation database residing within the G3X Touch as a means of navigating any
instrument approach. The G3X Touch VFR navigation database is limited to
present only the waypoints for the final approach leg of a published procedure.
These waypoints and associated course line are made available for monitoring
purposes only.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for col-
lision avoidance maneuvering. The traffic display does not provide collision
avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any circumstances or
conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to

accurately depict all of the traffic within range of the aircraft. Due to lack
of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information from
aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on
the display.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the fuel quantity indications or calculated
fuel quantity. It is the responsibility of the pilot to perform proper flight plan-
ning and verify that indicated fuel quantity values are accurate prior to each
flight.
WARNING: For safety reasons, G3X Touch operational procedures must be

learned on the ground.
CAUTION: The display uses a lens with a special coating that may be
sensitive to abrasive cleaners, etc. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA OR
SOLVENTS MAY HARM THIS COATING. It is very important to clean the lens
using a clean, lint-free cloth (such as the Garmin cleaning cloth). Avoid any
chemical cleaners or solvents that can damage plastic components.
CAUTION: The Garmin G3X Touch does not contain any user-serviceable
parts. Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center.
Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and the
pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
NOTE: The Garmin G3X Touch has a very high degree of functional integrity.
However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/or self-
test capability for all conceivable system failures is not practical. Although
unlikely, it may be possible for erroneous operation to occur without a fault
indication shown by the G3X Touch. It is thus the responsibility of the pilot
to detect such an occurrence by means of cross-checking with all redundant
or correlated information available in the cockpit.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen
images of the G3X Touch panel and displays, are subject to change and may
not reflect the most current G3X Touch system and aviation databases. Depic-
tions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive
harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with California’s Proposition
65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please
refer to our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can
cause an intermittent loss of attitude and heading displays while the aircraft
is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards away from the
source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim
or blank.
NOTE: Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) data is provided by the FAA and
may not be updated outside of normal business hours. Confirm data currency
through alternate sources and contact your local FSS for interpretation of TFR
data.
NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, all screen images contained within this
document are taken from the GDU™ 460 display. The GDU 470 screen images
will vary slightly from the GDU 460.
NOTE: The GDU 4XX automatically logs flight data including, but not limited
to, primary flight data, engine parameters, and system status information. This
data can be downloaded to an SD card, when the aircraft is on the ground.
The downloaded data can be viewed using common computer software.
It is not possible to disable the logging of this data or to manually delete
logged data. Logged data will be stored only on the GDU 4XX and will not
be transmitted or transferred to Garmin or to any other third party, with
the exception of government agencies investigating an accident or incident
involving your aircraft and/or the parties to any resulting legal proceedings
that may be related to the aircraft accident or incident.
NOTE: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Garmin is under license.
1. FCC
Contains FCC ID: QOQWT32I
NOTE
The GMA 245 and GMA 245R complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
2. IC
Contains IC: 5123A-BGTWT32I
NOTE
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Cet appareil est conforme aux normes RSS sans licence d’Industrie Canada. Son
fonctionnement est soumis aux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer
d’interférences et (2) doit accepter toute interférence,y compris les interférences pouvant
entraîner un fonctionnement indésirable de l’appareil.
RF Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF
exposure compliance. This transmitter meets both portable and mobile limits as demonstrated
in the RF Exposure Analysis. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product
procedures.
Énoncé sur l'exposition aux rayonnements RF
Cet appareil est conforme à la réglementation FCC relative aux limites d'exposition aux
radiations applicables en environnement non contrôlé. L’utilisateur doit suivre les directives
d’opération spécifique à la conformité sur l’évitement de l’exposition aux rayonnements RF.
Cet émetteur répond aux limites d’émission pour les appareils portables et mobiles, comme
démontré dans l’analyse d’exposition RF. Cet émetteur ne doit pas être placé ou utilisé en
conjonction avec d'autres antennes ou émetteurs, sauf en conformité aux procédures de
produits multiémetteurs de la FCC.
Anatel Warning (GMA 245R)

Este equipamento não tem direito ã proteção contra interferência prejudicial e não pode
causar interferência em sistemas devidamente autorizados.
Part Number Change Summary
190-02472-00 Initial release
Rev Date Description

A March, 2019 Production Release
B December, 2019 Updated for software version 8.60
Added remote COM control (GTR 20)
Added remote audio control (GMA 245R)
Added Marker Beacon display
Added standalone MFD and EIS support
Added Angle of Attack (AOA) display and alerting
Added Carbon Monoxide Detector display and alerting
Added Main Menu LRU controls (COM, Audio Panel, and XPDR)
Updated terrain options menu
Added flight plan information to the Map/Charts pages
Added access to the autopilot interface from the Main Menu
Added Connext Flight Data Logging
Added Automatic Sharing of G3X Touch Flight Plans with
External IFR Navigators
Added GTR 200B functionality
Added comparison alerts
Added importing/exporting user waypoints
Updated NAV find procedure
Updates to support GTX integration with TAS/TCAS
Added note regarding VNAV mode
Added note about Glide Range Ring requiring OAT
Updated PFD wind speed/direction to a toggle button also
displaying headwind/crosswind components
Added Weight & Balance envelope as Moment vs Weight
Added GPS Steering (GPSS) for non-Garmin autopilots
Rev Date Description
C December, 2021 Updates to support GTX integration with TAS/TCAS
Updated Transponder Mode Selection
Updated ILS Auto Switching procedure to specify type of
equipment needed
Added 'ECS FAIL' CAS message
Added Fuel Flow Calibration
Updated color active COM frequencies are displayed in when no
audio panel is configured
Added Center Weather Advisory FIS-B weather product
Added Graphical AIRMET FIS-B weather product
Updated Flight Director Lateral Modes table
Updated Baro Sync procedure
Added NOTE regarding formatting an SD Card using Mac OS
Updated backcourse (BC) navigation mode information
Added GAD 29D
Updated System Settings section
Updated Comparison Alerts
Added LP+V
Updated Weather Product Timing table
Added Emergency Page
Added Smart Glide emergency operations
Updated EIS display
Updated dual cue command bars
Updated glide range ring information
D January, 2022 Updated System Status Messages
Added TOD/BOD note regarding GTN Xi
Added Fuel Flow Calibration note
Table of Contents
Section 1 System Overview................................................................................................... 1

1.1 Line Replaceable Units...................................................................................................... 1
G3X Touch System................................................................................................................ 8
External Navigators (Optional) ............................................................................................ 12
ADS-B Devices (Optional).................................................................................................... 13
Automatic Flight Control System.......................................................................................... 14
1.2 Display Overview............................................................................................................. 14
1.3 Secure Digital (SD) Cards............................................................................................... 16
1.4 System Initialization........................................................................................................ 16
1.5 System Operation............................................................................................................ 17
Split Mode.......................................................................................................................... 17
PFD/MFD Display Configuration........................................................................................... 19
AHRS Operation.................................................................................................................. 24
1.6 Accessing System Functionality.................................................................................... 25
Menus................................................................................................................................ 25
Data Entry........................................................................................................................... 25
Pages.................................................................................................................................. 27
1.7 Accessing Additional Information................................................................................ 29
Viewing GPS Receiver Status............................................................................................... 29
Position............................................................................................................................... 32
Transponder........................................................................................................................ 34
Data Bar Setup.................................................................................................................... 34
General Display information................................................................................................ 36
Display setup...................................................................................................................... 37
Units Setup......................................................................................................................... 42
Time Setup.......................................................................................................................... 42
Map Setup.......................................................................................................................... 43
Position Setup..................................................................................................................... 43
Alarms Setup...................................................................................................................... 43
Airspace Setup.................................................................................................................... 45
Bluetooth Setup.................................................................................................................. 45
PFD Setup........................................................................................................................... 45
Navigation Setup................................................................................................................ 45
Keyboard Setup................................................................................................................... 46
Section 2 Flight Instruments................................................................................................ 47

2.1 Flight Instruments............................................................................................................ 47
Attitude Indicator................................................................................................................ 52
Altimeter............................................................................................................................. 54
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)............................................................................................... 59
Vertical Deviation Indicator and VNAV Indicator................................................................... 60
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)...................................................................................... 63
190-02472-00 Rev. D Garmin G3X Touch™ Pilot’s Guide for Certified Aircraft i
Table of Contents
Turn Rate Indicator.............................................................................................................. 74

OBS Mode.......................................................................................................................... 75
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data.............................................................................................. 76
Outside Air Temperature...................................................................................................... 76
Wind Data.......................................................................................................................... 78
User Timer........................................................................................................................... 78
Angle of Attack (AOA)......................................................................................................... 79
2.3 Vertical Navigation (VNAV)............................................................................................. 80
Using the VNAV Feature...................................................................................................... 82
VNAV Paired With GTN....................................................................................................... 84
Section 3 Engine Indication System................................................................................. 87

3.1 EIS Display & ENG Page.................................................................................................. 87
3.2 Lean Assist Mode (Optional).......................................................................................... 90
3.3 Fuel Calculator (Optional).............................................................................................. 94
3.4 Fuel Flow Calibration...................................................................................................... 95
3.5 CAS Messages................................................................................................................... 96
Section 4 CNS Interface (Optional)................................................................................... 97

4.1 CNS Data Bar..................................................................................................................... 97
4.2 COM Annunciations......................................................................................................... 98
4.3 COM Window..................................................................................................................... 98
COM Frequency Finding.................................................................................................... 100
Automatic Squelch............................................................................................................ 101
4.4 COM Error Messages..................................................................................................... 101
4.5 Auto-Tuning Frequencies.............................................................................................. 102
4.6 User Frequencies............................................................................................................ 104
4.7 Audio Panel...................................................................................................................... 105
Audio/Intercom Page......................................................................................................... 107
Radios Tab........................................................................................................................ 107
Intercom Tab..................................................................................................................... 112
Phone & Media Tab........................................................................................................... 115
Music Input Tab................................................................................................................. 125
4.8 Remote Transponder Interface (Optional)............................................................... 127
Transponder CODE and Mode Selection............................................................................. 128
ADS-B Out........................................................................................................................ 131
Flight ID Reporting............................................................................................................ 131
Additional Transponder Messages...................................................................................... 132
Section 5 GPS Navigation..................................................................................................... 133

5.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................... 133
Compass Arc..................................................................................................................... 133
ii Garmin G3X Touch™ Pilot’s Guide for Certified Aircraft 190-02472-00 Rev. D
Table of Contents
5.2 Using Map Displays........................................................................................................ 134

Map Page Setup................................................................................................................ 135
Map Range....................................................................................................................... 139
Map Panning.................................................................................................................... 139
Fuel Range Ring................................................................................................................ 141
Glide Range Ring.............................................................................................................. 142
Best Airport Bearing Pointer............................................................................................... 144
Best Airport Line............................................................................................................... 146
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc........................................................................................... 146
Measuring Bearing and Distance....................................................................................... 147
Topography....................................................................................................................... 147
Map Page Traffic................................................................................................................ 148
Map Symbols.................................................................................................................... 148
5.3 Airways............................................................................................................................. 150
5.4 Waypoints........................................................................................................................ 152
Automatic Waypoint Selection........................................................................................... 155
Nearest Information.......................................................................................................... 155
Weather Information......................................................................................................... 157
Intersections..................................................................................................................... 157
NDBs................................................................................................................................ 158
VORs................................................................................................................................ 159
User Waypoints................................................................................................................. 159
5.5 Airspace............................................................................................................................ 162
Airspace Alert Messages.................................................................................................... 162
Smart Airspace™ and Altitude Overlays............................................................................... 163
5.6 Direct-to Navigation Using the G3X Touch............................................................... 164
Section 6 Flight Planning...................................................................................................... 167

6.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................... 167
Flight Plan Data Fields....................................................................................................... 168
Manually Switching Between Internal and External Flight Plan Sources............................... 168
Failure of the External GPS Navigation Source.................................................................... 169
6.2 Flight Plan Creation Using the G3X Touch................................................................ 169
6.3 Automatic Sharing of G3X Touch Flight Plans with External IFR Navigators... 172
External IFR Navigator Crossfill Configuration (GPS 175, GNC® 355, GNX 375™, and GTN™
6XX/7XX (version 6.62 and newer only))........................................................................... 173
6.4 Flight Plan Storage Using the G3X Touch................................................................. 174
6.5 Flight Plan Activation Using the G3X Touch............................................................. 175
6.6 Flight Plan Editing.......................................................................................................... 176
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan....................................................................... 176
Editing Flight Plan Speed, Fuel, and/or Name..................................................................... 177
Copying Flight Plans.......................................................................................................... 179
190-02472-00 Rev. D Garmin G3X Touch™ Pilot’s Guide for Certified Aircraft iii
Table of Contents
Deleting Flight Plans......................................................................................................... 179

Inverting a Flight Plan....................................................................................................... 181
Importing/Exporting Flight Plans........................................................................................ 181
Sending Flight Plans to a GNS/GTN................................................................................... 182
6.7 Approaches (Without External Navigator Configured)......................................... 182
Selecting an Approach....................................................................................................... 183
Activating Vectors-to-Final................................................................................................. 185
Section 7 Hazard Avoidance............................................................................................... 187

7.1 Weather Information..................................................................................................... 187
Weather Sources............................................................................................................... 187
Data Link Weather (Optional)............................................................................................ 188
7.2 Terrain............................................................................................................................... 216
Synthetic Vision................................................................................................................. 217
Terrain Information............................................................................................................ 217
Terrain Views..................................................................................................................... 218
Terrain Settings................................................................................................................. 219
Terrain Alerts..................................................................................................................... 220
7.3 Traffic Systems................................................................................................................ 222
Traffic Source.................................................................................................................... 222
Traffic Prioritization........................................................................................................... 224
Traffic Information Service (TIS-A) (Optional)...................................................................... 224
Garmin GTS 8XX Traffic (Optional)..................................................................................... 230
Data Link Traffic (Optional)................................................................................................ 237
Section 8 Additional Features............................................................................................ 249

8.1 Synthetic Vision (SVX)................................................................................................... 250
Synthetic Vision Operation................................................................................................. 252
8.2 SafeTaxi® ......................................................................................................................... 263
SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision.................................................................................. 264
8.3 ChartView........................................................................................................................ 264
Aircraft Symbol................................................................................................................. 266
Chart Range...................................................................................................................... 266
Navigation Database-published NOTAMs........................................................................... 267
8.4 FliteCharts® ..................................................................................................................... 268
Aircraft Symbol................................................................................................................. 271
Chart Range...................................................................................................................... 271
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date................................................................... 271
8.5 Airport Directory Data.................................................................................................. 271
8.6 SiriusXM Radio Entertainment (Optional)................................................................. 273
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services....................................................................... 273
Using SiriusXM Radio......................................................................................................... 274
8.7 Electronic Checklists (Optional).................................................................................. 275
iv Garmin G3X Touch™ Pilot’s Guide for Certified Aircraft 190-02472-00 Rev. D
Table of Contents
8.8 Flight Data Logging Using the SD Card..................................................................... 276

8.9 Connext Cockpit Connectivity..................................................................................... 276
Pairing the G3X Touch with a Bluetooth Device.................................................................. 278
Transferring a Flight Plan................................................................................................... 279
Flight Data Logging in Garmin Pilot................................................................................... 280
8.10 Electronic Stability & Protection (ESP-X)................................................................... 284
Roll Engagement............................................................................................................... 286
Pitch Engagement............................................................................................................. 288
Airspeed Protection........................................................................................................... 289
8.11 Carbon Monoxide (CO) Detector (Optional).......................................................... 290
Section 9 Automatic Flight Control Systems (Optional)..................................... 291

AFCS System Architecture ................................................................................................. 291
G3X Touch AFCS Status Box.............................................................................................. 293
9.1 AFCS Operation............................................................................................................... 294
AFCS PRE-FLIGHT Actions.................................................................................................. 295
AFCS Controls................................................................................................................... 296
Flight Director Operation................................................................................................... 301
9.2 Vertical Modes................................................................................................................. 305
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT)....................................................................................................... 307
Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS).............................................................................. 308
Vertical Speed Mode (VS).................................................................................................. 310
Indicated Airspeed Mode (IAS)........................................................................................... 311
Vertical Navigation Mode (VNAV)...................................................................................... 312
VNAV Target Altitude Capture Mode (ALTV)....................................................................... 314
Glidepath Mode (GP) (with external WAAS enabled IFR navigator ONLY)............................ 315
Glideslope Mode (GS)....................................................................................................... 316
Go Around (GA) and Takeoff (TO) Modes........................................................................... 317
9.3 Lateral Modes.................................................................................................................. 317
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)........................................................................................................ 319
Heading Select Mode (HDG).............................................................................................. 319
Track Select Mode (TRK).................................................................................................... 320
Navigation Modes (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)............................................................................. 321
Approaches without Vertical Guidance............................................................................... 325
Approaches with Lateral + Vertical Guidance..................................................................... 329
9.4 Non-Garmin Autopilots................................................................................................. 332
GPS Steering (GPSS).......................................................................................................... 333
Section 10 Annunciations & Alerts.................................................................................. 335

10.1 Miscellaneous Message Advisories.......................................................................... 335
10.2 Airspace Messages....................................................................................................... 336
10.3 System Status Messages............................................................................................ 337
System Status Messages.................................................................................................... 338
190-02472-00 Rev. D Garmin G3X Touch™ Pilot’s Guide for Certified Aircraft v
Table of Contents
10.4 Audio Alerts................................................................................................................... 342

Voice Alerts....................................................................................................................... 342
AOA Aural Alert................................................................................................................. 343
10.5 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions............................................................ 344
Marker Beacon Annunciation............................................................................................. 344
CAS Messages.................................................................................................................. 345
Electrical Control System Annunciation.............................................................................. 346
Terrain Annunciations........................................................................................................ 346
Traffic Annunciations......................................................................................................... 346
AHRS Alerts (Optional)...................................................................................................... 346
AFCS Alerts (Optional)....................................................................................................... 348
Section 11 Appendices.......................................................................................................... 351

Appendix A: Data Field Options........................................................................................ 351
Appendix B: Utilities............................................................................................................ 359
Flight Log.......................................................................................................................... 359
Track log........................................................................................................................... 362
Track Vector...................................................................................................................... 366
Weight & Balance............................................................................................................. 368
Proximity Waypoints and Alarms........................................................................................ 372
Appendix C: SD Card Use and Databases........................................................................ 375
Installing and Removing SD Cards..................................................................................... 376
G3X Touch Databases....................................................................................................... 376
Updating G3X Touch Databases........................................................................................ 380
Importing/Exporting Flight Plans To/From the SD Card........................................................ 384
Flight Data Logging........................................................................................................... 384
Appendix D: Map Datum and Location Formats............................................................ 385
Map Datums..................................................................................................................... 385
Location Formats............................................................................................................... 385
Appendix E: General TIS-A Information........................................................................... 387
TIS-A vs. TAS/TCAS............................................................................................................ 387
TIS-A Limitations............................................................................................................... 388
Appendix F: Abnormal Operation..................................................................................... 391
Loss of GPS Position.......................................................................................................... 391
Hazard Display with Loss of GPS Position........................................................................... 391
G3X Touch System Failure Annunciations........................................................................... 392
Unusual Attitudes.............................................................................................................. 392
Reversionary Mode (Full-Screen)........................................................................................ 393
AFCS Reversionary Mode................................................................................................... 394
Failure of the External GPS Navigation Source.................................................................... 394
Synthetic Vision Troubleshooting........................................................................................ 394
vi Garmin G3X Touch™ Pilot’s Guide for Certified Aircraft 190-02472-00 Rev. D
Table of Contents
Emergency Page................................................................................................................ 395

Smart Glide tm Emergency Operations................................................................................ 396
Appendix G: Display Symbols............................................................................................ 405
VFR Symbols..................................................................................................................... 405
IFR Symbols...................................................................................................................... 406
Airspace Symbols.............................................................................................................. 408
Appendix H: Glossary........................................................................................................... 411
Appendix I: License Agreement and Warranty............................................................... 417
Contact Garmin................................................................................................................ 417
Software License Agreement.............................................................................................. 417
Limited Warranty for G3X Touch Products.......................................................................... 417
AOPA Airport Directory Notice........................................................................................... 418
AC-U-KWIK LICENSE AGREEMENT..................................................................................... 419
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service Agreement........................................................................ 419
Weather Data Warranty..................................................................................................... 419
Index....................................................................................................................................Index-1
190-02472-00 Rev. D Garmin G3X Touch™ Pilot’s Guide for Certified Aircraft vii
Table of Contents
Blank Page
viii Garmin G3X Touch™ Pilot’s Guide for Certified Aircraft 190-02472-00 Rev. D
System Overview
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Overview
System
1.1 LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS
Instruments
Flight
The G3X Touch™ system may consist of the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Garmin Display Unit (GDU™) 460
EIS
– Single Display: Split Primary Flight Display (PFD) & Multi Function Display (MFD),
standalone Multi Function Display (MFD)
Interface
CNS
– Multiple Displays: PFD, MFD, or split-screen
– Landscape orientation
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
GDU 460 (10.6 inch)

AFCS
(Landscape Orientation)
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-02472-00 Rev. D Garmin G3X Touch™ Pilot’s Guide for Certified Aircraft 1
System Overview
• GDU 470
Overview
System
– Single Display: Split Primary Flight Display (PFD) & Multi Function Display (MFD),
standalone Multi Function Display (MFD)
– Multiple Displays: MFD, PFD, or split-screen
Instruments
Flight
– Portrait Orientation
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
GDU 470 (7 inch) (Portrait Orientation)

Avoidance
Hazard
• GSU 25D
– Garmin Sensor Unit sub-system for the G3X Touch (Air Data Computer (ADC), and
the Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS))
Additional
Features
– ADC: Processes data from the pitot-static system and outside air tem-
perature (OAT) sensor.
– AHRS: Provides aircraft attitude and heading information to the PFD.
AFCS
The AHRS contains advanced sensors (including accelerometers and rate

sensors) and interfaces with the magnetometer to obtain magnetic field
Annun/Alerts
information, with the ADC to obtain air data, and with the GDU to obtain
GPS information. AHRS operation is discussed later in this section.
Appendix
Index
2 Garmin G3X Touch™ Pilot’s Guide for Certified Aircraft 190-02472-00 Rev. D
System Overview
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
GSU 25D
Interface
CNS
• GMU 11
– Magnetometer: Measures the local magnetic field and sends data to the AHRS for
Navigation
processing to determine aircraft magnetic heading.
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
GMU 11
• GTP 59
AFCS
– Temperature Probe: Provides raw air temperature data.

Annun/Alerts
Appendix
GTP 59
Index
System Overview
• GAP 26
Overview
System
– AOA Probe: Sends dynamic air pressure for angle of attack (AOA), when paired
with a GSU 25.
Instruments
Flight
EIS
GAP 26
Interface
CNS
• GSA 28
– Auto Pilot Servo: Used for automatic control of pitch, roll, yaw, and trim.
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
GSA 28
• GEA 24
AFCS
– Engine and Airframe Unit: Receives and processes signals from the engine and
airframe sensors.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
GEA 24
System Overview
• GAD 27
Overview
System
– Provides a power source to keep essential avionics online during engine start (14V
airframes only).
– Supports wig-wag function where the landing and taxi lights are flashed in an
Instruments
Flight
alternating fashion (14V and 28 V airframes).
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
GAD 27
Planning
Flight
• GAD 29B/29D
Avoidance
– ARINC 429 interface: Transmits and receives ARINC 429 signals for interface to
Hazard
panel-mount IFR GPS navigators.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
GAD 29B
Appendix
Index
System Overview
• GMC 507 (AFCS Mode Controller)

Overview
System
– Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) Mode Controller. The GMC 507 provides a
user interface for the autopilot and flight director function of the G3X system.
Instruments
Flight
EIS
GMC 507
Interface
CNS
• GTR 20 (VHF Communications Radio)

– A remote-mounted VHF COM transceiver that operates in the 118.000 to 136.975
Navigation
MHz frequency range with a 25 kHz channel spacing. The GTR 20 features a built-
GPS
in two-place stereo intercom with alert audio, 3D audio, and stereo music inputs.
– Fully controlled by G3X Touch displays.
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
GTR 20
Appendix
Index
System Overview
• GTR 200B (VHF Communications Radio)
Overview
System
– A panel-mounted VHF COM transceiver that operates in the 118.000 to 136.975
MHz frequency range with a 25 kHz channel spacing. The GTR 200B features
a built-in two-place stereo intercom with alert audio, 3D audio, Bluetooth, and
Instruments
Flight
stereo music inputs.
– For detailed operating information, reference the GTR 200/200B Pilot's Guide p/n
190-01553-01.
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
GTR 200B
Planning
Flight
• GMA 245R
– A remoted mounted digital audio panel with stereo intercom system (ICS), 3D
Avoidance
Hazard
audio and Bluetooth capability.
– Provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone, receiver audio
Additional
selection, and speaker output, with interfaces to dual NAV/COM radios and Marker Features
Beacon.
– Fully controlled by G3X Touch displays.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
GMA 245R
Appendix
Index
System Overview
• GDL® 5XR
Overview
System
– GDL 50R: ADS-B receiver

– GDL 51R: SXM receiver
Instruments
– GDL 52R: ADS-B/SXM combination receiver

Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GDL 50R
GPS
G3X TOUCH SYSTEM

The G3X Touch System can be configured as follows:
Planning
Flight
• Standalone MFD with optional EIS. NOTE: Remote annunciator 'Engine'

lights are required when a standalone MFD with EIS is installed outside of
Avoidance
Hazard
the pilot's primary field of view.

• One GDU 470 (7" portrait) display unit (provides both PFD and MFD)
Additional
Features
• One GDU 460 (10" landscape) display unit (provides both PFD and MFD)
• Two GDU 470 (7" portrait) display units (one configured as PFD and one as
AFCS
MFD)
• One GDU 460 (10" landscape) display unit and one GDU 470 (7" portrait)
Annun/Alerts
display unit
• Additional GDU's may be installed for the copilot on the right side of the
panel in a side-by-side cockpit or the second cockpit of a tandem aircraft.
Appendix
Copilot GDU's can display a backup PFD using the same ADAHRS data as the
pilot's PFD.
Index
System Overview
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
GDU 470 (standalone MFD, optional EIS)
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
GDU 470 (split-screen PFD/MFD, no EIS)
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
GDU 460 (split-screen PFD/MFD, EIS optional)

Index
System Overview
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Dual GDU 470s (PFD & MFD, EIS optional)

Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
GDU 460 and GDU 470 (PFD & MFD, EIS optional)
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
System Overview
G3X Touch AML STC Avionics System
Overview
RS-232
System
GFC500
GAD 27 Aircraft Aircraft
GDL 5xR
4 GTP 59 Static Pitot
(ADS-B In and/or
(Optional) OAT SXM)
GMC 507 GSA 28
Wig-Wag
(Optional) A/P Controller Yaw Servo
14 V 14 V 14 V (Optional) (Optional)
Instruments
Flight
to S A P
S P
GDU 4x0 GEA24 GSU 25 G5 GSA 28 GSA 28 GSA 28
8 Standby Trim Servo
PFD 1 RS-232 ADAHRS Pitch Servo Roll Servo
1
(Backup (Optional) (Optional) (Optional) (Optional)
ADAHRS)
A
CAN BUS
EIS
RS- RS-232
AOA
232 2
RS-232
RS-232
GAD GEA 24
GMU 11 13 14 V from
(Optional) GAD27
EIS
GTS 8XX
Interface
GTX RS-232
(Optional)
TAS/TCAS
CNS
A429 Transponder (Backup EIS)
5
(Optional) (Optional)
Stereo RS-232
Audio
GDU 4x0 2
GDU 4x0 Engine/
RS-232 GDU 4x0
PFD 2 GAP 26 MFD 1 Airframe
MFD 2
Navigation
7
HSDB
2 AOA (Optional)
Sensors
(Optional) (Optional)
GPS
(Optional)
Mono
Audio RS-232 WX-500
MapMx Storm GTR 20/
RS-232 CO
scope RS-232 3
RS-232 Detector 200B COM
(Optional)
(ADS-B)
RS-232 (Optional)
Planning
Flight
Connext
(Flt Plan
Xfer)
RS-232
3 MapMx
No. 1 GPS/COM
A429 Optional)
(NAV)
Avoidance
A429
Hazard
(GPS) RS-232
GAD 29
A429
Data (Air Data)
Concentrator 3,6
(Optional) A429 No. 2 GPS/COM
(NAV) (Optional)
Additional
A429
Features
(GPS) KEY:
Sta ndard
Analog GMA 245R G3X Equip
CRS & HDG Audio 9
Panel Audio
(Optional) Optional
G3X Equip
Non-Garmin
Autopilot Garmin COM or
Inte rfa cing
AFCS
6 3,6
(Optional) NAV/COM Equip
(Optional)
G3X Touch System (Example)

Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
System Overview
EXTERNAL NAVIGATORS (OPTIONAL)

Overview
System
The G3X Touch can also communicate with the following optional external navigators:
• SL30 Nav/Comm Transceiver
Instruments
Flight
• GNC® series Nav/Comm Transceiver

• GTN™ or GNS Series Units
• GPS 175
EIS
• GNX™ 375
Interface
CNS
USING THE G3X TOUCH WITH AN EXTERNAL GPS NAVIGATOR

Navigation
WARNING: Do not use the approach information provided by the VFR

GPS
navigation database residing within the G3X Touch as a means of navigating

any instrument approach. The G3X Touch VFR navigation database is limited
to present only the waypoints for the final approach leg of a published
Planning
Flight
procedure. These waypoints and associated course line are made available
for monitoring purposes only.
In a configuration which includes one or more external GPS navigators (i.e., GTN or
Avoidance
Hazard
GNS Series), the G3X Touch displays the selected external GPS Navigator’s flight plan
and guidance information.
Additional
Features
When an external navigator is configured the internal GPS can still be used for VFR
navigation. When using an external GPS navigator with the G3X Touch, touch FPL
Source > Internal to switch to the internal GPS navigation. Touch FPL Source >
External to return to the external GPS navigation.
AFCS
NOTE: The G3X Touch internal GPS flight plan is only for VFR use.
Annun/Alerts
Changing the Navigation Source

When an external navigator that supports both GPS and VOR/ILS capabilities (i.e.,
Appendix
GTN or GNS Series) is selected, the external navigator’s CDI Key is used to switch the
G3X Touch HSI between GPS and VOR/ILS navigation.
Index
System Overview
Selection Between Multiple Navigators
Overview
System
NOTE: On a standalone MFD, touch 'GPS' in the lower left corner of the
display to switch between 'Internal' and 'External' navigation sources.
Instruments
Flight
The G3X Touch CDI Source button in the PFD Options Window becomes available
when more than one source of navigation data is configured. The CDI Source button
toggles between the available navigation sources (e.g., between the internal G3X Touch
EIS
GPS and external SL30 VLOC sources, between an SL30 and a GNS 430, or between
two GNS 430s, etc.). Refer to the Flight Instruments section for more information.
Interface
CNS
Using MapMX Serial Data Input Format
When using a WAAS enabled external GPS navigator (i.e., GNS 430W/530W, GNS
Navigation
480 or any GTN Series navigator), and configuring an RS-232 input for ‘MapMX’ instead
GPS
of ‘Aviation In’, a more accurate depiction of the flight plan legs are displayed on the
moving map (i.e., holds, procedure turns, etc.). Non-WAAS external navigators do not
Planning
support MapMX. Refer to the G3X Touch Installation Manual for more information.
Flight
EXTERNAL GPS NAVIGATOR FAILURE
Avoidance
Hazard
In the event that all configured external GPS navigators fail, the G3X Touch reverts
to its internal VFR GPS for navigation and flight plan modifications.
Additional
Features
ADS-B DEVICES (OPTIONAL)
The G3X Touch is also compatible with the following ADS-B devices:
AFCS
• GDL 50R
• GDL 52R
Annun/Alerts
• GTX 345(R)
• GNX 375
Appendix
Index
System Overview
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

Overview
System
The G3X Touch can also communicate with the Garmin GFC 500. With the AFCS
configured, the G3X Touch issues pitch and roll steering commands to the autopilot.
Instruments
Refer to Section 9 (AFCS) for more information.

Flight
1.2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW

EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
Left Knob Nearest Direct-to SD Card Menu Back Right Knob

Button Button Slot Button Button
AFCS
Bezel Overview (GDU 460)

Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
System Overview
Overview
System
SD Card
Slot
Instruments
Flight
Nearest
Button
EIS
Direct-to
Button
Menu
Interface
Button
CNS
Back
Button
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Knob
Flight
Bezel Overview (GDU 470)
Avoidance
Hazard
NRST Key Press to display the Nearest Page for viewing the nearest airports,
intersections, NDBs, VORs, waypoints, frequencies, and airspaces
Additional
Direct-To Key Press to activate the Direct-To function, enter a destination waypoint and Features
establish a direct-to course to the selected destination
MENU Key Press once to view the Page Menu
Press twice to view the Main Menu
AFCS
Press a third time to clear the Main Menu

Press and hold to save a screenshot to the SD Card (if screenshot
Annun/Alerts
functionality is enabled)
BACK Key P ress to return to the previous screen
Press and hold to return to the default MFD Page
Appendix
Press and hold to toggle between full-screen and split-screen modes

(When configured, display layout can be toggled with a BACK key press
(no hold))
Index
System Overview
1.3 SECURE DIGITAL (SD) CARDS

Overview
System
NOTE: Refer to Appendix C for more information on SD Card use and data-
Instruments
bases.
Flight
T he G3X Touch data card slot uses Secure Digital (SD) cards. The SD card can be
used for software updates, checklist files, flight data logging, exporting Track Logs/User
EIS
Waypoints, and Importing/Exporting Flight Plans.

Installing an SD Card:
Interface
1) Insert the SD card in the SD card slot with the card contacts facing down
CNS
(or facing right on the GDU 470). The card should be flush with the face of
the bezel.
Navigation
2) To eject the card, gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch.
GPS
1.4 SYSTEM INITIALIZATION

Planning
Flight
During system initialization, the AHRS displays the message ‘AHRS ALIGN’ over the
attitude indicator. The AHRS should display valid attitude and heading fields typically
Avoidance
Hazard
within the first minute of starting the system. The AHRS can align itself both while
taxiing and during level flight.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
AHRS Align Message
The data link weather advisory and current database information are displayed when
Appendix
starting the system including valid operating dates, cycle number, and database type.
When this information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases
have expired), the pilot is prompted to continue.
Index
System Overview
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Database Information
Interface
CNS
Touch Continue to acknowledge the information.
Navigation
GPS
1.5 SYSTEM OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to the G3X Touch Installation Manual for information on
Planning
Flight
configuring the displays).
SPLIT MODE
Avoidance
Hazard

Press Split or Full in the upper left or right hand corner of the display
to toggle between split and full screen.
Additional
Features
Or:

Press and hold the BACK Key to toggle between split and full screen.
(When configured, display layout can be toggled with a BACK key press (no hold))
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
System Overview
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Touch To
Interface
Access The
CNS
Engine Page
Navigation
Split Mode - GDU 460

GPS
Touch To
Swap SPLIT
and FULL
Planning
Flight
Mode
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Split Mode - GDU 470
System Overview
PFD/MFD DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
Overview
System
Changing the PFD/MFD Startup Page:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
Instruments
2) Touch Setup > Display.
Flight
3) In the PFD/MFD Startup Page field, touch 'Auto' (selecting 'Auto' allows
selection of 'Auto', 'Map', 'Charts', 'Active FPL', 'Weather', 'Terrain', or
'Info') or 'Split'.
EIS
NOTE: MFD's are configured during installation to only allow 'Auto' selections.
Interface
The 'Split' selection is not allowed as the default MFD Startup Page. The pilot
CNS
must manually select the 'Split' touchscreen button in the upper corner of
the display after each power cycle.
Navigation
GPS
Changing the PFD/MFD Split-Screen Side (GDU 460 only):
Planning
Flight
3) In the PFD/MFD Split Screen Side field, touch 'Left' or 'Right'.
PFD OPTIONS
Avoidance
Hazard
Pressing the MENU Key while the PFD is in Full screen mode or pressing on the
HSI in any screen mode displays options for several navigation tools. While the PFD
Additional
Options menu is open, pressing the MENU Key again will open the Main Menu. Features
The PFD Options menu also has a More Options... button to enter PFD Setup to
customize the PFD itself.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
System Overview
Inset Windows
Overview
System
Each Inset Window can be configured to display one of a variety of information

alongside the PFD. Inset Windows are available on the GDU 460 display unit.
Instruments
Flight
Touch the magnification buttons to zoom in or out of the map. Touch

Map
anywhere else to show the split-screen map.
Touch the magnification buttons to zoom in or out of the map. Touch
Traffic
EIS
anywhere else to show the split-screen traffic display.

Flight Touch and drag to scroll through the flight plan. Touch to show the split-
Plan screen flight plan display.
Interface
CNS
Nearest Touch and drag to scroll through the list of nearest airports. Touch to
Airports select a nearest airport.
Navigation
G Meter Touch to reset the G Meter to zero.

GPS
Bearing Pointers
Planning
Flight
Two Bearing Pointers for the HSI can be enabled or disabled in the PFD Options
menu. Touch to set each Bearing Pointer to Off, GPS, VLOC (1/2) (when
configured), Best Airport (when configured), or Nearest Airport. Each Bearing
Avoidance
Hazard
Pointer is accompanied by an info box below the HSI indicating its target.
While the G3X Touch has an active flight plan, setting a Bearing Pointer to GPS will
Additional
Features
indicate the heading of the next waypoint on the active flight plan. Without an active
flight plan, setting a Bearing Pointer to GPS will not display a Bearing Pointer.
Timer
AFCS
A simple timer for measuring arbitrary periods of time, separately from the Flight
Timer. Tap Start to start the Timer. While the Timer is running, the Start button
Annun/Alerts
becomes a Stop button which pauses the Timer. Reset will set the Timer to zero and
stop the Timer. The Timer is visible at the left-center of the status bar at the bottom of
the screen, labeled as 'TMR'. The Timer can also be configured to display in the Data
Appendix
Bar. Pressing the Back Key to close the PFD Options menu will not interrupt the Timer.
Index
System Overview
Minimums
Overview
System
The Minimums option sets a minimum barometric altitude. If the G3X Touch detects
the aircraft descending to this altitude, the Minimums Alert will sound and the text on
Instruments
the minimums button is displayed in amber.
Flight
GDU 460 Knob Operation
The display unit knobs are highly customizable and can be configured for a variety of
EIS
functions, especially for PFD functions. The two options that configure the PFD knobs
are found in the PFD Setup menu. On the PFD display unit, press the MENU button
Interface
and touch the More Options... on-screen button.
CNS
The "main" PFD knobs are by default on the left-hand side of the display, and
"alternate" knobs on the right. This can be changed by pressing the MENU key twice
Navigation
GPS
and touching the PFD icon, then changing PFD Split Screen Side from Right to Left.
By default the main inner knob will adjust the HSI's heading bug, and the main outer
knob will adjust the altitude bug. The alternate inner knob will adjust the HSI course
Planning
Flight
selection (in OBS mode) or the VLOC course, depending on the current CDI source. The
alternate outer knob will adjust the local barometric pressure setting.
Avoidance
Hazard
The functionality of the alternate knobs can be changed through the Right Side
Knob Action option in the PFD Setup menu. Note that this setting's name can change
to Left Side Knob Action if the split screen is set to Left instead of the default Right.
Additional
Features
The other settings available for the alternate knobs are FD Bug/Baro and Heading/
Altitude. FD Bug/Baro will set the alternate inner knob to adjust the Flight Director
bug if the Flight Director is active, and outer knob for local barometric pressure. Setting
AFCS
the alternate knobs to Heading/Altitude will mirror the functions of the main knobs.
Additionally, the option to Press To Toggle Knob Action is available to get more
Annun/Alerts
functionality out of the PFD knobs. When enabled, pressing either inner knob will
change the knobs between main knob functions and alternate knob functions. This
feature is intended for cockpits that frequently use Split Screen features, since the
Appendix
split screen will reserve a knob for MFD functions. "Main" functions will always be
Heading/Altitude, and "alternate" functions will be specified in the Right Side Knob
Action setting (also known as Left Side Knob Action).
Index
System Overview
GDU 470 Knob Operation

Overview
System
The GDU 470 has a single knob which is used for the PFD when in full-screen
PFD mode, and is used for the MFD for all other display modes. For the full-screen
Instruments
PFD, the "Press To Toggle Knob Action" setting is always enabled (in order to always
Flight
have access to the Baro setting via the knob), and the "Toggle Knob Action" setting
provides the same knob action selections as the GDU 460 (Course/Baro, FD Bug/Baro,
or Heading/Altitude).
EIS
More Options...
Interface
Touching More Options... opens the PFD Setup menu that allows customization
CNS
of PFD appearance and functionality. Changing both PFD Presentation and Attitude
Presentation to Round Gauges will configure the PFD to resemble a "six-pack" style
Navigation
panel of mechanical gauges.

GPS
Option Setting Description

PFD Presentation Changes the PFD indicators for airspeed, altitude, vertical speed, and turn
Planning
Flight
(GDU 460 only) coordinator between linear Tapes and circular Round Gauges.
Attitude
Changes attitude indicator between Full Screen where the artificial
Presentation
Avoidance
horizon spans the whole screen, and Round Gauge.

Hazard
(GDU 460 only)

Off Disables wind display.
Wind Vector Speed/Dir Displays winds as a single arrow and speed.
Additional
Features
Head/X-wind Displays winds as head and crosswind components.

Heading HSI will always display magnetic heading
HSI Orientation HSI will display ground track instead of magnetic
Auto Trk/Hdg
heading when airborne and GPS data is available
AFCS
Toggles the CDI Scale between 0.25 nm, 1.25 nm, 5.00 nm.
CDI Scale
NOTE: Applies to internal GPS source only.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
System Overview
Left/Right inner knob Left/Right outer knob
Overview
System
Left/Right Side
Knob Action Course/Baro CRS value Local barometric pressure
(GDU 460 only)
Instruments
Flight
FD Bug/Baro Flight Director bug Local barometric pressure
Toggle Knob
Action
EIS
(GDU 470 only) Heading/Altitude Heading bug Altitude bug
Interface
NOTE: If the PFD Split Screen Side is set to Right in Display Settings, this option will appear as
CNS
"Left Side Knob Action."
Press To Toggle When enabled, pressing an inner knob will toggle the functionality
Knob Action of inner and outer knobs. Knobs revert to previous functions after 10
Navigation
(GDU 460 only) seconds. Useful for situations where the split-screen is frequently used.
GPS
NOTE: This setting is always enabled on the GDU 470.
Off Disables G Meter.
Planning
G Meter appears in place of HSI when G3X Touch
Flight
G Meter Auto Display
detects G load above +2.1G or below -0.5G.
On (Replace HSI) G Meter replaces HSI.
Avoidance
Lateral Deviation Toggles lateral deviation indicator.
Hazard
Synthetic Vision Overlays 3D-rendered terrain on full-screen attitude presentation.
Flt. Path Marker Overlays a marker on full-screen attitude presentation indicating
Additional
aircraft bearing relative to heading, as affected by winds. Features
Overlays 3D magenta flight path boxes on full-screen attitude
Pathways
presentation, indicating path to next waypoint.
Overlays indications of specific aircraft on full-screen attitude
Traffic
AFCS
presentation.
More PFD Options
Annun/Alerts
G3X TOUCH SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS

When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed over
Appendix
the instrument(s) or data experiencing the failure. After starting the system, certain
instruments remain invalid as equipment begins to initialize. All instruments should
be operational within one minute of starting the system. If any instrument remains
flagged, and it is not likely an installation related problem, the G3X Touch should be
Index
serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
System Overview
AHRS OPERATION
Overview
System
The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) performs attitude, heading,
and vertical acceleration calculations for the G3X Touch System, utilizing GPS,
Instruments
magnetometer, and air data, in addition to information from its internal sensors.
Flight
Attitude and heading information are updated on the PFD while the AHRS receives
appropriate combinations of information from the external sensor inputs.
The AHRS (GSU 25D) corrects for shifts and variations in the Earth’s magnetic field by
EIS
applying the Magnetic Field Variation Database. The Magnetic Field Variation Database
is derived from the International Geomagnetic Reference Field (IGRF). The IGRF is a
Interface
mathematical model that describes the Earth’s main magnetic field and its annual rate
CNS
of change. The database is updated approximately every 5 years via a GDU software
update. Failure to update this database could lead to erroneous heading information
Navigation
being displayed to the pilot.

GPS
GPS Data unavailable

ble
Planning
available
le
e
bl
Flight
Magnetometer Data Magnetometer Data

unavailable
ble
unavailable
ble
le
available
le
e
available
le
e
bl
Avoidance
Hazard
Air Data Air Data

unavailable
ble
available
le
e
available
le
e
un
Additional
Features
av
ail
ab
le
AHRS no- AHRS no-Mag/ AHRS

AHRS Normal Mag Mode no-Air Mode no-GPS
Operation Attitude/Heading Invalid
Heading Invalid Mode
AFCS
Loss of GPS, magnetometer, or air data inputs is communicated to the pilot by

message advisory alerts. Any failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors results in loss
Annun/Alerts
of attitude and heading information (indicated by red ‘X’ flags over the corresponding
flight instruments). If the G3X Touch senses the magnetic heading measurement is
valid, but possibly outside of the internal accuracy limits, the numeric heading value on
Appendix
the PFD is displayed in yellow.

Index
System Overview
If GPS input fails, the AHRS can continue to provide attitude and heading information
Overview
to the PFD as long as magnetometer and airspeed data are available and valid.
System
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS continues to output valid attitude
information; however, the heading output on the PFD Page is flagged as invalid with
Instruments
Flight
a red ‘X’.
Failure of the air data input has no effect on the AHRS output while AHRS is receiving
valid GPS information. Invalid/unavailable airspeed data in addition to GPS failure
EIS
results in loss of all attitude and heading information. Likewise, loss of magnetometer
(heading) data, in combination with loss of GPS data, results in a loss of all attitude
and heading information.
Interface
CNS
If a Garmin G5 Electronic Flight Instrument is installed, it will provide a redundant
source of attitude and air data in addition to that provided by the dedicated ADAHRS
Navigation
unit (GSU 25D). If the sensor source selection is AUTO and attitude or air data is
GPS
unavailable from any dedicated ADAHRS unit, the PFD will automatically revert to
displaying data from the standby display. This will be annunciated on the PFD with an
Planning
Flight
‘AHRS REVERT’ or ‘ADC REVERT’ message.
1.6 ACCESSING SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY
Avoidance
Hazard
MENUS
The G3X Touch has a dedicated MENU Key. Press MENU once to display a context-
Additional
Features
sensitive list of options for the page or the dedicated PFD. Press MENU twice to
display the Main Menu.
The Page Menu allows the user to access additional features or make setting changes
AFCS
which specifically relate to the currently displayed page. The menu will display ‘No
Options’ when there are no options for the page selected.
Annun/Alerts
DATA ENTRY
Data can be entered by using the touchscreen or the knob. In some instances, such
Appendix
as when entering an identifier, the G3X Touch tries to predict the desired identifier
based on the characters being entered. In this case, if the desired identifier appears,
touch Enter to confirm the entry without entering the rest of the identifier manually.
Index
This can save the pilot from having to enter all the characters of the identifier.
System Overview
Instead of using character-by-character data entry, touch Find to search by recent

Overview
waypoints, nearest waypoints, flight plan waypoints, user waypoints, name, or city.
System
Entering data:
1) With the keypad displayed, begin entering data.
Instruments
Flight
a) Touch the desired letters and/or numbers. Touch Numeric to access

the numbers on a GDU 470.
b) Touch Enter.
Or:
EIS
a) Touch Find.
b) Touch the Recent, Nearest Airports, Flight Plan, User, Search
Interface
Name, or Search City Tab.

CNS
c) Touch the desired waypoint from the list.

Or:
Navigation
a) Turn the small Knob below the keypad to activate the cursor and enter
GPS
the first letter and/or number.

b) Turn the large Knob below the keypad to move the cursor to the next
character position.
Planning
Flight
c) Repeat steps ‘b’ and ‘c ‘ as necessary.

d) Touch Enter or press the Knob below the keypad.
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Data Entry
Index
System Overview
PAGES
Overview
System
A page navigation bar is displayed on the lower portion of the MFD. The right side
shows a list of abbreviated names for each of the pages, and the left side shows the
Instruments
name of the current page.
Flight
Touch the page navigation bar to select the desired page or turn the large Knob
associated with the MFD to cycle through the pages.
EIS
Interface
CNS
Page Navigation (Example)
Navigation
GPS
MAIN PAGES
Selecting a main page:
Planning
Flight
1) Touch the Page Navigation Bar on the MFD.
2) Touch the desired page from the Select Page menu.
Avoidance
Hazard
Or:
Turn the large Knob associated with the MFD.
Additional
• Main Pages Features
Map Page (Map) Terrain Page (Ter)

Charts Page (Cht) Traffic Page (Trf)*
AFCS
Waypoint Page (Wpt) SiriusXM Page (SXM)*

Active Flight Plan Page (FPL) Info Page (Info)
Annun/Alerts
Weather Page (Wx) (optional) Engine Page (Eng)*

*May not be available, dependent upon configuration
Appendix
Index
System Overview
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
Main Pages
GPS
User Enabled Main Pages

Planning
Flight
In Display Setup the user can add or remove the Checklists, Video, and/or SiriusXM
Audio page to/from the Main Pages.
Avoidance
Hazard
Displaying/removing a user enabled main page:

1) From the Main Menu, touch Setup > Display.
2) Touch
Additional
in the Checklists Main Page, Video Main Page, or

Features
SiriusXM Audio Main Page field.

3) Touch Show or Hide.NEAREST PAGES
AFCS
The Nearest Pages are selected by pressing the NRST Key.

Selecting the NRST pages:
Annun/Alerts
1) Touch the NRST Key.

2) Turn the large Knob associated with the MFD.
Or:
Appendix
1) Touch the Page Navigation Bar.

2) Touch the desired page from the Select Page menu.
The Nearest Pages contain the following information:
Index
• Apt (Airport)—identifier, bearing, distance, length of the longest runway, and

common traffic advisory (CTAF) or tower frequency.
System Overview
• Wx (Airport Weather) (GDU 4X0 with FIS-B weather receiver)—identifier, bearing,
Overview
distance, METAR text, and ATIS, AWOS, or ASOS frequency.
System
• VOR (VHF Omnidirectional Radio Beacon)—identifier, facility type (symbol),
bearing, distance, and frequency.
Instruments
Flight
• NDB (Non Directional Beacons)—identifier, facility, type (symbol), bearing,
distance, and frequency.
• INT (Intersection)—identifier, bearing, and distance.
EIS
• VRP (Visual Reporting Point) (Atlantic)—identifier, bearing, and distance.
Interface
• USR (User Waypoints)—name, bearing, and distance.
CNS
• CTY (City)—name, bearing, and distance.
Navigation
• ATC (Air Route Traffic Control Center)—name, bearing, distance, and frequency.
GPS
• FSS (Flight Service Station)—name, bearing, distance, frequency, and VOR (if
applicable).
Planning
Flight
• ASPC (Airspace)—name, time to entry (when applicable), and status.
1.7 ACCESSING ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Avoidance
Hazard
NOTE: A System Status Message and the word ‘External’ appearing next to the
Additional
GPS Status indicates the display connected to the GPS antenna is unavailable Features
and the remaining display(s) are using the external GPS navigator for 2D GPS
position data. In this case, the data collected from the external navigator is
not considered a sufficient source of GPS data by the AHRS.
AFCS
VIEWING GPS RECEIVER STATUS

Annun/Alerts
Internal system checking is performed to ensure the GPS receiver is providing

accurate data to the GDU(s).
The G3X Touch GDUs can be configured to share GPS information (refer to the G3X
Appendix
Touch Installation Manual for configuration information). For example, a GDU can be
configured to share its GPS position, velocity, and time data with another GDU. If a
GDU is not using its own GPS receiver, the name of the GDU providing the data (i.e.,
Index
‘3D GPS Location (PFD)’ or ‘3D GPS Location (MFD)’) is displayed on the INFO Page.
System Overview
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
GPS Status
The GPS Status will display one of the following conditions:

Planning
Flight
• Autolocate—Receiver is looking for any satellite whose almanac has been

collected, which can take up to 5 minutes
Avoidance
Hazard
• Searching the Sky—Receiver is looking for satellites

• Acquiring Satellites—Receiver is looking for and collecting data from satellites
Additional
visible at its last known or initialized location, but has not acquired a fix
Features
• 2D GPS Location—At least three satellites have been acquired and a two-
dimensional location fix has been calculated. “2D Differential” appears when
AFCS
you are receiving DGPS corrections in 2D mode

• 3D GPS Location—At least four satellites have been acquired and a three-
Annun/Alerts
dimensional fix has been calculated. “3D Differential” appears when you are
receiving DGPS corrections in 3D mode
• Lost Satellite Reception—the receiver is no longer tracking enough satellites for a
Appendix
2D or 3D fix
Viewing GPS receiver status information:
Turn the large Knob associated with the MFD to select the Info Page.
Index
Or:
System Overview
1) Touch the Page Navigation Bar on the MFD.
Overview
System
2) Touch the Info Page from the Select Page menu.
NEW LOCATION
Instruments
Flight
The ‘New Location’ menu option on the Info Page is used when the GPS Receiver
is having trouble finding the satellites it expects to be there.
Entering a new location:
EIS
1) From the Info Page, while the unit is searching for satellites, press the
MENU Key.
Interface
2) Touch New Location.
CNS
3) Touch Automatic, Use Map, or Use Identifier.
4) After selecting your approximate position using the map or entering an
Navigation
GPS
identifier, touch Enter.
5) The GPS Receiver will begin a new search based on the location entered.
Planning
ACQUIRING SATELLITES
Flight
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for
navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data (collected continuously from the
Avoidance
Hazard
satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be in view.
“Acquiring Satellites” is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites
have been acquired for computing a solution.
Additional
Features
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D differential GPS solution, “3D
GPS Location” is indicated as the solution until the 3D differential fix has finished
acquisition.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
System Overview
SATELLITE INFORMATION
Overview
System
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a satellite

constellation diagram. The outer circle of the constellation diagram represents the
horizon, the inner circle represents 45° above the horizon, and the center point shows
Instruments
Flight
the position directly overhead. Each satellite is represented by a square containing the
Pseudo-Random Noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite identification number).
The Info Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels
EIS
due to poor satellite coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks
onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed for each satellite in view, with the
appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 33-64 for WAAS) below each bar. The
Interface
CNS
progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar

appearance:
Navigation
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite

GPS
- Gray bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can
be used
Planning
Flight
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution

POSITION
Avoidance
Hazard
The Position box on the Info Page displays latitude, longitude, accuracy (in feet),
reference waypoint, type, distance, direction, and bearing. The current position
can be marked as a user waypoint by touching the latitude and longitude button.
Additional
Features
The reference waypoint is designed to display the current position in relation to a

prominent landmark. The pilot can change the reference waypoint ‘Nearest Type’
using the ‘Change Nearest Type’ page menu option. By default the Nearest Type is
AFCS
set to ‘Automatic’, which will display the nearest large airport, enroute VOR, or city (in
that order).
Annun/Alerts
Changing the Nearest Type:

1) From the Info Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Touch Change Nearest Type.
Appendix
3) Touch Automatic, Airport, VOR, NDB, Intersection, City, or

Waypoint.
Index
System Overview
Marking Current Location as a Waypoint:
Overview
System
1) From the Info Page, touch the latitude and longitude.
Or:
1) From the Info Page, press the MENU Key, and touch Mark Waypoint.
Instruments
Flight
2) Touch Yes on the confirmation dialog box.
3) Optionally touch the Name field to rename the waypoint.
4) Touch Back.
EIS
1.8 SYSTEM SETTINGS
Interface
The Setup option in the Main Menu allows management of the following system
CNS
parameters:
• Data Bar • Connext (optional)
Navigation
GPS
• Display • Weather (optional)
• Sound • Bluetooth
Planning
Flight
• Units • PFD (optional)
• Time • XPDR (optional)
Avoidance
• Map • Autopilot (optional)
Hazard
• Position • Flight Director (optional)
• Alarms • Navigation
Additional
Features
• Airspace • Keyboard
AFCS
Accessing system settings:

1) Press the MENU Key twice.
Annun/Alerts
2) Touch Setup.
3) Touch the desired option on the Setup Page.
Appendix
Index
System Overview
TRANSPONDER
Overview
System
If configured to ‘Set By Pilot’ in configuration mode, (refer to the Installation Manual

for configuration information) the pilot can change the Flight ID and enable/disable
ADS-B Transmit from the Transponder Setup Page and the Transponder Pop-up Window.
Instruments
Flight
Setting the Flight ID:

2) Touch Setup > XPDR.
EIS
3) Touch the ‘Flight ID’ Field.

4) Enter the Flight ID and touch Enter.
Interface
CNS
Or:
1) Touch the Transponder on the PFD.
Navigation
2) Touch the ‘Flight ID’ Field.

GPS
3) Enter the Flight ID and touch Enter.

Enabling/disabling ADS-B Transmit:
Planning
Flight

2) Touch Setup > XPDR.
Avoidance
Hazard
3) Touch the ‘ADS-B Transmit’ Field.

4) Touch Enabled or Disabled.
Additional
Features
DATA BAR SETUP

Displaying the Data Bar Setup Page:
AFCS

2) Touch Setup > Data Bar.
Annun/Alerts
MODE BUTTON SCREEN SIDE

Determines which side of the display the Mode Button is shown. Settings
are Auto, Left, and Right.
Appendix
COM RADIO SCREEN SIDE

Adjusts the position of the COM Radio control to either the Left or Right side of
the Data Bar. This setting is only allowed for single COM radio installations (with dual
Index
COM radio installations, COM 1 is always on the left and COM 2 is always on the
right).
System Overview
COM RADIO VOLUME INDICATOR
Overview
System
Used to display (temporarily) volume indicator on the Data Bar, settings are
Show and Hide.
Instruments
COM RADIO VOLUME SHORTCUT ( GDU 460 ONLY)
Flight
When enabled, this option to provides quick access to the selected COM radio
volume control by dedicating one of the GDU knobs to volume and squelch when the
EIS
tune radio page is the active page ( annunciated on screen
just above knob). When disabled, the tune radio page dedicates all available knobs
to setting and tuning the standby frequency (i.e., a single knob in split-screen display
Interface
CNS
mode, or both knobs in full-screen display mode).
TRANSPONDER SCREEN SIDE
Navigation
GPS
Adjusts the position of the transponder control to either the Left or Right side of
the Data Bar.
Planning
Flight
AUDIO PANEL SCREEN SIDE
Adjusts the position of the audio panel control to either the Left or Right side of
the Data Bar.
Avoidance
Hazard
AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
Additional
Displays either Normal or Minimized audio panel controls on the Data Bar. Features
AUDIO PANEL VOLUME SHORT-CUT (GDU 460 ONLY)

Enables or Disables the audio panel volume short-cut.
AFCS
USER TIMER BUTTON

Annun/Alerts
Used to change the display of the User Timer Button on the Data Bar.
Selections are: Hide, Show on Left, and Show on Right. The User Timer can also be
accessed from the User Timer icon on the Main Menu, from the PFD Option Menu, and
Appendix
by pressing "TMR 00:00" on the PFD status bar (when visible - GDU 470). Press the
User Timer Button to start/stop the timer, press Reset to reset the timer.
Index
System Overview
MAX DISPLAYED FIELD COUNT (GDU 460 ONLY)

Overview
System
Used to select the maximum number (1-8) of available data boxes shown on the
Data Bar.
Instruments
Flight
DATA FIELDS
Refer to the Annunciations and Alerts Section for a list of available Data Bar Field
options.
EIS
Changing the information shown in the Data Bar fields:

Interface
CNS
2) Touch Setup > Data Bar > Data Fields.

3) Touch one of the Data Bar fields.
Navigation
4) Touch a new data field from the list.

GPS
GENERAL DISPLAY INFORMATION

Planning
BACKLIGHT SETTINGS
Flight
The Backlight Intensity (display brightness) can be set to ‘Manual’, ‘Light Bus’, or
‘Photo Cell’. With ‘Manual’ selected, the pilot can manually adjust the desired backlight
Avoidance
Hazard
intensity. After each power cycle the Backlight Intensity is set to the default, which is
configurable. Refer to the G3X Touch Installation Manual for more information.
Additional
Features
EIS DISPLAY LOCATION (OPTIONAL)

In Configuration Mode the ‘EIS Display Location’ setting can be set to one of the
following:
AFCS
• AUTO—Displays the EIS Strip on the MFD, or on the PFD if the MFD is not
displayed.
Annun/Alerts
• PFD—Always displays the EIS Strip on PFD .

• User Selected—Enables the user to choose between ‘AUTO’ and ‘PFD’ via the
Display Setup menu.
Appendix
For more information on how to enable the ‘EIS Display Location’ setting in
Configuration Mode refer to the G3X Touch Installation Manual.
Index
System Overview
SCREENSHOT
Overview
System
Saving a Screenshot to the SD Card (if Screenshot function is
enabled):
1) Navigate to the desired screen.
Instruments
Flight
2) Press and hold the MENU Key. A ‘Screenshot saved to card’ message will
appear.
SCREEN CLEANING
EIS
Cleaning the display:
Interface
CNS
2) Touch Tools > Screen Cleaning.
3) Clean screen with a clean, lint-free cloth (such as the Garmin cleaning
Navigation
cloth). Avoid any chemical cleaners or solvents that can damage plastic
GPS
components.
4) Per the on-screen instructions, press the MENU Key to swap sides of the
Planning
Flight
display, or press the BACK Key to return to Tools.
NOTE: Make sure that no dust or grit accumulates at the bottom of the display
glass. The GDU displays use invisible infrared beams for touch detection, this
Avoidance
Hazard
makes it very important to keep the screen clean, especially along the edges.
DISPLAY SETUP
Additional
Features
Accessing Display Setup Options:

AFCS

Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
System Overview
Setting Options Description Notes

Overview
System
Manual Provides configurable manual control

Adjusts backlight according to external
Light Bus
Backlight cockpit control, if connected
Instruments
Flight
Control Uses bezel light sensor to automatically

Photo Cell adjust backlight to complement
ambient light level
EIS
Backlight Slider Directly sets backlight level if Backlight

Intensity Control Control is set to Manual
Interface
List of specific pages to display on

CNS
Startup Page Page

startup.
Navigation
Full Enables or disables Split Screen on GDU 460 PFD

GPS
Startup Page
startup only
Split
Planning
Flight
Toggle Split Disable

Enables/Disables Split Screen operation
Screen with
Enable using the BACK key
BACK key
Avoidance
Hazard
PFD Split Left Specifies the screen side the PFD page GDU 460 (no
Screen Side Right appears on EIS) PFD only
Additional
Enable
Features
Full MFD/ GDU 470 MFD

Shows or hides MFD/PFD toggle button
PFD Toggle Disable only
Map
AFCS
MFD Split Specifies page to display after GDU 460 MFD

Chart
Screen Page switching MFD to Split Screen only
PFD
Annun/Alerts
MFD Split Left Specifies which side the MFD Split GDU 460
Screen Side Right Screen appears on MFD only
Appendix
Display Setup Options

Index
System Overview
Overview
System
Narrow Narrower PFD, wider Split Screen GDU 460
PFD only (not
Instruments
PFD Split available
Flight
Normal Equal PFD and Split Screen areas
Screen Ratio when PFD is
displaying the
Wide Wider PFD, narrower Split Screen engine bar)
EIS
Interface
MFD Do not display
CNS
EIS Display Specifies which displays show the
EIS on a GDU
Location Engine Indication System strip
PFD 470 PFD
Navigation
GPS
Both
Left GDU 460 only;

EIS Screen Specifies which side of the screen that not available
Planning
Flight
Side the EIS strip appears on for some MFD
Right installations
Avoidance
MFD
Hazard
COM Radio
Specifies which displays show the COM
Display PFD
Radio buttons
Location Both
Additional
Features
Transponder MFD
Specifies which displays show the
Display PFD
Transponder buttons
Location Both
AFCS
On-Screen Show
Zoom Shows or hides zoom buttons
Annun/Alerts
Buttons Hide
Clockwise zooms in, in Maps and
Normal
Knob Zoom Charts
Appendix
Action Clockwise zooms out, in Maps and

Reverse
Charts
Index
System Overview

Overview
System
Day Full color map features

Map Color
Night High-contrast mode
Mode
Instruments
Auto Change depending on local time

Flight
Day Full color chart features

Chart Color
Night High-contrast mode
Mode
Auto Change depending on local time
EIS
Sirius Audio Show Shows or hides the Sirius Audio Main

Interface
Main Page Page

CNS
Hide
Disabled Allows capturing of screenshots. Field is
Screenshot available immediately when an SD card
Navigation
GPS
Enabled is inserted. See Appendix C.

Planning
Flight
SOUND SETUP
The pilot can manually adjust the desired SXM Volume, Message Volume, Traffic N/A
Avoidance
Hazard
Alert, Altitude Alert (On/Off), and Minimums Alert (On/Off). Message Volume controls
the banner message tones (e.g., “Approaching Airspace” or “Arriving at Waypoint”).
Alert Volume (e.g., terrain, traffic, autopilot, etc.) is set in configuration mode (refer to
Additional
Features
the G3X Touch Installation Manual for more information).

Adjusting SXM and/or Message Volume:
AFCS
2) Touch Setup > Sound.

3) Touch the ‘SXM Volume’ or ‘Message Volume’ Field.
Annun/Alerts
4) Touch and drag the slider to the desired percentage.

Appendix
Index
System Overview
Enabling/disabling the ‘Traffic Not Available’ audio alert:
Overview
System
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance section for more information regarding
the ‘Traffic Not Available’ audio alert.
Instruments
Flight
3) Touch Enabled or Disabled in the ‘Traffic N/A Alert’ Field.
EIS
Turning the altitude alert tone on/off:
Interface
CNS
NOTE: Refer to the Flight Instruments section for more information regarding
the Altitude Alert Tone.
Navigation
GPS
3) Touch Enabled or Disabled in the ‘Altitude Alert’ Field.
Planning
Flight
Turning the minimums alert tone on/off:
Avoidance
Hazard
NOTE: Refer to the Flight Instruments section for more information regarding
the Minimums Alert Tone.
Additional
1) Press the MENU Key twice. Features

3) Touch Enabled or Disabled in the ‘Minimums Alert’ Field.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
System Overview
UNITS SETUP
Overview
System
Changing unit settings:

Instruments
2) Touch Setup > Units.

Flight
3) Touch the desired field.

4) Touch the desired units.
EIS
Setting Options
Fahrenheit (°F)
Air Temperature
Interface
Celsius (°C)
CNS
Inches (Hg)
Baro Pressure Millibars (Mb)
Navigation
GPS
Hectopascals (HPa)
Pounds (lbs)
Weight
Planning
Kilograms (kg)
Flight
Units Setup Options

Avoidance
Hazard
TIME SETUP
Changing the time zone settings:
Additional
Features

2) Touch Setup > Time.
3) Touch Auto or Manual in the ‘Time Zone’ Field. Manual allows the pilot
AFCS
to adjust the UTC offset in 15 minute increments (HH:MM).

Changing the time format:
Annun/Alerts

2) Touch Setup > Time.
3) Touch the ‘Time Format’ Field.
Appendix
4) Touch 12 Hour, 24 Hour, or UTC.

Index
System Overview
MAP SETUP
Overview
System
Refer to section 5.2.
POSITION SETUP
Instruments
Flight
NOTE: Refer to Appendix D for more information on Map Datums and Loca-
tion Formats.
EIS
Changing position settings:
Interface
2) Touch Setup > Position.
CNS
3) Touch the desired field to change.
4) Touch the desired setting from the list.
Navigation
GPS
ALARMS SETUP
The Airspace Page allows the pilot to turn airspace alarms On/Off. The Alarms Page
Planning
Flight
allows the pilot to enable/disable the Arrival Alarm, Next Waypoint Alarm, Proximity
Alarm, and Fuel Tank Reminder Alarm.
Avoidance
Enabling/disabling the arrival alarm:
Hazard
2) Touch Setup > Alarms.
Additional
Features
3) Touch On or Off in the ‘Arrival’ Field.
4) If necessary, touch the arrival distance value.
5) Enter the desired distance using the keypad and touch Enter.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
System Overview
Changing the next waypoint alarm settings:

Overview
System

3) Touch to display the next waypoint alarm options.
Instruments
Flight
4) Touch Off, Distance, or Time.

5) If Time is selected, touch + or - to adjust the time (MM:SS).
6) If Distance is selected, touch the distance value and enter the desired
EIS
distance using the keypad.

Enabling/disabling the proximity waypoint alarm:
Interface

CNS

3) Touch On or Off in the ‘Proximity Waypoint’ Field.
Navigation
GPS
Enabling/disabling the fuel tank reminder alarm:

Planning
Flight

3) Touch On or Off in the ‘Fuel Tank Reminder’ Field.
4) With the 'Fuel Tank Reminder' 'On', touch '+' or '-' to adjust the time
Avoidance
Hazard
interval in 5 minute increments.

FUEL TANK REMINDER ALARM AND FUEL TANK TIMER
Additional
Features
The ‘Fuel Tank’ Reminder alarm is used as a reminder to switch fuel tanks. The
reminder message repeats at the specified interval after the beginning of each trip. The
Fuel Tank Timer (FUEL TIMER) data field option is the elapsed time since the ‘Fuel Tank’
AFCS
Reminder alarm was last issued (MM:SS).

Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
System Overview
AIRSPACE SETUP
Overview
System
The Airspace Alarms Setup page allows the pilot to enable/disable airspace alarms
for the following airspace: ClassB/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted, MOA
Instruments
(Military), Other/ADIZ, or Euro Airway.
Flight
Enabling/disabling airspace alarms:
EIS
2) Touch Setup > Airspace.
3) Touch On or Off to enable/disable the desired airspace alarms.
Interface
BLUETOOTH SETUP
CNS
Refer to Section 8.9.
Navigation
GPS
PFD SETUP
Refer to Section 1.5.
Planning
Flight
NAVIGATION SETUP
Avoidance
Waypoint Transition Mode can be set to 'Auto' or 'Distance'. In 'Auto' mode the
Hazard
G3X Touch selects the "best" next waypoint based on the aircraft's present position.
'Distance' mode allows the pilot to enter a radius around the active leg destination so
Additional
that when the aircraft is within the entered distance, the G3X Touch transitions to the Features
next waypoint in the route.

Changing the waypoint transition mode:
AFCS

2) Touch Setup > Navigation.
Annun/Alerts
3) Touch to display the waypoint transition mode options.

4) When selecting Distance, touch the distance value, enter the desired
distance using the keypad, and touch Enter.
Appendix
Index
System Overview
KEYBOARD SETUP
Overview
System
Changing keyboard settings:

Instruments
2) Touch Setup > Keyboard.

Flight
3) Touch ABCDE or QWERTY in the ‘Keyboard Format’ Field.

EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Overview
System
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Instruments
Flight
NOTE: Refer to Section 9 for Autopilot information.
EIS
Increased situational awareness is provided by replacing the traditional instruments
on the panel with an easy-to-scan Primary Flight Display (PFD) that features a horizon,
Interface
airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, heading, and course deviation information.
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
PFD (Full Screen) Features
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the
PFD.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
1 46 45 44 43 42 41
Overview
System
2
40
3
Instruments
Flight
4
39
5
38
6
EIS
37
7
36
8
35
Interface
9
CNS
34
10
33
11
Navigation
GPS
12 32
13 31
Planning
Flight
14 30
15
29
16
Avoidance
Hazard
28
17
18 27
Additional
Features
19
20
21
AFCS
22 23 24 25 26
Annun/Alerts
NOTE: GDU™ 460 displays can present the primary flight instruments in round
Appendix
gauge format. Access this setting via the "PFD Presentation" item on the
PFD Setup page from the Main Menu and select "Round Gauges."
Index
Flight Instruments
1 AFCS Status Box 24 Bearing 2 Pointer
Overview
System
2 True Airspeed (TAS) 25 Selected Heading Bug
3 Airspeed Indicator 26 Bearing 2 Information
Instruments
4 Attitude Indicator 27 Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
Flight
5 Pitch Scale 28 CDI Scale
6 Airspeed Trend Indicator 29 CAS Message Window
EIS
7 Flight Director Command Bars 30 Baro Minimums Box
8 Aircraft Symbol 31 Selected Course
Interface
9 Slip/Skid Indicator 32 Altimeter Barometric Setting
CNS
10 Lateral Deviation Scale & Course Deviation 33 Altimeter
Navigation
11 Vspeed Reference 34 Baro Minimums Bug
GPS
12 Ground Speed (GS) 35 Required Vertical Speed
13 Selected Heading 36 Selected Vertical Speed Bug
Planning
Flight
14 Wind Speed/Crosswind Component (Toggle) 37 Current Vertical Speed
15 Wind Direction/Head Wind Component 38 Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
(Toggle)
Avoidance
39
Hazard
16 Current Heading/Track Indicator Selected Altitude Bug
17 Course Pointer 40 Reference Altitude
18 Bearing 1 Pointer 41 VNAV Target Altitude
Additional
Features
19 Navigation Source 42 VNAV Indicator or Vertical Deviation
Indicator
20 Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) 43 Zero Pitch Line
AFCS
21 Bearing 1 Information 44 Standard Rate Turn Triangle

22 Standard Rate Turn Indicator 45 Flight Path Marker
Annun/Alerts
23 Half-standard Rate Turn Indicator 46 ESP Limits

Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
Overview
System
NOTE: The G3X Touch™ Vspeed Reference values and Flaps Tick Mark values
depend upon the aircraft’s specific system configuration and may vary from
Instruments
the examples discussed in this section.

Flight
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a rolling number gauge using a moving
tape. The true airspeed (TAS) is displayed in knots above the Airspeed Indicator. The
EIS
numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving tape are marked at intervals of
10 knots, miles per hour, or kilometers (depending on system configuration). Speed
indication starts at 30 knots. The actual airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer.
Interface
CNS
The pointer remains black until reaching never-exceed speed (VNE), at which point it
turns red.
Navigation
A color-coded (red, white, green, yellow, and red/white “barber pole”) speed range
GPS
strip is located on the moving tape. The colors denote flaps operating range, normal
operating range, caution range, and never-exceed speed (VNE). A red range is also
Planning
present for low speed awareness.

Flight
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical, magenta line, extending up or down on the
airspeed scale, shown to the right of the color-coded speed range strip. The end of
Avoidance
Hazard
the trend vector corresponds to the predicted airspeed in 6 seconds if the current rate
of acceleration is maintained. If the trend vector crosses VNE, the text of the actual
airspeed changes to yellow. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant
Additional
Features
or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
True Airspeed
AFCS
Vspeed References
Annun/Alerts
Actual Airspeed Airspeed Trend Vector

Appendix
Airspeed Color Ranges
Ground Speed
Index
Airspeed Indicator
Flight Instruments
VNE ADJUSTED FOR TRUE AIRSPEED OR MACH NUMBER
Overview
System
(OPTIONAL)
The airspeed indicator can optionally be configured to display VNE adjusted for true
Instruments
airspeed or maximum Mach number (MMO). This is useful in aircraft where true
Flight
airspeed or Mach number must be kept below a certain limit. If configured, the G3X
Touch PFD can calculate an adjusted VNE based on TAS or Mach in addition to IAS,
which will cause the displayed value for VNE to be reduced at high altitudes. A solid
EIS
red band is used between the TAS or Mach limit and the actual indicated value for VNE.
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Vne (indicated airspeed)
Planning
TAS or Mach limit
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Vne Adjusted for True Airspeed
Additional
Features
VSPEED REFERENCE
Vspeed references including VNE, Vno, Vso, Vs1, Vfe, Va, Vx, Vy, VYse, Vg, Vr, as well as several
AFCS
custom Vspeeds can be configured from the Aircraft Configuration Page, refer to the
G3X Touch Installation Manual for more information.
Annun/Alerts
When airspeed is present, the Vspeeds configured are also displayed at their
respective locations to the right of the airspeed scale, otherwise the Vspeeds are
displayed at the bottom of the airspeed indicator.
Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
Overview
System
Vspeed References
Instruments
Flight
Vspeed References
EIS
Vspeed References Vspeed References

(with airspeed) (without airspeed)
Interface
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
CNS
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a
white horizon line. The Attitude Indicator displays the pitch (indicated by the yellow
Navigation
GPS
symbolic aircraft on the pitch scale), roll, and slip/skid information.

The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Pitch markings occur at 2.5˚ intervals
Planning
through all pitch ranges.

Flight
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚
and 60˚ and minor tick marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the
Avoidance
Hazard
zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position of the pointer on the roll scale.
Slip/skid is indicated by the location of the ball.
Additional
Features
9
1 Roll Pointer
2 Roll Scale
1 8
3
AFCS
Horizon Line
2
7 4 Aircraft Symbol
Annun/Alerts
3 5 Slip/Skid Indicator
6 Land Representation
4
6 7 Pitch Scale
Appendix
5 8 Sky Representation
9 Roll Scale Zero
Attitude Indicator
Index
Flight Instruments
1 Roll Pointer
9
Overview
System
2 Roll Scale
1 8 3 Horizon Line
Instruments
2 4 Aircraft Symbol
Flight
7
5 Slip/Skid Indicator
10
3
6 Land Representation
EIS
7 Pitch Scale
4 6
8 Sky Representation
5
Interface
9 Roll Scale Zero
CNS
Attitude Indicator W/AFCS and SVX 10 Flight Director
Command Bars
Navigation
GPS
STANDARD RATE TURN BANK ANGLE POINTERS
The Standard Rate Turn Bank Angle Pointers are green pointers displayed on the roll
Planning
Flight
scale that shows the bank angle that is needed for a standard rate turn.
Avoidance
Hazard
Standard Rate Turn Bank Angle Pointers
Additional
Features
Displaying the standard rate turn bank angle pointers:
1) With the full screen PFD displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Touch More Options....
AFCS
3) Touch in the Standard Rate Turn Bank Angle Pointers group to

display the Standard Rate Turn Bank Angle Pointers options.
Annun/Alerts
4) Touch Show.
ATTITUDE CONFIGURATION
Appendix
The roll (bank angle) indication may be configured to be a Ground Pointer (default)
or a Sky Pointer. Refer to the G3X Touch Installation Manual for configuration
information.
Index
Flight Instruments
The Ground Pointer configuration displays both the roll arc and the pitch scale
Overview
anchored to the horizon and the roll pointer beneath the roll arc pointing to the
System
present roll angle.

Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Ground Pointer Configuration

The Sky Pointer configuration displays the pitch scale moving with the horizon, but
Navigation
the roll arc remains fixed and centered in the display. The roll pointer beneath the roll
GPS
arc moves with the horizon and in the opposite direction of aircraft roll.
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
Sky Pointer Configuration
ALTIMETER
AFCS
The Altimeter displays 400 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a rolling
number gauge using a moving tape. Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown
Annun/Alerts
at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20 feet. The current
altitude is displayed in the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a
Appendix
selection bug symbol. A bug corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape; if
the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the tape, the bug appears at the
corresponding edge of the tape.
Index
Flight Instruments
Setting the selected altitude:
Overview
System
Turn the large Knob associated with the PFD to set the Selected Altitude in
100-ft increments.
Or:
Instruments
Flight
1) Touch the Selected Altitude.
2) Enter the desired altitude using the keypad and touch Enter.
Syncing to the current altitude:
EIS
1) Touch the Selected Altitude.
2) Touch Set to Current and touch Enter.
Interface
CNS
NOTE: 'Set For Field' is only available when aircraft is on ground.
Navigation
GPS
Selected Altitude
Planning
Flight
Selected Altitude Bug
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Barometric Setting
Altimeter
Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE
Overview
System
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury
(in Hg) or hectopascals (hPa) when metric units are selected.
Instruments
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:

Flight
Turn the Knob associated with the PFD to set the barometric pressure.
Or:
EIS
1) Touch the Barometric Pressure on the PFD.

2) Touch the Set For Field button if aircraft is on the ground.
Interface
Or:
CNS
3) Touch the Set To Standard button if aircraft is in the air.

Or:
Navigation
GPS
4) Enter the desired pressure using the keypad and touch Enter.
Syncing to the local barometric pressure setting:
Planning
1) From the PFD Page, touch the barometic pressure.

Flight
2) Touch 'Set For Field'.

3) Verify indicated altitude matches local field elevation.
Avoidance
Hazard
BAROMETRIC SYNC BETWEEN PFD AND G5 STANDBY FLIGHT

INSTRUMENT
Additional
Features
If a G5 Standby Flight Instrument is installed, the barometric pressure setting can be

synchronized between the G5 and the G3X Touch PFD. When the barometric setting is
changed on one of them, the barometic setting on the other turns inverse video cyan
AFCS
while the value is changing.

Enabling/disabling G5/G3X Touch baro synchronization:
Annun/Alerts
1) Press Menu twice.

2) Touch Setup.
Appendix
3) Touch PFD
4) Touch SFD Baro Sync.
5) Touch Enabled or Disabled.
Index
Flight Instruments
BAROMETRIC MINIMUM ALERT
Overview
System
NOTE: The pilot must update the Barometric Minimum if a new approach
is loaded. Previous approach minimums are not automatically cleared
Instruments
Flight
when loading a new approach.
For altitude awareness, a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision
Height (DH) can be set by the user and is reset when the power is cycled. Once
EIS
the user-defined altitude is within the range of the tape, a cyan bug appears at the
reference altitude on the Altimeter. Once the aircraft reaches the user-defined MDA/
Interface
DH, the bug and text turn yellow and the aural alert, “Minimums Minimums”, is heard.
CNS
Cyan Within Range Yellow When Altitude Reached
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Barometric
Minimum
Avoidance
Hazard
Bug
Barometric
Minimum
Bug
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Barometric Barometric
Minimum Box Minimum Box
Barometric Minimum Visual Annunciations

Appendix
Setting the barometric minimum alert bug:

2) Touch Set... in the Minimums Field.
Index
3) Enter the minimum altitude using the keypad and touch Enter.
Flight Instruments
Turning the minimums alert tone on/off:

Overview
System

3) Touch Disabled or Enabled in the Minimums Alert field.
Instruments
Flight
ALTITUDE ALERTING
The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with visual and aural alerts when
EIS
approaching the Selected Altitude. Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, the
Altitude Alerter is reset. The following will occur when approaching the Selected
Altitude:
Interface
CNS
• Passing within 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude (shown
above the Altimeter) flashes for 5 seconds and an aural tone is generated.
Navigation
GPS
• When the aircraft passes within 200 ft of the Selected Altitude, the Selected
Altitude flashes for 5 seconds and an aural tone is generated to indicate the
aircraft is approaching the selected altitude.
Planning
Flight
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band
(±200 Feet of the Selected Altitude), the Selected Altitude changes to yellow text,
Avoidance
flashes for 5 seconds, and an aural tone is generated.

Hazard
Deviation of ±200 ft
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciation

Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
Turning the altitude alert tone on/off:
Overview
System
3) Touch Disabled or Enabled in the Altitude Alert field.
Instruments
Flight
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
The Vertical Speed Indicator displays the aircraft vertical speed using a non-moving
EIS
tape labeled in fpm with minor tick marks every 100 feet up to 1000 fpm and major
tick marks every 500 feet. The current vertical speed is displayed using a white arrow
along the tape.
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
Current Vertical Speed

AFCS
Vertical Speed Indicator

Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
VERTICAL DEVIATION INDICATOR AND VNAV INDICATOR

Overview
System
NOTE: An external navigator must be configured to receive glideslope and/

or glidepath vertical deviation indications.
Instruments
Flight
GLIDESLOPE - ILS SOURCE

The Vertical Deviation (Glideslope) Indicator (VDI) appears to the left of the altimeter
EIS
whenever an ILS frequency is tuned in the active NAV field of an external navigator.
A green diamond acts as the VDI Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a conventional
indicator. The green 'G' indicates a external glideslope source. If a localizer frequency
Interface
CNS
is tuned and there is no glideslope signal, “NO GS” is annunciated.

Vertical
Navigation
Deviation
GPS
Source
Planning
Flight
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
Vertical Deviation Indicator

(Glideslope-ILS Source)
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
GLIDEPATH - GPS SOURCE
Overview
System
The Vertical Deviation (Glidepath) Indicator (VDI) also appears to the left of the
altimeter during a GPS approach. The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for GPS
Instruments
approaches supporting WAAS vertical guidance (LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LPV, LP+V ). The
Flight
Glidepath Indicator appears on the G3X Touch as a magenta diamond. The magenta
'G' indicates a external GPS source. If the approach type downgrades past the final
approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is annunciated.
EIS
Vertical
Deviation
Source
Interface
CNS
Vertical
Navigation
Deviation
GPS
Indicator
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Vertical Deviation Indicator
(Glidepath-GPS Source)
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
VNAV INDICATOR
Overview
System
An external navigation source is not required to receive VNAV indications (although if

an external navigator is used, VNAV settings are hidden on the PFD with the exception of
Instruments
vertical deviation which is received from the external navigator). When the VNAV profile
Flight
is defined, the pilot may be informed of the progress by message alerts, if configured. A
magenta chevron (VNAV Indicator) to the left of the altimeter on the Vertical Deviation
Scale shows the VNAV profile, and a magenta chevron (Required Vertical Speed Indicator
EIS
(RVSI)) on the Vertical Speed Indicator indicates the required vertical speed to reach the
target altitude. The magenta 'V' indicates a VNAV profile is active. Refer to Section
2.3 for more information. The VNAV deviation indicator and the glideslope/glidepath
Interface
CNS
deviation indicators may be shown simultaneously when applicable.

Navigation
Vertical
GPS
Deviation
Source
Planning
Flight
VNAV
Indicator
Avoidance
Hazard
RVSI
Indicator
Additional
Features
VNAV Indicator
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
Overview
System
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a
heading-up orientation at the bottom of the page. Letters indicate the cardinal points
Instruments
and numeric labels occur every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor tick
Flight
marks at 5˚ intervals. The current track is represented on the HSI by a magenta triangle
and dashed line. The HSI also presents course deviation, bearing, and navigation
source information.
EIS
The Selected Heading is shown to the left of the HSI The cyan bug on the compass
rose corresponds to the Selected Heading.
Interface
CNS
Adjusting the selected heading:
Turn the small left Knob associated with the PFD to adjust the selected
Navigation
heading.
GPS
Or:
1) Touch the selected heading on the PFD.
Planning
Flight
2) Enter the desired heading using the keypad and touch Enter.
Syncing to the current heading:
1) Touch the selected heading on the PFD.
Avoidance
Hazard
2) Touch Set To Current and touch Enter.
Or:
Additional
Features
1) If necessary, press the PFD Knob to toggle from Baro to Heading.
2) Press the PFD Knob to sync to current heading.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
1
Overview
System
2 12
3
Instruments
Flight
4 11
EIS
5
Interface
CNS
6
10
Navigation
7 9
GPS
1 Course Deviation & To/From 7 Rotating Compass Rose

Planning
Flight
Indicator
2 Selected Heading 8 Selected Heading Bug
3 Current Heading 9 Aircraft Symbol
Avoidance
Hazard
4 Turn Rate Indicator 10 To/From Indicator

5 Navigation Source 11 Lateral Deviation Scales
Additional
Features
6 Course Deviation Indicator 12 Selected Course

(CDI)
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
HSI ANNUNCIATIONS
Overview
System
NOTE: Some or all HSI annunciations may appear in the four quadrants of
the G3X Touch HSI depending on the external navigator(s) configured.
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
‘1’ or ‘2’ will appear
after the Naviga- VFR CDI Scales:
tion Source if more Navigation
0.25nm, 1.25nm,
than one external Source: GPS
Navigation
5.00nm
VFR CDI scale
GPS
navigation source is or NAV (VOR,
configured. Flight Phase Flight Phase
Localizer)
LOI: Loss of GPS integrity. (IFR): APR, TERM,
VFR: An external GPS source is ENR, OCN, LNAV,
Planning
L/VNAV, LNAV+V,
Flight
configured but there is not enough
guidance data for IFR use or the LPV, or LP+V
LOI, VFR,
pilot has elected to use the internal OBS
VFR GPS for navigation. Refer to REV, MSG,
Avoidance
color explanations below. or INT
Hazard
REV: External Navigation Source Cross Track Value:
XTK x.xx NM 'XTK x.xx NM' or
failed. Reverted to internal VFR similar
GPS for navigation.
MSG: External navigation source
Additional
has a pending message Features
INT: The pilot has elected to
use the internal GPS navigation HSI Annunciations
source instead of the external GPS
navigation source.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
External GPS Navigator Configured

Overview
System
External GPS Navigator Failure

If the external GPS navigator fails and the system reverts to the internal GPS, the
Instruments
Flight
REV and VFR annunciations are displayed in yellow.

EIS
REV (Yellow):
External Naviga-
tion Source failed. VFR
Interface
CNS
Reverted to inter- (Yellow)

nal VFR GPS for
navigation
Navigation
GPS
External GPS Navigator Failure

Planning
Flight
Intentional Pilot Selection of Internal GPS Navigation

Avoidance
If the external GPS navigator is configured (and functioning), however the pilot has
Hazard
elected to use the internal GPS navigation source, the INT annunciation is displayed in
cyan and the VFR annunciation is displayed in magenta.
Additional
Features
INT (Cyan):
The pilot has
AFCS
elected to use
the internal GPS VFR
navigation source (Magenta)
instead of the
Annun/Alerts
external GPS
navigation.
Appendix
Intentional Pilot Selection of Internal GPS Navigation

Index
Flight Instruments
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
Overview
System
Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for
NAV (VOR, Localizer) and GPS sources as well as nearest or best airports. The bearing
Instruments
pointers are cyan and are single-line (Bearing Pointer 1) or double-line (Bearing Pointer
Flight
2). A pointer symbol is shown in the information windows to indicate the navigation
source. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated from the
CDI by a white ring (shown when the bearing pointers are selected but not necessarily
EIS
visible due to data unavailability).
When a bearing pointer is displayed, its associated information window is also
Interface
displayed. The Bearing Information Windows are displayed at the lower sides of the
CNS
HSI. The following information may be displayed in the Bearing Information Windows:
• Bearing source (NAV, GPS) • Station/waypoint identifier (NAV,
Navigation
GPS
• Pointer icon (single lined or GPS)
double lined) • GPS-derived great circle distance
to bearing source
Planning
Flight
• Frequency (NAV)
If an external NAV radio is the bearing source and it is tuned to an ILS frequency, the
bearing source and the bearing pointer are removed from the HSI and the frequency is
Avoidance
Hazard
replaced with “ILS”. If VLOC1 or VLOC2 is the bearing source and it is tuned to a VOR
frequency, the frequency is replaced with the station identifier. If GPS is the bearing
source, the active waypoint identifier is displayed in lieu of a frequency.
Additional
Features
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and “NO DATA” is displayed in the
information window if:
AFCS
• The NAV radio is not receiving • GPS is the bearing source and an
the tuned VOR station active waypoint is not selected
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
Overview
System
Instruments
Bearing
Flight
Pointer 1
EIS
Bearing
Interface
CNS
Pointer 2
Navigation
GPS
Bearing 1 Information Window Bearing 2 Information Window

-Identifier -Identifier
-Bearing Source -Distance
HSI with Bearing Pointers
Planning
Flight
Enabling/disabling the bearing pointer and changing sources:

Avoidance
Hazard
2) Touch next to a bearing pointer to display the bearing pointer options.

3) Touch one of the available options or touch Off.
Additional
Features
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)

The HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From
Indicator, and a sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line
AFCS
arrow (GPS1, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double line arrow (GPS2, VOR2, and LOC2) which
points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with the course
Annun/Alerts
pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.

The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer
along a lateral deviation scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the
Appendix
course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not displayed.

Index
Flight Instruments
Another Lateral Deviation Scale and combination Course Deviation and To/From
Overview
Indicator is optionally located below the slip/skid indicator.
System
Instruments
Flight
Course Deviation & Lateral
To/From Indicator Lateral Deviation Scale Deviation
Scale
EIS
The CDI is capable of displaying two sources of navigation: GPS or NAV (VOR,
Interface
CNS
localizer) depending on the external navigator(s) configured (refer to the G3X Touch
Installation Manual for more information). Color indicates the current navigation
source: magenta (for GPS) or green (for VOR and LOC). The full-scale limits for the CDI
Navigation
GPS
are defined by a GPS-derived distance when coupled to GPS. When coupled to a VOR
or localizer (LOC), the CDI has the same angular limits as a mechanical CDI. If the
CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots) while coupled to GPS, the
Planning
Flight
crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.
Changing the Navigation Source
Avoidance
Hazard
Changing the navigation source (GPS, VOR, LOC, or VLOC):
Additional
NOTE: On a Standalone MFD, touch 'GPS' in the lower left corner of the Features
touchscreen to switch between 'Internal' and 'External' navigation sources.
Use the associated external navigator to toggle between GPS and VOR/LOC source types.
Refer to the appropriate external navigator Pilot’s Guide (e.g., SL30 Nav/Comm Transceiver
AFCS
Pilot’s Guide, or the GTN™ or GNS™ Series Pilot’s Guides) for more information. When an
external navigator is configured the internal GPS can still be used for VFR navigation.
Annun/Alerts
NOTE: The G3X Touch internal GPS flight plan is only for VFR use.
Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Toggle the
GPS External LOC
Navigator 1 Navigator Navigator 1
Navigation
GPS
Toggle External Navigator Toggle External Navigator

CDI Source CDI Source
Planning
Flight
Toggle the
GPS LOC
External
Avoidance
Navigator 2 Navigator 2
Hazard
Navigator
(e.g., if the external navigator

Additional
is a GNS 430, press the CDI

Features
Key on the GNS 430 to toggle

between GPS1 and LOC1 or
GPS2 and LOC2)
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
CDI Source
Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
G-METER
Overview
System
Whenever the G load on the airplane goes above +2.1G or below -0.5G, the HSI is
temporarily replaced with a large graphical G-meter. To remove the G-meter, touch the
Instruments
displayed G-meter. Regardless of the current G load, the HSI can be replaced with a
Flight
G-meter by changing the ‘G METER’ setting on the PFD setup page. The G-meter will
be displayed until the setting is changed to auto or the power is cycled. Small white
triangles are used to indicate the minimum and maximum recorded G loads. When in
EIS
the auto display mode, the G-meter will automatically be displayed when an unusual
attitude is sensed (i.e., greater than +/- 65° roll or +30°/-20° pitch). Refer to the G3X
Touch installation manual for more information on configuring the G-meter.
Interface
CNS
Manually displaying the G-meter:
Navigation
GPS
3) Touch in the G Meter group to display the G-meter options.
Planning
4) Touch On (Replace HSI).
Flight
Resetting the G-meter minimum and maximum markers:
1) With the full screen PFD displayed, or the split screen MFD on a base page,
Avoidance
Hazard
touch the HSI.
3) Touch Reset G Meter.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Maximum
recorded
Appendix
G load
Minimum
recorded G-meter
G load pointer
Index
G-meter
Flight Instruments
HSI ORIENTATION
Overview
System
The HSI may be configured to provide directional information in either ‘Heading’ or

‘Auto Trk/Hdg’ “Track-up” modes. Selecting Heading Mode orients the HSI to display
Instruments
aircraft heading in a conventional manner with heading shown at the top of the
Flight
compass card as indicated by the lubber line. In ‘Auto Trk/Hdg’ “Track-up” mode,
the aircraft symbol and lubber line move to indicate heading and wind correction
while ground track is shown at the top of the compass card. While in ‘Auto Trk/Hdg’
EIS
the HSI will remain heading-based when the aircraft is on the ground or when the
flight director is in HDG mode. Refer to the G3X Touch installation manual for more
information on configuring the HSI Orientation.
Interface
CNS
Changing HSI orientation:

Navigation
GPS
2) Touch More Options.

3) Touch in the HSI Orientation field to display the HSI Orientation
options.
Planning
Flight
4) Touch Heading or Auto Trk/Hdg.

Avoidance
Hazard
Current
Ground
Additional
Features
Track Heading
Pointer
AFCS
Aircraft
Symbol
showing
Annun/Alerts
wind
correction
Appendix
Track up HSI
Index
Flight Instruments
MANUALLY SWITCHING BETWEEN INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL
Overview
System
FLIGHT PLAN SOURCES
CAUTION: When switching from a 'external' to a 'internal' flight plan source a
Instruments
Flight
loss of information can occur. Information for full approaches, holds, altitude
contraints, etc. will be lost. What was once a procedure in the flight plan
is converted to a series of waypoints. Additionally, previously curved paths
become straight, point-to-point lines.
EIS
NOTE: When no external navigator is configured, the system will always
Interface
operate in 'Internal' flight plan mode.
CNS
NOTE: On a Standalone MFD, touch 'GPS' in the lower left corner of the
Navigation
GPS
Touch FPL Source > Internal on the Active Flight Plan Page, to temporarily allow
flight planning through the G3X Touch using the internal GPS flight plan when an
Planning
Flight
external GPS Navigator is configured. Touch FPL Source > External GPS to return
to the external GPS navigator’s flight plan.
Avoidance
Hazard
When manually selecting the internal GPS flight plan, ‘INT’ is displayed in cyan in
the lower left quadrant of the HSI. Refer to Section 2.1 'HSI Annunciations' for more
information.
Additional
Features
FAILURE OF THE EXTERNAL GPS NAVIGATION SOURCE

If the system automatically reverts to using the internal GPS navigation source due
AFCS
to unavailablity of the external GPS navigation data, 'REV' is displayed in the lower
left quadrant of the HSI and 'VFR' is displayed in the lower right quadrant. In addition,
Annun/Alerts
a system status message 'Using internal GPS flight plan for navigation' is displayed.
Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
CDI SCALE SELECTION (INTERNAL GPS ONLY)

Overview
System
NOTE: When an external GPS navigator is in use, the CDI scale is determined
by the navigator.
Instruments
Flight
Three factors determine the default distance from the center of the CDI to full left
or right limits:
EIS
• CDI scale = 1.25 nm - within 30 nm of any airport in the active route.

• CDI scale = 0.25 nm - on an approach leg or within 2 nm of the FAF or MAP.
Interface
• CDI scale = 5.0 nm - if the previous two conditions do not exist.

CNS
NOTE: If the CDI scale has been manually adjusted, it will not resume "auto"
Navigation
GPS
scale until the auto scale aligns with the manual scale.
CDI AUTO-SWITCHING
Planning
Flight
Some external navigators have the ability to automatically switch CDI sources from
GPS to VLOC when flying a ILS, LOC, LDA, or SDF approach. This is indicated on the
Avoidance
HSI by a change in course pointer color from magenta to green. Additionally, the
Hazard
external navigator may have the ability to automatically switch the LOC course pointer
when the CDI source change occurs. Reference the appropriate external navigator
Additional
documentation for more information.

Features
TURN RATE INDICATOR

AFCS
The Turn Rate Indicator is located above the HSI. Tick marks to the left and right of
the displayed heading denote 1/2 standard turn and standard turn rates (3 deg/sec). A
magenta Turn Rate Indicator shows the current turn rate. The end of the trend vector
Annun/Alerts
gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present turn rate. A standard-
rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading.
Appendix
At rates greater than 4 deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta
trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
Index
Flight Instruments
Turn Rate Indicator

(Standard Rate Tick Marks)
Overview
System
Instruments
Current Heading
Flight
Turn Rate Trend
Vector
Current Track
Indicator
EIS
Turn Rate Indicator
Interface
CNS
OBS MODE
Navigation
GPS
NOTE: If configured, the selected external GPS navigator (i.e., GTN or GNS
Series Units) is used to set the OBS Mode.
Planning
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing
Flight
of waypoints in a GPS flight plan, but retains the current “active-to” waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. ‘OBS’ is annunciated to the left
Avoidance
Hazard
of the aircraft symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
While OBS Mode is enabled, a course line is drawn through the “active-to” waypoint
on the moving map. If desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted.
Additional
Features
When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight plan returns to normal operation with
automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS Mode. The flight
path on the moving map retains the modified course line.
AFCS
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode (without external GPS navigator):

1) While navigating a flight plan or Direct-to, touch CRS on the PFD.
Annun/Alerts
2) Touch Yes on the 'Set OBS and hold?' window.

3) Touch Sync Course or enter the desired course to/from the waypoint using
the keypad and touch Enter.
Appendix
4) To cancel OBS Mode and return to automatic waypoint sequencing, touch

OBS on the PFD.
5) Touch Release OBS Hold.
Index
Flight Instruments
Or:
Overview
System
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key
2) Touch Set OBS and Hold.
Instruments
Flight

4) To cancel OBS Mode and return to automatic waypoint sequencing, press
the MENU Key.
EIS
5) Touch OBS Course.

6) Touch Release OBS Hold.
Interface
Adjusting the OBS course:

CNS
Press OBS on the PFD, enter the desired course using the keypad, and
touch Enter.
Navigation
GPS
Or:
1) If necessary, press the PFD Knob to toggle from Heading to Course.
Planning
2) Turn the PFD Knob associated with the Course.

Flight
2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA

Avoidance
Hazard
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental
information, including the Outside Air Temperature (OAT), wind data, and Vertical
Additional
Features
Navigation (VNAV) indications.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE

AFCS
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is displayed in degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees
Celsius (°C) on the PFD (GDU 470) or on the PFD Status Bar (GDU 460).
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
Outside Air Temperature
Outside Air Temperature on PFD (GDU™ 470)
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
Outside Air Temperature
GPS
Outside Air Temperature on PFD Status Bar (GDU 460)
Planning
Changing the outside air temperature setting:
Flight
2) Touch Setup > Units.
Avoidance
Hazard
3) Touch in the Air Temperature field to display the Air Temperature
options.
Additional
4) Touch Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C). Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
WIND DATA
Overview
System
Wind direction/speed or headwind/Crosswind information can be displayed in a

window to the upper left of the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but
Instruments
wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window displays “No Wind Data”.
Flight
Showing/hiding wind data:

1) From the full-screen PFD, press the MENU Key.
EIS

3) Touch in the Wind Vector field to display the Air Temperature options.
Interface
4) Touch Speed/Dir, Head/X-wind, or Off.

CNS
Wind Headwind
Speed and and
Navigation
Direction Crosswind
GPS
Wind Data
Planning
Flight
USER TIMER
The G3X Touch provides a simple stopwatch for measuring periods of time separately
Avoidance
Hazard
from the Flight Timer. The User Timer can be accessed from the Main Menu or by
touching the field labeled 'TMR' in the PFD Status Bar. Additionally, the User Timer can
be optionally configured to appear in the Data Bar at the top of all screens.
Additional
Features
Using the User Timer:

1) From any screen, press the MENU key twice.
2) Touch User Timer.
AFCS
Or: Touch the TMR field, if present, in the Status Bar at the bottom of the
display.
Annun/Alerts
Or: Touch the Timer field, if present, in the Data Bar at the top of the display.
Touch Start to start the Timer. While the Timer is running, the Start button becomes
a Stop button which pauses the Timer. Reset will set the Timer to zero and stop the
Appendix
Timer. Pressing the Back Key to close the User Timer box will not interrupt the Timer.
Index
User Timer
78 Garmin G3X Touch Pilot’s Guide for Certified Aircraft
™
190-02472-00 Rev. D
Flight Instruments
Overview
System
User Timer on Status Bar
Adding User Timer to Data Bar:
Instruments
1) From any screen, press the MENU key twice.
Flight
2) Touch Setup.
3) Touch Data Bar.
EIS
4) Find User Timer Button in the list. Touch to set the User Timer to Show
On Left, Show On Right, or Hide.
5) Touch the Timer button on the Data Bar to access the User Timer dialog
Interface
CNS
box.
Navigation
GPS
User Timer on Data Bar
Planning
ANGLE OF ATTACK (AOA)
Flight
CAUTION: The Angle of Attack display and stall warning is for reference only,
Avoidance
Hazard
the aircraft's original stall warning system is the primary means of alerting
the pilot of an impending stall. Stall warning AOA may not provide the same
alert margin at different flap settings. AOA indication and the stall warning
Additional
Features
function are only supported for positive G flight.
For G3X Touch installations that include a GAP 26 and a GSU 25, Angle of Attack
information can be displayed on the PFD. Refer to the G3X Touch Installation Manual
AFCS
for the Angle of Attack Calibration procedure. During Angle of Attack Calibration Stall
Warning AOA, Caution Alert AOA, Minimum Visible AOA, and Approach Target AOA
Annun/Alerts
(optional) settings are defined.

When AOA exceeds the calibrated Caution Alert threshold (AOA gauge , an
intermittent audible tone will be heard. The tone will increase in frequency until the
Appendix
Stall Warning AOA, when it will play continuously.

When AOA is below the calibrated Minimum Visible AOA threshold, the angle of
attack gauge is not displayed.
Index
Flight Instruments
GSU 25
Static
Overview
Air Data Sensor Unit

System
Pressure
Pitot
Pressure
GAP 26
Instruments
AOA
Air Data Probe
Flight
Pressure
EIS
GDU AOA
(Display Unit)
Interface
CNS
Pneumatic CAN Bus
Angle of Attack (AOA) System

Navigation
GPS
2.3 VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNAV)

Planning
Flight
CAUTION: Internal VNAV is only a VFR navigation aid and is not intended
for instrument approaches.
Avoidance
Hazard
NOTE: The VNAV function may be inhibited when FPL Source is set
to 'External' with some external navigators. Refer to the external
Additional
navigators pilot's guide for more information.

Features
The Vertical Navigation Page provides settings for the vertical navigation feature.
These settings create a three-dimensional profile from the present location and altitude
AFCS
to a final (target) altitude at a specified location.

Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
When the VNAV profile is defined, the pilot is informed of the progress by message
Overview
alerts. A magenta chevron (VNAV Indicator) to the left of the altimeter on the Vertical
System
Deviation Scale shows the VNAV profile, and a magenta chevron (Required Vertical
Speed Indicator (RVSI)) on the Vertical Speed Indicator indicates the required vertical
Instruments
speed to reach the target altitude.
Flight
NOTE: The Vertical Navigation feature is only available when navigating
a Direct-to or flight plan, and the ground speed is greater than 35 knots.
EIS
One minute prior to the initial descent point the “Approaching VNAV Profile”
Interface
message appears and the ‘Estimated Time to VNAV’ (on Active Flight Plan Page) goes
CNS
blank. The descent angle locks to prevent changes in speed from altering the profile.
The VNAV feature does not take into account any changes in ground speed that occur
Navigation
during the transition from level flight to descent.
GPS
Planning
Flight
At 200 ft above the target altitude, the “Approaching Target Altitude” message
appears, and the VNAV indicator disappears from the PFD.
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
VN
AV
Pr
AFCS
of
ile
Distance to Profile
Annun/Alerts
Target Altitude
Appendix
Distance to Target Airport
Visual Representation of VNAV

Index
Flight Instruments
USING THE VNAV FEATURE

Overview
System
Use the VNAV (Vertical Navigation) feature to ensure the aircraft is at the proper
altitude. The magenta VNAV Indicator appears on the PFD. A message appears when
Instruments
approaching the VNAV Profile. When the VNAV Indicator is in the vertical center of
Flight
the Vertical Deviation Scale, the aircraft is at the proper altitude for the VNAV Profile.
VNAV Indicator Vertical Deviation Scale
VNAV Target
EIS
Altitude
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Required Vertical
Speed Indicator
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
VNAV Indications
Additional
Configuring a VNAV profile:

Features

2) Touch VNAV.
AFCS
3) Touch the Waypoint field and choose the desired VNAV waypoint.
4) Touch the Profile value.
Annun/Alerts
5) Enter the desired descent rate in fpm using the keypad and touch Enter.
6) Touch the Altitude value.
7) Enter the desired altitude using the keypad and touch Enter.
Appendix
8) Touch Above WPT or MSL.

9) Touch the By value.
10) Enter the desired distance using the keypad and touch Enter.
Index
11) Touch Before or After.
Flight Instruments
12) Touch On or Off to enable or disable VNAV Messages.
Overview
System
• Waypoint—Enter any waypoint along the currently active route as the
reference waypoint. The reference waypoint defines the target location.
• Profile—Enter the descent rate.
Instruments
Flight
• Altitude—Enter the desired reference waypoint altitude. Select ‘Above
Waypoint’ to use field elevation for airports in the navigation database or
‘MSL’ to specify an exact MSL altitude target.
EIS
NOTE: Some waypoints such as intersections do not have an altitude
in the database and thus only the VNAV altitude in MSL (not Above
Interface
CNS
Waypoint) may be specified for these waypoints.
Navigation
• By—Enter the target location with settings of distance ‘Before’ or ‘After’ a
GPS
reference waypoint. To set a target location at a reference waypoint, enter a
distance of zero.
Planning
Flight
• VNAV Messages—Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ to enable/disable VNAV alert messages.
Forcing capture of the VNAV profile:
Avoidance
1) While navigating a flight plan or Direct-to, press the MENU Key twice.
Hazard
2) Touch VNAV and enter a valid VNAV profile and begin navigation.
3) From the Vertical Navigation Page, press the MENU Key.
Additional
Features
4) Touch Capture VNAV Profile. Selecting Capture VNAV Profile centers
the VNAV indicator.
Canceling the VNAV profile:
AFCS
1) While navigating a flight plan or Direct-to with a valid VNAV profile, press
the MENU Key twice.
Annun/Alerts
2) Touch VNAV.
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) Touch Cancel VNAV Profile.
Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
VNAV PAIRED WITH GTN

Overview
System
NOTE: VNAV mode will not capture a descending profile unless the
selected altitude is valid and at least 75 feet below the current aircraft
Instruments
altitude.
Flight
Vertical Navigation may also be used on the G3X in concert with a GTN (when
equipped). With the G3X Touch and GTN combination, the VNAV flight director mode is
EIS
designed to be used with vertical guidance for a descent from cruise into an approach
or on an arrival. The G3X Touch flight director will typically be in ALT mode prior to
Interface
intercepting the glideslope or glidepath. You may arm APPR any time after you have
CNS
captured your last VNAV descent leg, if you are unsure of the timing of the last VNAV
descent, you can always arm GP or GS mode after you cross the waypoint prior to the
Navigation
FAF.
GPS
The GTN's VNAV guidance will end prior to the FAF waypoint. Typically, this will
result in the flight director capturing the final VNAV target altitude, with the aircraft in
Planning
Flight
a position to subsequently intercept the glidepath. GP mode should be armed prior to

intercepting the glidepath. Flight director GPS mode must be active before VNAV mode
can be activated. If another lateral mode such as HDG is active, VNAV mode will not
Avoidance
Hazard
be available. VNAV will descend away from the altitude preselector if you are in ALT
mode and have VNAV armed.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Flight Instruments
Setting up GTN for use:
Overview
System
1) Boot the associated GTN in configuration mode.
2) Select GTN Setup > Navigation Features > Vertical Navigation.
3) Select VNAV.
Instruments
Flight
4) Ensure Transition to Approach is deselected. When deselected, VNAV
guidance will terminate at the waypoint preceding the FAF.
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
VNAV Configuration
Planning
Flight
NOTE: Only the GTN Xi displays VNAV TOD (Top of Descent) and BOD
(Botton of Descent) indications on the G3X Touch.
Avoidance
Hazard
An altitude constraint in the GTN flight plan is necessary to utilize GTN VNAV.
Altitude constraints are set and changed only on the GTN by pressing the altitude
constraint field next to the waypoint on the flight plan page. This can be verified by
Additional
Features
looking at the map on the GTN and see the TOD (Top of Descent) indicated on the
map (see first image below). As you approach this point, the magenta arrow on the
vertical deviation indicator on the PFD will start to come down and the VNAV altitude
AFCS
constraint should be displayed. As you reach TOD, the magenta arrow will center up on
the vertical deviation indicator.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Top of Descent Indication (GTN)

Flight Instruments
Changing VNAV default descent angle:

Overview
System
1) From Home screen, select Utilities.

2) Select VNAV.
3) Select Menu to change the default descent angle.
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
EIS
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Overview
System
3.1 EIS DISPLAY & ENG PAGE
Instruments
Flight
NOTE: The display of the G3X Touch™ Engine Indication System depends upon
the current configuration and may vary from the examples discussed in this
section.
EIS
The G3X Touch EIS displays engine, electrical, and other system parameters.
Additional EIS information can be viewed by selecting the Eng Page on the MFD.
Interface
CNS
1
Navigation
GPS
2
Planning
Flight
3
Avoidance
Hazard
4
Additional
Features
5
AFCS
9
Annun/Alerts
7
Appendix
8
Index
Example Engine Indication System
EIS
7 8 9 11 10 14
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
12
Interface
CNS
13 15
Navigation
GPS
Example Main Tab on the Eng Page

Planning
Flight
9 16
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
11
AFCS
Example Fuel Calculator Tab on the Eng Page

Annun/Alerts
Green bands on the instruments indicate normal ranges of operation; yellow and red
bands indicate caution and warning, respectively. When unsafe operating conditions
occur, the corresponding caution indication will display solid yellow and the warning
Appendix
indication will flash red. If sensor data to an instrument becomes invalid or unavailable,
a red “X” is displayed across the instrument.
Index
EIS
1 Engine Manifold Pressure Displays manifold pressure to indicate engine power
Overview
System
2 Engine Power Estimated engine power output expressed as a percentage
3 Tachometer (RPM) Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm)
Instruments
Flight
4 Fuel Flow Displays fuel flow
5 Oil Pressure Displays oil pressure
EIS
6 Oil Temperature Displays oil temperature
7 Cylinder Head Temperature Displays the cylinder head temperature
Interface
CNS
8 Exhaust Gas Temperature Displays the Exhaust Gas Temperature
Displays the amount of fuel. Capable of displaying up to
Navigation
9 Fuel Quantity
four fuel tank readings.
GPS
10 Voltmeter Displays bus voltage
Planning
11 Fuel Pressure Displays fuel pressure
Flight
12 Lean Assist Activates/deactivates Lean Assist (optional)
Avoidance
13 Engine Hours (Tach)
Hazard
Counted whenever a valid RPM is detected.
14 Ammeter Displays bus amps
Additional
15 Total Hours Displays aircraft total hours similar to a Hobbs meter Features
16 Fuel Calculator Calculates fuel endurance, range, and economy

AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
EIS
3.2 LEAN ASSIST MODE (OPTIONAL)

Overview
System
NOTE: The pilot should follow the engine manufacturer’s recommended

Instruments
leaning procedures as described in the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH).

Flight
A Lean Assist Button is displayed on the Eng Page when Lean Assist Mode is enabled
and at least one Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) or Turbine Inlet Temperature (TIT)
EIS
input is configured (refer to the G3X Touch Installation Manual for more information).
Using Lean Assist Mode:
Interface
From the Main Tab of the Eng Page, touch Lean Assist. As the mixture is
CNS
leaned, one of the cylinders’ exhaust temperature will peak. Continuing to lean
the mixture will cause each additional cylinder to peak (if applicable) until the
Navigation
last of the cylinders peaks. To cancel Lean Assist Mode, touch Lean Assist
GPS
again.
When the Lean Assist is selected, the Lean Assist Mode waits for a cylinder’s EGT
Planning
Flight
to reach a peak temperature and decrease by at least 7°F. To prevent detection of

false peaks, the system waits for a cylinder’s EGT to increase by at least 15°F before
detecting a peak. In addition, if the cylinder temperature rises above a previously
Avoidance
Hazard
detected peak by more than 100°F, the previous peak is considered false.
The following bar graph is displayed when four or more EGT cylinders are configured
and the same number of EGT and CHT probes are configured. When each cylinder
Additional
Features
peaks, its bar changes from green to blue, and the white EGT number changes to a
blue delta number. The blue delta number is the difference between current EGT and
peak EGT for each cylinder. The first cylinder to peak is identified with a solid blue box
AFCS
around the delta number, and the last cylinder to peak is identified with a hollow blue
box. The outline and grey number above each bar displays the actual peak EGT value.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
EIS
Overview
System
Cylinder
Instruments
Peak EGT
Flight
Value
CHT
EIS
Indicates
Difference
Between Pres-
Interface
CNS
ent and Peak
EGT Value
Indicates Indicates Last
First Cylinder Cylinder to
Navigation
to Peak Peak
GPS
Lean Assist (Same Number Of EGT And CHT Probes Configured
And
Planning
Four Or More Cylinders Configured)
Flight
The following graph is displayed if EGT data is configured on less than four cylinders
and a different number of EGT and CHT probes are configured. The temperature
Avoidance
Hazard
deviation between the current temperature and the peak temperature for the cylinder
currently closest to its peak is displayed in cyan. A cyan hollow triangle appears on the
EGT gauge at the temperature where the first cylinder peaked.
Additional
Features
Indicates Difference Between Present

and Peak Temperature
AFCS
Cylinder Peak
Temperature
Annun/Alerts
CHT
Appendix
Lean Assist (Different Number Of EGT And CHT Probes Configured

And
Index
Less Than Four Cylinders Configured)
EIS
The following dual-pointer gauge is displayed when exactly two cylinders of EGT are
Overview
configured. Each cylinder has its own peak temperature triangle.

System

Instruments
Flight
Cylinder
Two Peak
Cylinder Temperature
One Peak
Temperature
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Lean Assist (Two EGT Cylinders Configured)

The following gauge is displayed when TIT is configured instead of EGT.
Planning
Flight

Avoidance
Hazard
Peak
Temperature
Additional
Features
AFCS
Lean Assist (TIT Configured)
NOTE: A ‘+’ (∆EGT) value indicates the current temperature is greater than
Annun/Alerts
the previously detected peak.

Appendix
Index
EIS
If a fuel flow sensor is configured, the fuel flow value detected as the first cylinder
Overview
peaks is saved. The fuel flow corresponding to peak EGT is drawn on the fuel flow
System
gauge as a hollow blue pointer. This can be used to determine if you are on the rich
side of peak (ROP) or the lean side of peak (LOP). Rich of Peak (ROP) if the fuel flow
Instruments
pointer is above the blue triangle, or Lean of Peak (LOP) if the fuel flow pointer is below
Flight
the blue triangle.
EIS
Interface
Fuel Flow Cor-
CNS
responding to
the peak EGT
Navigation
GPS
Fuel Flow Gauge - Lean Assist
Planning
Flight
(Fuel Flow Sensor Configured)
The EIS displays the cylinder whose temperature is currently closest to its own peak
Avoidance
Hazard
value (when Lean Assist Mode is active) as a white pointer with the cylinder number.
The peak temperature is depicted by a hollow blue pointer, and the temperature
deviation from peak (DEGT or DTIT) is displayed in place of the normal temperature
Additional
Features
number in cyan text.
Cylinder with the
Temperature Closest to
AFCS
Its Peak Value

Annun/Alerts
Difference
Between
Present
Appendix
and Peak
Temperature
Index
Cylinder Peak
Temperature
Lean Assist (EIS) (Example)
EIS
3.3 FUEL CALCULATOR (OPTIONAL)

Overview
System
WARNING: The G3X Touch Fuel Calculator and/or Fuel Range Rings are
NOT intended to be relied upon as the primary fuel indicator(s), and does
Instruments
not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of proper flight planning. G3X
Flight
Touch fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and
are calculated from the last time the fuel was reset.
EIS
Refer to the Section 5.2, Using Map Displays, for information on displaying fuel
range rings on the Navigation Map.
Interface
Adjusting the Fuel Remaining or Fuel Used quantity:

CNS
1) From the ENG Page, touch the Fuel Calculator Tab.

2) Touch ‘+’ or ‘-’ to adjust the desired quantity.
Navigation
GPS
Or:
Touch the value to enter the fuel quantity using the keypad and touch Enter.
Planning
Flight
Or:
Touch the pre-configured preset value and touch Enter.
Avoidance
Resetting the Fuel Used to zero:

Hazard

2) Touch Reset.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Fuel Calculator
Index
EIS
3.4 FUEL FLOW CALIBRATION
Overview
System
The K-Factor represents the number of electrical pulses output by the fuel flow
sensor per gallon of fuel. Aspects unique to each installation will affect the accuracy
Instruments
Flight
of the initial K-Factor, and as a result, the K-Factor must generally be adjusted up or
down to increase the accuracy of the fuel flow calibration.
If the fuel usage reported by the G3X Touch differs from the actual fuel usage (as
EIS
measured at the fuel pump or other trusted method of measurement), the K-Factor can
be adjusted either in Configuration Mode (as described in the G3X Touch Installation
Manual) or by using the Fuel Flow Calibration Menu in Normal Mode.
Interface
CNS
NOTE: Do not adjust the Actual Fuel Used unless at least 10 gallons of fuel
Navigation
has been used. The more fuel used, the more accurate the fuel flow calibra-
GPS
tion adjustment will be.
Adjusting the K-Factor:
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
3) Touch Calibrate Fuel Flow.
Hazard
4) Touch Actual to enter the 'Actual' amount of fuel used and touch Enter.
The system automatically adjusts the K-Factor for the fuel flow sensor to
Additional
match the observed fuel used. Features
Once an 'Actual -Fuel Used' value is entered, the corresponding 'Adjustment - Fuel
Flow' percentage is displayed. It is also possible to adjust the fuel flow using the
'Adjustment - Fuel Flow' field directly. Entering an adjustment percentage will adjust
AFCS
the 'Actual - Fuel Used' value accordingly. However, this is not the method used to
adjust the K-Factor to increase the accuracy of the fuel flow calibration.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Fuel Flow Calibration
EIS
3.5 CAS MESSAGES

Overview
System
NOTE: A standalone MFD does not support CAS messages.

Instruments
Flight
The Crew Alerting System (CAS) messages displayed depend upon the current
configuration, and will vary from the examples listed below. Refer to the G3X Touch
Installation Manual for more information on configuring CAS messages (if applicable).
EIS
CAS Messages are grouped by criticality (warning, caution, advisory). The color of
the message is based on its urgency and on required action:
Interface
• WARNING (red): Requires immediate attention.

CNS
• CAUTION (yellow): Requires pilot awareness and possible future corrective

action.
Navigation
GPS
• ADVISORY (white): Provides general information.

Warning annunciation text is shown in red in the CAS Annunciation Window on the
Planning
Flight
PFD. The CAS Annunciation Window location is dependent on screen size. Touch an
active CAS message or press the BACK Key to acknowledge it.
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
CAS Warning Example
When more CAS messages are present than can be displayed in the available
Appendix
window space, an upside-down triangle will appear in the CAS Annunciation Window.
Touch the CAS Annunciation Window to display the MFD CAS Messages Window.
Index
CNS Interface
SECTION 4 CNS INTERFACE (OPTIONAL)
Overview
System
4.1 CNS DATA BAR
Instruments
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the audio
Flight
interface, communication radios, navigation radios, and Mode S transponder. These
functions can be accessed from the Main Menu and from the boxes that make up the
CNS Data Bar located at the top of the PFD and/or MFD.
EIS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Interface
CNS
CNS Data Bar
1 COM1 - Transfers the standby and active COM1 frequencies. *
Navigation
GPS
2 STBY - Displays/removes the COM1 Standby Page. The COM1 Standby Page is
used to enter and transfer COM1 frequencies.
Planning
Flight
3 MIC / COM - Displays/removes the Audio/Intercom Page.
Avoidance
Hazard
4 XPDR - Displays/removes the Transponder Page. The Transponder Page is used to
select transponder functions.
5 IDENT - Initiates the transponder Ident function.
Additional
Features
6 Configurable Data Fields - See Appendix A for complete list of options.

AFCS
7 COM 2 - Transfers the standby and active COM2 frequencies.

Annun/Alerts
8 STBY - Displays/removes the COM2 Standby Page. The COM2 Standby Page is
used to enter and transfer COM2 frequencies.
* When a GMA 342, 345, or 245R is configured, an active COM frequency displayed in green indicates
Appendix
the COM transceiver is selected. If an audio panel is not configured in the system, all COM active
frequencies are always displayed in white (since the GDU™ has no knowledge which radio(s) are selected).
Index
CNS Interface
4.2 COM ANNUNCIATIONS

Overview
System
When receiving a transmission, 'RX' is displayed on the COM button. 'TX' is also
displayed on the COM button while transmitting.
Instruments
Flight
Transmit Annunciation Receive Annunciation

EIS
COM Annunciations (TX/RX)
'SQ' is displayed on the COM button when automatic squelch is overridden.

Interface
CNS
Squelch Annunciation
Navigation
COM Annunciations (SQ)

GPS
The frequency monitoring function allows the pilot to listen to the Standby frequency
while monitoring the Active frequency for activity.
Planning
Flight
Monitor Annunciation
Avoidance
Hazard
COM Annunciations (M)

Additional
4.3 COM WINDOW

Features
Displaying the COM window:

AFCS
Touch the STBY COM button on the CNS Data Bar.

Or:
Annun/Alerts
From the Main Menu, touch COM 1 Radio or COM 2 Radio (if
configured).
Appendix
Index
CNS Interface
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
COM Window
Planning
Flight
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
1) Touch STBY on CNS Data Bar.
Avoidance
2) Enter the frequency using the keypad and touch Enter.
Hazard
Adjusting COM Volume:
Additional
Features
2) Touch Volume.
3) Touch the slider to adjust the percentage.
Monitoring the Standby COM:
AFCS

2) Touch Monitor. A green 'M' is displayed in the Standby Field. Repeating
Annun/Alerts
steps 1 and 2 will stop monitoring the frequency.

Transferring Standby to Active:
Appendix
From the CNS Data Bar, touch the COM 1 or COM 2 frequency field.
Or:
1) Press the STBY on the CNS Data Bar.
Index
2) Touch XFER.
CNS Interface
COM RADIO VOLUME SHORTCUT (GDU™ 460 ONLY)

Overview
System
The Data Bar Setup page can enable a COM Radio Volume Shortcut panel that
appears while a COM panel is active. This shortcut panel displays touchscreen controls
for volume and toggle on/off squelch for the currently displayed COM radio. The
Instruments
shortcut panel appears at the bottom of the PFD.

Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
COM Radio
Volume Level
and Squelch
Button
Planning
Flight
COM Radio Volume Shortcut
COM FREQUENCY FINDING

Avoidance
Hazard
The frequency finding feature allows the pilot to quickly select any displayed
database COM frequency as the standby frequency.
Additional
Features
Using COM frequency finding:

1) Touch COM STBY on CNS Data Bar.
2) Touch Find.
AFCS
3) Touch the Recent, Nearest Airports, or Flight Plan Tab.

4) Touch the frequency or touch Select Frequency... for a list of available
Annun/Alerts
frequencies.
Or:
a) Touch Select an Airport.
Appendix
b) Enter the four letter ICAO identifier for the desired airport.
c) Touch the frequency.
Or:
Index
1) Touch COM STBY on CNS Data Bar.
CNS Interface
2) Touch Find.
Overview
System
3) Touch the User Tab.
4) Touch the frequency or touch Select Frequency... for a list of available
frequencies.
Instruments
Flight
AUTOMATIC SQUELCH
Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received,
while still providing good sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic
EIS
Squelch, touch STBY > Squelch. When Automatic Squelch is disabled, COM audio
reception is always on. Continuous static noise may be heard over the headsets and
Interface
CNS
speaker, if selected. Touching STBY > Squelch again enables Automatic Squelch.
When Automatic Squelch is disabled, the COM frequency and the Squelch on the
Navigation
COM tuning page is highlighted green.
GPS
4.4 COM ERROR MESSAGES
Planning
Flight
Copilot Push-to-Talk Stuck
Avoidance
Hazard
COM Error Messages on CNS Bar
Additional
Features
The following COM error messages may appear in the COM Radio Field on the
CNS Bar:
AFCS
Message Description Action

Verify Push To Talk key is not
The Pilot Push To Talk key has
Annun/Alerts
stuck. Refer to the installation

PILOT PTT been in the pressed position
manual for installation wiring
STUCK for at least 35 seconds. This
tests. Contact Garmin for service
key will now be ignored.
if this message persists.
Appendix
The Copilot Push To Talk Verify Push To Talk key is not

key has been in the pressed stuck. Refer to the installation
COPILOT PTT
position for at least 35 manual for installation wiring
STUCK
Index
seconds. This key will now be tests. Contact Garmin for service
ignored. if this message persists.
CNS Interface
Verify Push To Talk keys are not

Both Push To Talk keys have
Overview
System
stuck. Refer to the installation

BOTH PTT been in the pressed position
manual for installation wiring
STUCK for at least 35 seconds. This
tests. Contact Garmin for service
Instruments
key will now be ignored.

if this message persists.
Flight
TX An internal hardware
Contact Garmin for service if this
HARDWARE problem is preventing COM
message persists.
FAULT transmission.
EIS
Wait for unit to cool. Add

TEMP TOO Internal temperature is too
supplemental cooling if problem
HIGH high.
Interface
persists.
CNS
Verify supply voltage meets

minimum requirement identified
SUPPLY
Navigation
Supply voltage is too low. in installation manual. Contact

GPS
VOLTAGE LOW
Garmin for service if message
persists.
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
4.5 AUTO-TUNING FREQUENCIES

Hazard
Additional
Features
NOTE: Refer to the G3X Touch™ Installation Manual for more information on
the G3X Touch optional communication interfaces.
Frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:

AFCS
• Map Page • Nearest Air Traffic Control Page

• Weather Page • Nearest Flight Service Station Page
Annun/Alerts
• Waypoint Page • Airway Review Page

• Nearest Airports Page • Select Approach Page (no external
navigator configured)
Appendix
• Nearest Airport Weather Page
Auto-tuning a frequency:
Index
1) Touch the page navigation bar on the MFD.
CNS Interface
2) Touch Waypoint.
Overview
System
3) Touch the waypoint identifier field at the top of the page.
4) Enter the desired waypoint and touch Enter.
5) Touch the Freq tab.
Instruments
Flight
6) Touch the desired frequency to tune.
7) OPTIONAL: Touch the desired COM radio if configured with more than one.
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Select COM Radio
Or:
Additional
1) Touch the page navigation bar on the MFD Features
2) Touch Map or SXM Weather.

3) Touch the desired waypoint or airport on the map.
AFCS
4) Touch the selected waypoint identifier name below the map.

5) Touch the Freq tab.
Annun/Alerts

Or:
Appendix
1) Press the NRST Key.

2) Touch the page navigation bar.
3) Touch Airports, Airport Weather, VORs, ARTCC, or FSS.
Index
CNS Interface
Overview
System
Or:
2) Touch the page navigation bar.
Instruments
Flight
3) Touch Airspace.
4) Touch the desired airspace.
5) Touch Frequencies.
EIS

Interface
CNS
4.6 USER FREQUENCIES

Navigation
GPS
Adding a User Frequency:

Planning
Flight
2) Touch Find.
4) Touch Edit User Frequencies.
Avoidance
Hazard
5) Touch Add User Frequency.

6) Touch Name or Frequency.
Additional
Features
7) Enter the name/frequency using the keypad and touch Enter.

Editing a User Frequency:
AFCS
2) Touch Find.
Annun/Alerts

5) Touch the Name or Frequency to edit.
6) Enter the name/frequency using the keypad and touch Enter.
Appendix
Deleting a User Frequency:

Index
2) Touch Find.
CNS Interface
Overview
System
5) Touch Delete.
6) Touch Yes.
Instruments
Flight
4.7 AUDIO PANEL
EIS
NOTE: The audio panel information in this section pertains only to G3X
systems configured with a GMA 245R. Screenshots and descriptions
Interface
CNS
may differ from actual display function depending upon configuration.
When configured with a compatible audio panel, touching the Audio Box on the
Navigation
GPS
CNS Data Bar will display the Audio/Intercom Page. The Audio/Intercom Page allows
selection of four separate tabs, these are the Radios, Intercom, Phone & Media, and
Music Input tabs. The Audio Box can be configured for Normal or Minimized display
Planning
Flight
format, (Audio Only format may be displayed as determined by available space on the
CNS Data Bar).
Audio Box
Avoidance
Hazard
Audio/Intercom MIC/COM
Page Select Select
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Audio Box on CNS Data Bar

Appendix
Index
CNS Interface
There are three different formats of the Audio Box that may be displayed:
Overview
System
Audio Box Format Description

Normal - Provides access to the Audio/Intercom Page
Instruments
and MIC/COM settings.

Flight
Minimized - Provides access to the Audio/Intercom

Page and displays the current MIC/COM settings
(cannot change the MIC/COM settings in this format)
EIS
Audio Only - Provides access to the Audio/Intercom

Page. Displayed only when COM 2 is disabled via
Interface
CNS
the audio panel configuration, or there's not enough

room for the Minimized control to be displayed.
Navigation
The preceding examples all indicate that no Bluetooth phone call is in progress.
GPS
When a phone call is incoming or in progress, a “TEL” indicator is displayed (flashing

to indicate incoming call, non-flashing to indicate call is active), see Phone & Media
Tab section for more information.
Planning
Flight
Note the Audio Box can be configured to display square or triangle indicators.
Avoidance
Hazard
Several status indications can be selected/shown in the Audio Box per the following
Additional
Features
table.
Audio Box (Normal) Description
AFCS
MIC 1 selected, monitoring COM 1

Annun/Alerts
MIC 2 selected, monitoring COM 2
MIC 1 selected, monitoring COM 1 and COM 2

Appendix
MIC 2 selected, monitoring COM 1 and COM 2

Index
Split COM selected. Isolates the COM 1 radio to the

pilot and the COM 2 radio to the copilot.
CNS Interface
AUDIO/INTERCOM PAGE
Overview
System
Selecting Audio/Intercom Page
Touch Audio on the CNS Data Bar.
Instruments
Or:
Flight
2) Touch the Audio Panel button to display the Audio/Intercom Page.
EIS
RADIOS TAB
The following paragraphs describe the functions accessible from the Radios Tab.
Interface
CNS
Selecting the Radios tab:
1) Touch Audio on the CNS Data Bar.
Navigation
GPS
2) Touch the Radios tab (if needed.)
Or:
Planning
Flight
3) Touch the Radios tab (if needed.)
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
CNS Interface
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Audio/Intercom Page, Radios Tab

Avoidance
Hazard
Selecting the Monitored Radio:

Touch the 'Audio' COM button on the CNS Data Bar to select/deselect a
monitored radio.
Additional
Features
Or:
From the Main Menu, touch Audio Panel > Radios Tab and touch the
desired COM radios.
AFCS
Selecting the Radio to transmit from:

Touch the MIC box on the CNS Data Bar to change the radio used to
Annun/Alerts
transmit (talk) from.

Or:
From the Main Menu, touch Audio Panel > Radios Tab and touch the
Appendix
desired COM MIC radios.

Selecting/Deselecting Split COM mode:
Index
Or:
CNS Interface
From the Main Menu, touch Audio Panel.
Overview
System
2) Touch the Radios tab if needed.
3) Touch the Split COM button to select (green) or deselect Split COM mode.
Instruments
COM RADIOS
Flight
The COM 1/COM 2 buttons select the monitored radio. The COM 1 MIC/COM 2 MIC
buttons selects the radio used to transmit from.
EIS
Selecting "Split COM" overrides the current MIC/COM selections and enables MIC1/
COM1 for the pilot, and MIC2/COM2 for the copilot (i.e., “Split COM” isolates the
COM 1 radio to the pilot and the COM 2 radio to the copilot).
Interface
CNS
MARKER BEACON
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver
Navigation
GPS
is always on and detects any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the
aircraft. The receiver detects the three tones - outer, middle, and inner - and illuminates
the marker beacon annunciations located to the left of the altimeter on the PFD.
Planning
Flight
Touch Marker Beacon on the Audio/Intercom Page (Radios Tab) to select/deselect
the marker beacon audio. The Marker Beacon Button annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected.
Avoidance
Hazard
NOTE: The Speaker Button is moved under 'More Options...' when both
Marker Beacon and Speaker are enabled.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Marker
Beacon Audio
Index
Marker Beacon Audio
CNS Interface
Touch Marker Sensitivity on the Audio/Intercom Page (Radios Tab) > More
Overview
Options... to switch between High and Low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. High
System
is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an approach.

Low results in a narrower marker dwell while over a station.
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Marker
Sensitivity
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Marker Sensitivity (Radios Tab > More Options)
SPEAKER
Avoidance
Hazard
The Speaker function enables audio to be played through a connected speaker.

Alert audio is always played over the speaker, regardless of the speaker button state.
Additional
Features
PLAY BUTTON
This button is used to play back the last received radio transmission(s), and is not
AFCS
associated with audio/video.

• The playback recording is only for the mic selected radio.
Annun/Alerts
• Pressing the play button again while a recording is playing skips that recording and
starts playing the previous recording. After repeatedly pressing this button until
all recordings have been played, a double-beep will sound and the playback will
Appendix
reset to the start. The playback function also resets to the start after listening to a
selected recording.
• The playback function retains approximately the last 60 seconds of received audio
Index
from the MIC selected COM radio.
CNS Interface
VOLUME SHORTCUT (GDU 460 ONLY)
Overview
System
The Data Bar Setup page can enable a Volume Shortcut panel that appears while
the Audio/Intercom panel is active. This shortcut panel displays touchscreen volume
controls for pilot and copilot intercom, music, and Bluetooth audio. When a tab in the
Instruments
Flight
Audio/Intercom panel is selected, the Volume Shortcut panel changes to the volume
controls for that source - i.e., when the Phone & Media tab is selected, the Volume
Shortcut panel adjusts the volume for the Bluetooth audio. The shortcut panel's source
EIS
can also be changed by pressing either of the knobs. The shortcut panel appears on the
opposite side of the screen as the Audio/Intercom panel.
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Pilot and
Copilot
Intercom
Avoidance
Hazard
Volume Levels
Audio Intercom Volume Shortcut (GDU™ 460 only)
Additional
Features
MORE OPTIONS
NOTE: The Speaker Button is moved under 'More Options...' when both
AFCS
Marker Beacon and Speaker are enabled.

The More Options... Button allows access to the AUX Radios, Marker Sensitivity,
Annun/Alerts
and Active COM Receive Monitor Mute functions. Selecting Monitor Mute, mutes the
monitored COM radio when audio from the MIC selected COM radio is heard.
Appendix
Index
CNS Interface
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Radios Tab, More Options Button Selected

Planning
INTERCOM TAB
Flight
The following paragraphs describe the functions accessible from the Intercom Tab.
Avoidance
Hazard
Selecting the Intercom tab:

Or:
Additional
Features

2) Touch the Intercom tab.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
CNS Interface
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Audio/Intercom Page, Intercom Tab
Avoidance
Hazard
ICS VOLUME
The ICS Volume section allows selection of Pilot, Copilot, and Passenger intercom
Additional
volume. A volume adjust slider is used to set the selected volume on G3X Touch Features
systems with a GMA 245R.

Adjusting Volume:
AFCS
1) Touch Pilot, Copilot, or Passengers on Intercom Tab.

Annun/Alerts
ICS ISOLATION
The ICS Isolation section allows selection of Pilot and Crew Isolate functions. These
functions are annunciated in the Audio Box on the CNS Data Bar when active.
Appendix
Index
CNS Interface
Pilot Isolation mode isolates the Pilot from other ICS positions (Copilot and
Overview
Passengers). The Copilot and Passengers share communication between themselves

System
but cannot communicate with the Pilot or hear the pilot's selected radios.
Crew Isolation mode places the Pilot and Copilot on a common ICS communication
Instruments
Flight
channel. The Passengers are on their own intercom channel and can communicate
with each other, but cannot communicate with the Pilot and Copilot or hear the pilot's
selected radios.
EIS
MORE OPTIONS...
The More Options button allows access to the 3D Audio and Muting functions.
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Intercom Tab, More Options Button Selected

Appendix
Index
CNS Interface
3D AUDIO
Overview
System
3D Audio is useful when multiple audio sources are present. 3D audio processing
creates the illusion that each audio source is coming from a unique location or seat
position by using different responses in each ear. Because this feature uses different
Instruments
signals for left and right channels, it requires wiring for stereo intercom and stereo
Flight
headsets. If 3D audio is activated when mono headsets are in use, the listener will still
hear all audio sources; however, there is no benefit from location separation. With a
single COM selected and Radio 3D Audio enabled, the listener hears the audio source
EIS
at the 12 o’clock position. If both COMs are selected, the listener hears COM1 at 11
o’clock and COM2 at the 1 o’clock position. When ICS 3D Audio is selected, all intercom
Interface
positions are processed to sound like their relative seat location. By default, the GMA
CNS
245R assumes the pilot sits in the left seat.
Selecting Radio/ICS 3D Audio:
Navigation
GPS
1) Touch More Options button on the Intercom tab.
2) Touch the Radio 3D Audio or ICS 3D Audio button to select/deselect the
Planning
desired 3D Audio function.
Flight
MUTING
Avoidance
Hazard
• Radio Mutes ICS – When Radio Mutes ICS is enabled, intercom audio from passengers
to crew is muted when audio from the COM selected for transmission is heard.
• Radio Mutes Music – When Radio Mutes Music is enabled, music audio is muted
Additional
Features
when radio audio is heard.
• ICS Mutes Music – When ICS Mutes Music is enabled, music audio is muted when
intercom audio is heard.
AFCS
PHONE & MEDIA TAB

Annun/Alerts
Selecting the Phone & Media tab:

Or:
Appendix

2) Touch the Phone & Media tab.
Index
CNS Interface
The Phone & Media Tab on the Audio-Intercom Page, provides access to the telephone
Overview
controls, enables media playback, and connects to a Bluetooth device.

System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
Audio/Intercom Page, Phone & Media Tab
MEDIA
AFCS
The Media Controls enable playback of the current media (i.e., music, movie, etc.).
The buttons are subdued when media is unavailable.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
CNS Interface
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Media Controls
Interface
BLUETOOTH
CNS
The Bluetooth “Pair Device” button with a toggle indicates when the “pairing
Navigation
mode” is currently active. Pressing this button initiates the pairing operation and
GPS
indicates when pairing is in progress. The toggle is displayed as green until the GMA
reports that pairing mode is no longer active. When pairing is not allowed, pressing
this button performs no action.
Planning
Flight
When pairing mode is enabled, the GMA 245R is able to be paired to other Bluetooth
enabled devices. Refer to the device's user manual for instructions on how to pair to a
Avoidance
Hazard
Bluetooth device. The GMA 245R will remember the ten most recently paired devices,
if the list is full and a new device is paired, the device with the oldest connection date/
time is removed from the list.
Additional
Features
The GMA 245R supports Bluetooth wireless delivery of pilot headphone audio to
versions of the Garmin VIRB action camera that support Bluetooth mic audio input for
recording.
AFCS
Pairing a Garmin VIRB to the GMA 245R works like pairing other Bluetooth audio
devices. Once connected, pilot headphone audio will be delivered to the VIRB via
Annun/Alerts
Bluetooth. In a connection to the Garmin VIRB, the GMA is the source. Therefore,
selecting an entertainment key is not required.
Appendix
Index
CNS Interface
Bluetooth Connection Status

Overview
System
The Bluetooth connection status is either displayed with a single checkbox for
“No Connection”, or with 1 or 2 checkboxes for each item connected (i.e., a single
Instruments
checkbox for media only, phone only, and output only, or 2 checkboxes for media and
Flight
phone, or media and output).

Bluetooth/Media Indication Description
EIS
No Bluetooth connection, pairing mode

disabled.
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
No Bluetooth connection, pairing mode

enabled.
Planning
Flight
Bluetooth is connected with a VIRB

Avoidance
Action camera that supports Bluetooth

Hazard
audio.
Additional
Features
Bluetooth is connected with telephone

and media functions.
AFCS
When connected to the telephone, the

Bluetooth title is replaced with the
Annun/Alerts
phone's ID (if provided by phone).

Appendix
Index
CNS Interface
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
Bluetooth is connected with telephone
function only.
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Bluetooth is connected with media
functions only.
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Bluetooth is connected with media, but
the connected device does not support
media controls. In this instance, the
Additional
Features
media controls are disabled.
The audio is audible via the intercom but
may only be controlled via the external
AFCS
device.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
CNS Interface

Overview
System
When the audio is playing with the media

Instruments
controls enabled, the Play button is

Flight
replaced with the Pause button.

If provided by the external device,
the album/artist/title/track number is
EIS
displayed above the media controls. The

external device may provide all, none, or
only a part of this information.
Interface
CNS
Navigation
Bluetooth interface is disabled. The

GPS
GMA’s Bluetooth interface may be

enabled/disabled as described below.
Planning
Flight
Disabling Bluetooth on GMA 245R

To aid in troubleshooting, the G3X Touch can be used to disable the Bluetooth
Avoidance
Hazard
functionality on the GMA 245R devices. Bluetooth on the GMA 245R can be re-
enabled with the same process as disabling it. The GMA 245R will also re-enable
Bluetooth when the power is cycled.
Additional
Features
Enabling/disabling GMA 245R Bluetooth:

AFCS
3) Touch the Phone & Media tab.

Annun/Alerts
5) Touch Disable/Enable.
TELEPHONE OPERATIONS
Appendix
When the Bluetooth connection status indicates “Telephone” is connected, the

Phone & Media Tab on the Audio/Intercom Page provides the ability to answer, ignore
(do not answer), and end Bluetooth phone calls and the Data Bar’s audio panel controls
Index
provide indications of the status of a Bluetooth phone call.
CNS Interface
Telephone audio
Overview
System
The Telephone Audio button allows enables/disables the telephone's audio to the
intercom system for both the wired and Bluetooth telephone connections.
Instruments
Flight
Button Status Description Connection Description
Wired Connection: The audio of the telephone
is connected to the intercom and the pilot may
Telephone participate in existing calls. Controlling the call
EIS
audio is (i.e., answer/hang up) is not supported, the ringing
active (i.e., of an incoming call may be heard but the actual
Interface
connected phone must be used to answer (and end) the call.
CNS
Enabled (Green) to the Bluetooth Connection: The ringing of an incoming
intercom). call may be heard via the intercom, and the pilot
Navigation
GPS
may ignore/answer/end the call via the provided
GDU controls.
Wired Connection: Telephone operations are not
Planning
Flight
supported via the intercom, and there are no
indications of incoming or existing calls.
Bluetooth Connection: The ringing of an incoming
Avoidance
Hazard
call and the audio of an existing call are not heard
Telephone
via the intercom. The GDU provides an indication
audio is not
of an incoming call via the Data Bar’s audio panel
Additional
active (i.e., Features
button (flashing “TEL” indicator) and the Audio
connected
Panel page to allow the pilot to answer it - which
Disabled (Gray) to the
automatically transitions “Telephone Audio” to
intercom).
AFCS
enabled.
Also, the Audio Panel page provides an indication
of an existing call (via “Call Active”) allowing the
Annun/Alerts
pilot to join in the call via the intercom by enabling

“Telephone Audio”.
Appendix
Index
CNS Interface
Telephone data bar controls

Overview
System
To provide an immediate indication of the state of a Bluetooth phone call at all times
(without having to access the Audio/Intercom page), the Audio Box on the Data Bar
Instruments
provides the status of a Bluetooth phone call to indicate:

Flight
• No call is active
• A call is incoming (i.e., phone is ringing)
EIS
• A call is active
These controls also display the intercom isolation states per the following table.
Interface
CNS
Audio Box Format

Description
Normal Minimized Audio Only
Navigation
GPS
Call active, no intercom

isolation
Call active, with intercom
Planning
Flight
isolation
Touch Audio on the Data Bar when a Bluetooth phone call is “incoming” or “active”
Avoidance
Hazard
to directly access the Phone/Media tab on the Audio/Intercom page and provide instant
access to the phone controls.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
CNS Interface
Telephone controls
Overview
System
The Phone & Media Tab on the Audio/Intercom Page provides the ability to answer,
ignore (i.e., do not answer), and end Bluetooth phone calls.
Instruments
At the top of the tab, the Media title and controls are replaced with the phone
Flight
call status and controls. The “Media” title is replaced with “Incoming Call” or “Call
Active” and the media buttons are replaced with the phone’s call volume control and
the ability to set the external device’s phone volume and ignore/answer/end the call.
EIS
Also, the caller’s phone number is displayed above the phone controls if provided by
the external device.
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Incoming Call (Phone is Ringing)

Appendix
Index
CNS Interface
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Active Call (Call is in Progress)

Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
Telephone Volume Slider

AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
CNS Interface
MUSIC INPUT TAB
Overview
System
The following paragraphs describe the functions accessible from the Music Input Tab.
Selecting the Music Input tab:
Instruments
Flight
Or:
EIS
2) Touch the Music Input tab.
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Audio/Intercom Page, Music Input Tab

Appendix
Index
CNS Interface
PILOT MUSIC/COPILOT MUSIC/PASSENGERS MUSIC

Overview
System
These buttons enable/disable the individual music source for the separate intercom
stations. The supported music sources are two (wired) inputs and one (wireless)
Instruments
Bluetooth input. Note the Source names for the Music 1 and Music 2 (wired) inputs
Flight
are defined in configuration mode (SXM, DVD, etc., as shown in preceding figure), the
Bluetooth input Source name is Bluetooth and cannot be changed.
Selecting Source:
EIS
1) Touch Source for Pilot, Copilot, or Passengers on Music Input Tab.

2) Touch Music 1, Music 2, or Bluetooth to select the audio source.
Interface
CNS
Adjusting Volume:
A volume adjust slider is used to set the selected volume on G3X Touch systems with
Navigation
GPS
a GMA 245R.
1) Touch Volume for Pilot, Copilot, or Passengers on Music Input Tab
(Volume is displayed for Pilot or Copilot for GMA 245R units only).
Planning
Flight
MUSIC DISTRIBUTION
Avoidance
Hazard
Selecting Normal using the Distribution button overrides the individual music
controls for the copilot and passengers intercom stations. Normal sets all music
Additional
Features
selections (enable/disable, source, and volume) for the specified intercom station to
the same settings as the currently selected pilot settings. With Normal selected, the
system behaves as if it has only a single music interface.
AFCS
The Advanced selection allows the individual selection of separate music interfaces
for pilot, copilot, and passengers.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Distribution Button Selections

Index
CNS Interface
MUSIC EFFECTS
Overview
System
The Music 1, Music 2, and Bluetooth sections have music effect selections as follows:
• Bass Boost - Available settings are None, Medium, and High
Instruments
Flight
• Equalizer - Available settings are None, Rock, Classical, and Pop
4.8 REMOTE TRANSPONDER INTERFACE
EIS
(OPTIONAL)
Interface
CNS
The G3X Touch is capable of interfacing with several remote transponders
providing Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities. Selective addressing or Mode
Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
Navigation
GPS
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft
and ATC facilities)
Planning
Flight
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting - The Mode S Transponder reports
identification as either the aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
Avoidance
Hazard
• Altitude Reporting
• Airborne status determination
Additional
Features
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
AFCS
• Acquisition squitter - Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder

24 bit identification address. The transmission is sent periodically, regardless
Annun/Alerts
of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of the acquisition squitter is to

enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance
System (TAS) to recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective
interrogation.
Appendix
Index
CNS Interface
Touch to
enter code or
Overview
System
change mode
Transponder Reply Touch to
Code Status Ident
Mode
Instruments
Flight
Transponder Data Box on CNS Bar

EIS
Transponder tuning for panel mount transponders like GTX 327 (Mode C) is also
supported.
Interface
CNS
NOTE: A standalone MFD cannot support the remote transponder interface.

Navigation
GPS
TRANSPONDER CODE AND MODE SELECTION

The transponder mode will automatically switch between GND Mode and ALT Mode.
Planning
Flight
Selecting a transponder code or mode:

1) Touch the transponder data box on the PFD.
Avoidance
Hazard
Or:
From the Main Menu, touch XPDR.
2) Use the keypad to enter a code and touch Enter.
Additional
Features
Or:
Touch STBY, GND/ALT, or ON to change the mode, and touch Enter.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
System Flight CNS GPS Flight Hazard Additional
Overview Instruments EIS Interface Navigation Planning Avoidance Features AFCS Annun/Alerts Appendix Index
129
CNS Interface
Garmin G3X Touch™ Pilot’s Guide for Certified Aircraft

Transponder Code, Mode, and Flight ID Entry
190-02472-00 Rev. D
CNS Interface
GROUND AND ALTITUDE MODES

Overview
System
Most Garmin transponders automatically transition between on-ground and in-air

and operate in the appropriate mode at all times. No pilot action is required to manage
Instruments
modes unless there is a need to manually select STBY or ON modes.

Flight
The G3X Touch displays a green GND indication and transponder code in the
Transponder Data Box while on-ground, and a green ALT indication when in-air, when
not set to STBY or ON.
EIS
NOTE: Some panel mount transponders may indicate ALT on their dedicated
Interface
display at all time, even while on-ground. As a result, in some installations,

CNS
the transponder display and the G3X Touch display will indicate different
modes while on the ground, although they are functionally equivalent.
Navigation
GPS
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)

In Standby Mode, the transponder does not reply to interrogations, but new codes
Planning
Flight
can be entered. When Standby Mode is selected, a white STBY indication and
transponder code appear in the Transponder Data Box.
Avoidance
ON MODE (MANUAL)
Hazard
On Mode can be selected at any time. ON Mode generates Mode A and Mode S
replies, but Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. In ON Mode, a green ON indication
Additional
Features
and transponder code appear in the Transponder Data Box.
REPLY STATUS
AFCS
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a green R indication appears

momentarily in the Transponder Data Box.
Annun/Alerts
VFR CODE
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by touching VFR on the Transponder
Appendix
Page. The pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field of the
Transponder Data Box.
Index
CNS Interface
IDENT FUNCTION
Overview
System
Touching IDENT sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC).
The indication distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air
Instruments
traffic controller’s screen. After touching IDENT the bar on the button turns green
Flight
momentarily.
ADS-B OUT
EIS
When configured with an ADS-B Out capable transponder, ‘NO ADSB’ is displayed
in yellow, in the Transponder Data Box, if the ADS-B Out broadcast has been manually
Interface
disabled or if the transponder does not have the required GPS data.
CNS
FLIGHT ID REPORTING
Navigation
GPS
NOTE: The Flight ID must be configured to ‘Set By Pilot’ in Configuration
Mode for the Flight ID option to appear on the Transponder Page. Refer to
Planning
the G3X Touch Installation Manual for more information.
Flight
Entering a Flight ID:
1) Touch the transponder data box on the CNS Bar.
Avoidance
Hazard
Or:
From the Main Menu, touch XPDR.
Additional
Features
2) Enter the Flight ID using the keypad and touch Enter. AFCS
Flight ID (Transponder Data Box)

Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
CNS Interface
ADDITIONAL TRANSPONDER MESSAGES

Overview
System
Annunciation Description Action

Generic message for faults Contact Garmin if the message
XPDR FAULT
Instruments
received from the transponder. persists.

Flight
The transponder is configured

XPDR
incorrectly. Consult the Consult the installation manual
CONFIG
installation manual or Garmin to verify configuration.
EIS
ERROR
dealer (as appropriate).
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
GPS Navigation
SECTION 5 GPS NAVIGATION
Overview
System
5.1 INTRODUCTION
Instruments
Flight
The Map Page displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces),
geographic data (e.g., cities, lakes, highways, borders), and topographic data (map
shading indicating elevation) to be used for situational awareness only.
EIS
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to
the calculated present position. The aircraft's current location is depicted as the center
Interface
of the aircraft icon. The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based
CNS
on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which these are placed is from a source with
less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features is not
Navigation
exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta
GPS
line on the navigation map. The other legs are shown in white.
The Direct-to Window and the Nearest Pages can be displayed by pressing the
Planning
Flight
corresponding buttons.
COMPASS ARC
Avoidance
Hazard
NOTE: The compass arc is not available in ‘North Up’ map orientation.
Additional
Features
A compass arc representing the aircraft’s ground track, appears by default on the
Map Page. The route line represents the course.
AFCS
Compass Arc
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Compass Arc
Index
GPS Navigation
Enabling/disabling the Compass Arc:

Overview
System
1) With the Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key.

2) Touch Set Up Map.
3) Under the ‘General’ Tab, touch and drag to scroll down to the Compass
Instruments
Flight
Arc field.
4) Touch .
5) Touch On or Off.
EIS
When using the compass arc on the map display, the heading reference will be
shown as a dashed line for several seconds. If a cross wind is present, the ownship
Interface
symbol will rotate slightly to show the difference between the aircraft’s heading (if
CNS
available) and ground track.
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS

Navigation
GPS
WARNING: The G3X Touch™ map displays are to be used for situational
Planning
awareness only.
Flight
Map displays are used extensively in the G3X Touch to provide situational awareness
in flight. Most G3X Touch maps can display the following information:
Avoidance
Hazard
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data (highways, cities, lakes, rivers,
borders, etc.) with names
Additional
Features
• Map Pointer information (distance and bearing to pointer, location of pointer,

name, and other pertinent information)
• Map range
AFCS
• Aircraft icon (representing present position)

Annun/Alerts
• Flight plan legs

• User waypoints
• Track vector
Appendix
• Topography data
Index
GPS Navigation
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
Overview
System
• All Map Pages (MAP)
• Waypoint Page (WPT)
Instruments
Flight
• All Nearest Pages (NRST)
• Active Flight Plan Page
• Direct-to Window
EIS
MAP PAGE SETUP
Interface
MAP ORIENTATION
CNS
Maps are shown in one of three different orientation options, allowing flexibility
Navigation
in determining aircraft position relative to other items on the map (North Up) or for
GPS
determining where map items are relative to where the aircraft is going (Track Up), or
desired track up (DTK UP).
Planning
Flight
• North Up aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
• Track Up aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
Avoidance
Hazard
• Desired Track (DTK) Up aligns the top of the map display to the desired course.
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the Map Page. Any other
Additional
pages that show navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Map Features
Page.
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:

AFCS

Annun/Alerts
3) Under the ‘General’ Tab, touch and drag to scroll to the Orientation field.
4) Touch .
5) Touch North Up, Track Up, or DTK Up.
Appendix
Index
GPS Navigation
The pilot can also temporarily toggle orientation by touching the North Up arrow.
Overview
System
The North Up toggle button behavior is dependant on the selected Map Orientation:
Map Orientation Toggle Action
Instruments
Flight
North Up Track Up
Track Up North Up
DTK Up North Up
EIS
North Up
arrow Button
Interface
CNS
North Up
arrow Button
Navigation
GPS
North Up Arrow Button
Setting the range above which to display North Up orientation:

Planning
Flight

Avoidance
3) Under the ‘General’ Tab, touch and drag to scroll to the North Up Above
Hazard
field.
4) Touch .
Additional
Features
5) Touch the desired range.

Enabling/disabling North Up orientation on the ground:
AFCS

3) Under the ‘General’ Tab, touch and drag to scroll to the North Up On
Annun/Alerts
Ground field.
4) Touch .
5) Touch On or Off.
Appendix
DISPLAY FLIGHT PLAN INFORMATION ON MAP/CHARTS PAGE

With the flight plan information displayed on the Map/Charts Page (see procedure
Index
below), touch the flight plan to quickly access the Active Flight Plan Page.
GPS Navigation
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Touch to
display the
Flight Plan
Page
Interface
CNS
Flight Plan Displayed on Map Page
Navigation
GPS
Displaying/removing flight plan information on the map/charts
page:
Planning
Flight
3) Under the ‘General’ Tab, touch and drag to scroll to the Flight Plan Info
Avoidance
Hazard
field.
4) Touch .
5) Touch On or Off.
Additional
Features
AIRPORTS & NAVAIDS

Airport and NAVAID information can be customized to display a variety of information
AFCS
including: runway extension lines, runway numbers and visual reporting points (VRP). Runway
extension lines show runway orientation relative to other landmarks and terrain features and
Annun/Alerts
are intended to aid in planning traffic pattern entry and/or departure routing.
Runway
Extension
Appendix
line
Runway
Number
Index
Runway Extensions and Numbers (Map Page)

GPS Navigation
Setting up and customizing airports and NAVAIDs for the map

Overview
page:
System

Instruments
Flight
3) Touch and drag the tabs left or right to find the desired tab.
4) Touch the ‘Airport’ or ‘Navaid’ Tab.
5) Touch the to display a list of options.
EIS
6) Touch the desired settings for each feature (on, off, auto, range, text size,
etc.).
Interface
CNS
MAP TYPE
From the Map Setup Page the pilot can display either VFR or IFR maps. Refer to
Navigation
Section 5.4 for information on displaying/removing IFR airways.

GPS
Changing the Map Type (VFR/IFR):

Planning
Flight

3) Touch the ‘Map’ Tab.
Avoidance
Hazard
4) Touch .
5) Touch VFR or IFR.
Additional
Features
AIRSPACE
Setting up and customizing airspace for the map page:
AFCS

Annun/Alerts
4) Touch the ‘Airspace’ Tab.

Appendix
6) Touch the desired option for each airspace (on, off, auto, range, all
(Atlantic), or below (Atlantic)).
Index
GPS Navigation
MAP RANGE
Overview
System
NOTE: Refer to the Additional Features section for information on changing
the FliteCharts® or ChartView range.
Instruments
Flight
There are 23 different map ranges available (distances are dependant on
configuration). The current range is indicated in the lower right corner of the map.
The scale bar represents the map scale. To change the map range on any map, use
EIS
the knob or touch the ‘+’ (decrease visible range) or the ‘-’ (increase visible range).
Scale Bar Rep-
resenting a Map
Interface
CNS
Scale of 20 nm Per
Scale Width.
Map Range
Navigation
GPS
AUTO ZOOM
Auto Zoom allows the G3X Touch to change the map display range to the smallest
Planning
Flight
range clearly showing the active waypoint. Auto Zoom can be overridden by adjusting
the range and remains that way until the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic
alert occurs, or the aircraft takes off.
Avoidance
Hazard
Safe Taxi also affects Auto Zoom. When the aircraft has landed at the destination
airport, the navigation map automatically zooms in to display the Safe Taxi diagram.
Additional
Enabling/disabling Auto Zoom: Features

AFCS
3) Under the ‘General’ Tab, find the Autozoom field.

4) Touch .
Annun/Alerts
5) Touch On or Off.
MAP PANNING
Appendix
Map panning allows the pilot to:

• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map
range
Index
• Highlight and select locations on the map
GPS Navigation
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint

Overview
System
• Designate locations for use in flight planning

• View airspace and airway information
Instruments
Flight
To pan the map, touch and drag the map. Touch a map feature to get additional
information. The map feature button shows not only the feature name (such as airport
designation or waypoint name) but also shows the type (airport, waypoint, etc.). If
multiple features are present at the map feature position, a green arrow will appear
EIS
on the map feature button. Touch or to cycle through the list of map features
present at that position.
Interface
CNS
Information Center on
Box Aircraft’s
Current
Navigation
GPS
Location
Bearing and
Distance to the
Selected Map
Planning
Flight
Feature from
the Aircraft’s
Present
Position
Green Arrow
Avoidance
Hazard
Indicating Latitude/
Multiple Longitude
Features are Position of the
Present at the Selected Map
Feature
Additional
Features
Location.
Elevation of the
Map Feature Selected Map
(Type and Feature
Name) Press button to
AFCS
create a User
Waypoint at
Map Panning (Map Page) this location
Time to selected
Annun/Alerts
waypoint at
the aircraft's
current speed
Appendix
Panning the map:

1) From any map, touch and drag.
2) Touch to re-center the map on the aircraft’s current position.
Index
Or:
GPS Navigation
Touch the Back button.
Overview
System
Reviewing information for a map feature:
1) From any map, touch a map feature.
Instruments
2) If multiple map features are present, touch to cycle through the list.
Flight
3) Touch the Map Feature button to display additional information.
FUEL RANGE RING
EIS
WARNING: The G3X Touch Fuel Calculator and/or Fuel Range Rings are
Interface
NOT intended to be relied upon as the primary fuel indicator(s), and does
CNS
not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of proper flight planning. G3X
Touch fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and
are calculated from the last time the fuel was reset.
Navigation
GPS
The Navigation Map can display fuel range rings which show the remaining flight
distance. If current fuel endurance is greater than reserve, range-to-empty is shown as
Planning
a solid green circle and range-to-reserve is a dashed green circle. If current endurance
Flight
is less than reserve, range-to-empty is shown as a solid yellow circle. Fuel range
rings are offset to show the effects of the wind at the current location (e.g., does not
Avoidance
Hazard
account for wind variations throughout the range).
Displaying/removing the fuel range rings and selecting a fuel
reserve time:
Additional
Features
AFCS

5) Touch the in the Fuel Range (RSV) field, and touch On or Off.
Annun/Alerts
6) Touch ‘+’ or ‘-’ to adjust the fuel range reserve time (HH:MM).
Appendix
Index
GPS Navigation
Range to Range to
Reserve Empty
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Navigation Map
Interface
CNS
GLIDE RANGE RING

Navigation
NOTE: Glide Range Ring options are disabled when Outside Air Temperature
GPS
(OAT) is not available.

Planning
Flight
NOTE: In order for the Glide Range Ring to display on the map, Best Glide
Speed (VG) and Sink Rate (at VG) must be configured on the Aircraft Con-
figuration Page in Configuration Mode. Refer to the G3X Touch Installation
Avoidance
Manual for more information.

Hazard
NOTE: Many factors, such as winds at various altitudes, terrain, aircraft

Additional
Features
configuration, and pilot actions affect the ability to accurately estimate the
gliding range of an aircraft. The Glide Range Ring is for reference only and is
not a substitute for the Emergency Procedures and glide distance information
in the aircraft Pilot's Operating Handbook.
AFCS
The Glide Range Ring is displayed as a cyan ring around the estimated area that can
be reached by the aircraft in the configured best-glide range configuration. The Glide
Annun/Alerts
Range Ring fades into view on the map as the aircraft climbs through 500 feet AGL.
The range is based on the configured best-glide Speed (VG) and Sink Rate (at VG). Best
Glide and Sink Rate are combined with the aircraft's height (AGL), wind, bank angle,
Appendix
terrain, and obstacles to determine the distance the aircraft can travel.
Index
GPS Navigation
Glide Range Ring
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation Map - Glide Range Ring Navigation Map - Glide Range Ring
(Ideal Descent Profile - No Wind) (Ideal Descent Profile - Wind 245˚ at 25 kts)
Enabling/disabling the Glide Range Ring:
Navigation
GPS
2) Touch Set Up Map....
Planning
Flight
5) Touch and drag the page up or down to find the Glide Range Ring field.
Avoidance
Hazard
6) Touch the in the Glide Range Ring field, and touch On or Off.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
GPS Navigation
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Touch to
Enable or
Disable the
Interface
Glide Range
CNS
Ring
Map Setup Page
Navigation
BEST AIRPORT BEARING POINTER

GPS
NOTE: In order to display the Best Airport Bearing Pointer, Best Glide Speed
Planning
Flight
and Sink Rate (at VG) must be configured on the Aircraft Configuration Page
in Configuration Mode. Refer to the G3X Touch Installation Manual for more
information.
Avoidance
Hazard
The Best Airport Bearing Pointer points to the airport within the Glide Range Ring
that is considered the best option for a landing based on the following criteria:
Additional
Features
1) The airport must be within glide range as determined by the following:

a) User entered glide performance (Sink Rate and Best Glide Speed).
b) Aircraft altitude and direction of flight.
AFCS
c) Airport elevation.
d) Wind velocity.
Annun/Alerts
2) The expected flyover altitude (i.e., airports with 1000' or greater margin
take precedence).
3) Hard surface runways (i.e., paved runways take precedence over grass
Appendix
runways).
4) Runway lengths.
5) Runway alignment with the wind (if known).
Index
GPS Navigation
Enabling/disabling the Best Airport Bearing Pointer:
Overview
System
2) Touch next to a bearing pointer to display the bearing pointer options.
3) Touch Best Airport.
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Touch to
Display the
Best Airport
Bearing
Interface
CNS
Pointer
Navigation
GPS
PFD Options
Bearing
Pointer 1 Bearing Pointer 2
Planning
Flight
(Best Airport) (Nearest Airport)
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Bearing 1 Information Window Bearing 2 Information Window

Appendix
-Identifier -Identifier
-Distance -Distance
HSI with Bearing Pointers
Index
GPS Navigation
BEST AIRPORT LINE

Overview
System
The Best Airport Line points to the same airport as the Best Airport Bearing Pointer
but is available on the MFD and Split Screen Map displays instead of the HSI. The line
Instruments
appears as a series of cyan chevrons between the aircraft marker and the recommended
Flight
glide-to airport.
Displaying/removing the Best Airport Line:
EIS

Interface
CNS
4) Touch the ‘Line’ Tab.

5) In the Best Airport Line field, touch On or Off.
Navigation
GPS
Glide
Range
Ring
Planning
Flight
Best
Airport Selected
Line Altitude
Intercept
Avoidance
Hazard
Arc
Navigation Map Navigation Map
Additional
Features
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC

The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will
intercept the selected altitude. The location will be shown as a cyan arc when the
AFCS
aircraft is climbing or descending.

Annun/Alerts
Displaying/removing the selected altitude intercept arc:

Appendix
5) In the Selected Altitude Intercept Arc field, touch On or Off.
Index
GPS Navigation
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
Overview
System
The ‘Measure Distance’ option on Map Page menu is useful for measuring the distance
between two points on the map. The distance tool displays a dashed Measurement
Line and a Map Pointer to aid in graphically identifying points to measure. Lat/Long,
Instruments
Flight
bearing, distance, and elevation data is provided.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) From the Map Page, press the MENU Key.
EIS
2) Touch Measure Distance.
3) Touch any point on the viewable navigation map to select the first reference
point.
Interface
CNS
4) Touch Set Ref to select the second reference point to receive distance and
bearing information from the first reference point to the second reference
Navigation
point.
GPS
Reference
Point
Planning
Measurement
Flight
Line
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
Map Page (Measure Distance)

AFCS
TOPOGRAPHY
Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
Annun/Alerts
procedures.
Displaying/removing topographic data:
Appendix
2) Touch Topo Shading.

Index
GPS Navigation
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
Topographic Shading (Map Page)
MAP PAGE TRAFFIC

EIS
Enabling/disabling traffic on the Map Page:

Interface

CNS
2) Touch Traffic.
Enabling/disabling TargetTrend Overlay:
Navigation
GPS

Planning
Flight
3) Under the ‘Traffic’ Tab, touch and drag to scroll to the TargetTrend field.
4) Touch .
5) Touch On or Off.
Avoidance
Hazard
MAP SYMBOLS
Additional
Features
Refer to Appendix G for a list of map symbols.
MAP DECLUTTER
The pilot can remove (declutter) unwanted items, such as highways from the map.
AFCS
Decluttering the Map Page:

Annun/Alerts

2) Touch -1, -2, or -3 under Map Detail.
MAP DETAIL
Appendix
The map detail can also be adjusted. Map detail changes the amount of detail with
respect to the zoom scale.
Index
GPS Navigation
Overview
System
4) Touch the ‘General’ Tab.
Instruments
Flight
5) Touch the in the Detail Level field.
6) Touch Least, Less, Normal, More, or Most.
EIS
Features Displayed at Each Map Detail Level
Feature 0 1 2 3 Feature 0 1 2 3
Interface
CNS
River/Lake Names • Warning Areas • •
Land/Country Text • Large Airports • • •
Navigation
Large City • Medium Airports • • •
GPS
Medium City • Restricted Areas • •
Small City • Prohibited Areas • • • •
Planning
Flight
Small Town • MOAs • •
Freeways • Runway Labels • • •
Avoidance
Highways • Lightning Strike Data • • •
Hazard
Roads • NEXRAD Data • • • •
Railroads • Traffic Symbols • • • •
Additional
Features
Political Boundaries • • • • Traffic Labels • • • •
User Waypoints • • Lakes/Major Rivers • • • •
VORs • • • Minor Rivers •
AFCS
NDBs • • • Active FPL Legs • • • •

Intersections • • • Airways • • •
Annun/Alerts
Class B Airspace • • Proximity Circles • • •

Class C Airspace • • Storm Cells • •
Class D Airspace • • Fronts • • •
Appendix

Index
GPS Navigation
Feature 0 1 2 3 Feature 0 1 2 3
Overview
System
Tower • • • • AIRMET • •
TRSA • • SIGMET • •
Instruments
ADIZ • • AIRMET • •
Flight
Alert Areas • • SIGMET • •

Caution Areas • • TFR • • • •
EIS
Danger Areas • •

Interface
CNS
5.3 AIRWAYS
Navigation
Low Altitude Airways (or Victor Airways) primarily serve smaller piston-engine,
GPS
propeller-driven airplanes on shorter routes and at lower altitudes. Airways are eight
nautical miles wide and start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up
Planning
to but not including 18,000 feet mean sea level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are
Flight
designated with a “V” before the airway number (hence the name “Victor Airways”)
since they run primarily between VORs.
Avoidance
Hazard
High Altitude Airways (or Jet Routes) primarily serve airliners, jets, turboprops, and
turbocharged piston aircraft operating above 18,000 feet MSL. Jet Routes start at
18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet MSL (altitudes above 18,000 feet
Additional
Features
are called “flight levels” and are described as FL450 for 45,000 feet MSL). Jet Routes
are designated with a "J" before the route number.
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray. High Altitude Airways are drawn in green.
AFCS
When both types of airways are displayed, high altitude airways are drawn on top of
Low Altitude Airways.
Annun/Alerts
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs,
NDBs, and Intersections) are also displayed.
Appendix
Index
GPS Navigation
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
IFR Map
EIS
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion.
Interface
Displaying/removing airways:
CNS
2) Touch Setup.
Navigation
GPS
3) Touch Map.
4) Touch and drag the tabs left or right to find the desired tab or turn the
large Knob associated with the MFD.
Planning
Flight
5) Touch the ‘Navaid’ Tab.
6) Touch the in the Airways field.
Avoidance
Hazard
7) Touch Off, Low, High, or Both.
Reviewing information for an airway:
Additional
1) With the IFR map displayed on the Map Page (see procedure above), touch Features
a map feature.
2) If multiple map features are present, touch or to cycle through the
list.
AFCS
3) With the airway selected, touch the Map Feature button to display
additional information.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
GPS Navigation
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Low Altitude Airway Review Page

Navigation
GPS
5.4 WAYPOINTS
Planning
Flight
The Waypoint (Wpt) Page provides airport and waypoint information.

Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-
Avoidance
Hazard
entered positions, and are used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Waypoints can be changed by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of
the facility, or by entering the city name. As a waypoint identifier, facility name, or
Additional
Features
location is entered, the G3X Touch’s Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls through the data-
base, displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered
up to that point. A direct-to navigation leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated
AFCS
by pressing the Direct-to Key from the Waypoint Page.

The following descriptions and abbreviations are used:
Annun/Alerts
• Usage type: Public, Military, or Private

• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
Appendix
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for
pilot-controlled lighting)
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), * (additional
Index
information available)
GPS Navigation
Airport
Information
Overview
System
-Elevation
-Fuel Available
-Time Zone (UTC Offset)
-Lat/Long (Full)
Instruments
-Facility Name -Bearing/Distance
Flight
-City/Region -Symbol/Type
COM/NAV
Freq. Info.
EIS
-Identification
-Frequency
-Availability
-Additional
Interface
Information
CNS
Runway
Information
-Designation
Navigation
-Length/Width
GPS
-Surface
-Lighting
-Traffic Pattern
-Wind (Full)
Planning
Flight
Map
Showing
Selected
Waypoint
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Waypoint Page - Info Tab Features
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or loca-

tion:
AFCS
1) From the Waypoint (Wpt) Page, touch the waypoint identifier at the top of
the page.
Annun/Alerts
2) Enter the waypoint identifier using the keypad and touch Enter.
Or:
Touch Find > Search Name > Search by Facility Name. Enter the
Appendix
facility name using the keypad and touch Enter.

Index
GPS Navigation
Or:
Overview
System
Touch Find > Search City > Search by City. Enter the city name using
If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a Duplicates Found Window is displayed.
Instruments
Flight
Touch the desired options from the Duplicates Found Window.

Selecting a runway:
1) From the Waypoint (Wpt) Page, touch the Runway Tab if necessary.
EIS
2) Touch the waypoint identifier at the top of the page.

Interface
CNS
4) If necessary, touch the to display additional runways. Touch the desired

runway.
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Touch to tune
Additional
Features
runway lights
AFCS
Runway Selection
Annun/Alerts
Viewing additional information for a frequency:

The Freq Tab uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
Appendix
Index
GPS Navigation
Communication Frequencies Navigation
Overview
System
Frequencies
Approach * Control Pre-Taxi ILS
Arrival * CTA * Radar LOC
Instruments
Flight
ASOS Departure * Ramp
ATIS Gate Terminal*
AWOS Ground TMA *
EIS
Center Helicopter Tower
Class B * Multicom TRSA *
Interface
Class C * Other Unicom
CNS
Clearance
* May include Additional Information
Navigation
GPS
Frequency Abbreviations
1) With the Waypoint (WPT) Page displayed, touch the Freq Tab.
Planning
Flight
3) Touch the (i) button to view addional information.
Avoidance
Hazard
AUTOMATIC WAYPOINT SELECTION
Automatic waypoint selection is the system’s attempt to deduce what Waypoint
Additional
Features
to display based on the aircraft’s location in relation to the departure airport and/or
the waypoints in the Flight Plan.
The pilot can override Automatic Waypoint Selection by manually entering a way-
AFCS
point. The automatic selection will not resume until such time the manually entered
waypoint and the automatically selected waypoint coincide.
Annun/Alerts
NEAREST INFORMATION
The G3X Touch provides a NRST Key which gives the pilot quick access to nearest
Appendix
airport, weather, VOR, NDB, intersection, user waypoint, city, ARTCC, FSS, VRPs, and
airspace information. If none are available, “None Within 200 NM” is displayed. "No
Immediate Airspace" is displayed if airspace is not within 10 minutes based on current
speed, track, and altitude.
Index
GPS Navigation
Viewing nearest information:

Overview
System

3) Touch Airports, Airport Weather, VORs, NDBs, Intersections, User
Instruments
Flight
Waypoints, Cities, ARTCC, FSS, VRPs, or Airspace.

4) Touch the desired option from the list.
NEAREST AIRPORT CRITERIA

EIS
From the Menu on the Nearest Airports Page the pilot can define the minimum
runway length and surface type used when determining the 15 nearest airports to
Interface
CNS
display on the Nearest Airports Page. A minimum runway length and/or surface
type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are not
Navigation
appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters)
GPS
for runway length and “Any” for runway surface type. Private airports and Heliports
can also be included.
Planning
Flight
The Page Menu also allows the pilot to choose between displaying the facility names
and city names.
Avoidance
• Runway Surface: Allows the pilot to set criteria for the type of surface on the
Hazard
runway.
– Any: Shows any runway, regardless of surface type, including water landing facili-
Additional
Features
ties.
– Hard only: Shows only runways with a concrete, asphalt, or similar sealed surface.
– Hard or Soft: Shows all runways except water landing facilities.
AFCS
– Water only: Shows only water landing facilities.

• Minimum Runway Length: Allows the pilot to enter a specific length for the
Annun/Alerts
shortest runway allowed.

• Include Private Airports: Allows the pilot to include Private Airports in the
Appendix
search criteria.
Entering airport/heliport criteria:
Index
GPS Navigation
3) Touch the Runway Surface field and touch Hard only, Hard/Soft, Water
Overview
only, or Any.
System
Or:
Touch the Min Runway Length value and enter the value using the keypad.
Instruments
Flight
Or:
Touch Private Airports.
Or:
EIS
Touch Heliports.
Or:
Interface
CNS
Touch City Names: Displays city names below the airport identifier on the
Nearest APT Page.
Navigation
Or:
GPS
Touch Facility Names: Displays facility names below the airport identifier
on the Nearest APT Page.
Planning
Flight
WEATHER INFORMATION
Textual weather information can be viewed from the Waypoint Page.
Avoidance
Hazard
Selecting airport weather information:
From the Waypoint Page, touch the Weather Tab.
Additional
Features
Or:
From the Nearest Airport Weather Page, touch the desired airport and
touch the Weather Tab.
AFCS
INTERSECTIONS
Annun/Alerts
Intersections can be viewed from the Waypoint Page or the Nearest Intersections
Page. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected intersection and
surrounding area, the Intersection Information Page displays the region, bearing,
distance, latitude, and longitude.
Appendix
Selecting an intersection:
1) From the Waypoint (Wpt) Page.
Index
GPS Navigation

Overview
System
3) Enter the intersection using the keypad and touch Enter.

Or:
Instruments
Flight

3) Touch Intersections.
4) Touch the desired intersection from the list.
EIS
NDBS
Interface
CNS
NDBs can be viewed from the Waypoint Page or the Nearest NDBs Page. In addition
to displaying a map of the currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page
displays the region, bearing, distance, latitude, longitude, frequency, identifier, name,
Navigation
GPS
city, state, NDB type, and More Code identification.

The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find a NDB close to the flight path.
The list only includes NDBs that are within 200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text
Planning
Flight
indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If there are no nearest NDBs in
the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
Avoidance
Hazard
Selecting a NDB:
Additional
Features
3) Enter the NDB identifier using the keypad and touch Enter.
Or:
AFCS

Annun/Alerts
3) Touch NDBs.
4) Touch the desired NDB from the list.
Appendix
Index
GPS Navigation
VORS
Overview
System
VORs can be viewed from the Waypoint Page or the Nearest VORs Page. In addition
to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the page
Instruments
displays the region, city, state, bearing, distance, latitude, longitude, frequency, class
Flight
(High, Low, or Terminal VOR), facility name, and aircraft's current radial from the VOR.
The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR close to the flight path. The
list only includes VORs that are within 200nm. If there are no VORs in the list, "None
EIS
Within 200nm" is displayed.
Selecting a VOR:
Interface
CNS
Navigation
3) Enter the VOR identifier using the keypad and touch Enter.
GPS
Or:
Planning
Flight
3) Touch VORs.
Avoidance
Hazard
4) Touch the desired VOR from the list.
USER WAYPOINTS
Additional
Features
The G3X Touch can create and store up to 3,000 user-defined waypoints. Once a
waypoint has been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved.
AFCS
NOTE: Most terrain and obstacle warnings will be suppressed when the
aircraft is determined to be taking off or landing at an airport - including an
airport that's defined by a user waypoint (that has been saved as an airport
Annun/Alerts
symbol) instead of the navigation database.
Creating user waypoints:

Appendix
1) Touch anywhere on the map.

Or:
Index
GPS Navigation
1) Touch aircraft symbol on the map.

Overview
System
2) Touch the Latitude/Longitude Location Button.

3) Optionally, touch the Name field to enter the new waypoint name and
touch Enter.
Instruments
Flight
4) Touch the default symbol.

5) Touch the desired symbol.
6) If desired touch the Altitude value.
EIS
7) Enter the desired altitude and touch Enter.

8) If desired touch the Location value.
Interface
CNS
9) Touch the arrows to change the location and touch Enter.

Marking Current Location as a Waypoint:
Navigation
1) From the Info Page, touch the latitude and longitude.

GPS
Or:
1) From the Info Page, press the MENU Key, and touch Mark Waypoint.
Planning
Flight
2) Touch Yes on the confirmation dialog box.

3) Optionally touch the Name field to rename the waypoint.
Avoidance
4) Touch Back.
Hazard
Creating a proximity waypoint:

Additional
Features
2) Touch User Waypoints.

3) Touch the Proximity Tab.
4) Press the Menu Key.
AFCS
5) Touch New Proximity Waypoint.

a) Touch Use Identifier.
Annun/Alerts
b) Enter the desired identifier using the keypad.

Or:
a) Touch Use Map.
Appendix
b) Touch anywhere on the map. If the location does not correspond to a

waypoint, a user waypoint will be created at that location.
6) Touch Enter.
Index
GPS Navigation
Selecting and viewing nearest user waypoints:
Overview
System
3) Touch the desired user waypoint.
Instruments
Flight
Editing or renaming a user waypoint:
EIS
Interface
CNS
5) Touch Edit Waypoint.
6) Touch the desired field to edit.
Navigation
7) Make the necessary changes and touch Back.
GPS
Deleting user waypoints:
Planning
Flight
2) Touch User WPTs.
Avoidance
Hazard
5) Touch Delete Waypoint.
6) Touch Yes.
Additional
Features
IMPORTING/EXPORTING USER WAYPOINTS
G3X Touch supports importing/exporting user waypoints to/from a GPX file on
AFCS
the SD Card via the User Waypoints Page. However FPL files may also contain user
waypoints. Through the process of importing these files via the Flight Plan List Page,
any user waypoints in the imported flight plan are saved to the internal database and
Annun/Alerts
are displayed on the User Waypoints Page.

Importing user waypoints:
Appendix

Index
4) Touch Import.
5) Touch Yes.
GPS Navigation
Exporting user waypoints:

Overview
System

Instruments
Flight
4) Touch Export.
5) Touch Yes.
EIS
5.5 AIRSPACE
Interface
The Nearest Airspace Page and Airspace Alerts provide information about airspaces
CNS
and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them. The Nearest Airspace Page can
be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path.
Navigation
GPS
The Nearest Airspace Page displays the class of airspace, controlling agency, vertical
boundaries, and status.
Planning
Flight
Selecting and viewing nearest airspaces:

Avoidance
Hazard
3) Touch Airspace.
4) Touch the desired airspace.
Additional
Features
AIRSPACE ALERT MESSAGES

When an airspace alert appears, press the NRST Key to automatically show nearby
AFCS
airspace information on the Nearest Airspace Page. This information includes name,
time to entry (if applicable), and status.
Annun/Alerts
There are four types of status information:

• Ahead—Projected to enter the airspace within the next 10 minutes or less
• Near—Within two nautical miles of an airspace but not projected to enter it
Appendix
• Near & Ahead—Projected to enter the airspace within two nautical miles
• Inside Airspace—Within the boundaries of the airspace
Index
GPS Navigation
SMART AIRSPACE™ AND ALTITUDE OVERLAYS
Overview
System
Smart Airspace™ integration makes it easier for pilots to identify what airspace lies
ahead. This feature conveniently highlights the airspace nearest to the aircraft’s current
Instruments
altitude and de-emphasizes non-pertinent airspace so pilots can quickly distinguish
Flight
their location to the relevant airspace around them.
EIS
De-emphasized Bold Airspace
Airspace
Interface
CNS
Navigation
Smart Airspace™
GPS
Enabling/disabling Smart Airspace:
Planning
Flight
NOTE: Smart Airspace selection is not available if the Map Type is set to IFR
instead of VFR since IFR flights do not have the same operational concerns
with airspace.
Avoidance
Hazard
2) Touch Setup.
Additional
3) Touch Map. Features
AFCS
6) Touch and drag to display the 'Smart Airspace' field.

Annun/Alerts
8) Touch On or Off.
Additionally, airspace altitude overlays can be depicted on the moving map and
reduce pilot workload, particularly in congested airspace. With airspace altitude
Appendix
overlays, pilots can easily view airspace maximum and minimum altitudes, so it’s easier
to identify airspace altitude limitations at a glance.
Index
GPS Navigation
Overview
System
De-emphasized
Altitude Overlay
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
Altitude
CNS
Overlay
Smart Airspace™ with Altitude Overlays

Navigation
GPS
Enabling/disabling Altitude Overlays:

2) Touch Setup.
Planning
Flight
3) Touch Map.
Avoidance
Hazard

6) Touch and drag to display the 'Altitude Labels' field.
Additional
Features
8) Touch Off, Auto, 2nm, 3nm, 5nm, 8nm, 12nm, 20nm, 30nm, 50nm,
80nm, or 120nm.
AFCS
5.6 DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION USING THE G3X TOUCH

Annun/Alerts
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key is

quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such
as a nearby airport.
Appendix
Index
GPS Navigation
Once a direct-to is activated, the G3X Touch establishes a point-to-point course line
Overview
from the present position to the selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is
System
provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or flight plan, or canceled.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to
Instruments
Flight
destination:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active
flight plan waypoint as the default selection or a blank waypoint field if no
EIS
flight plan is active).
2) If an external navigator is configured, touch FPL Source > Internal from
the FPL Page.
Interface
CNS
3) Touch the waypoint identifier.
Navigation
Or:
GPS
facility name using the keypad and touch Enter.
Planning
Flight
Or:
Avoidance
Hazard
5) Touch Activate.
Entering latitude and longitude coordinates as a direct-to
Additional
destination: Features
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed

AFCS
3) Touch Enter Coordinates.

4) Specify coordinates, and touch Enter.
Annun/Alerts
5) Touch Activate.
Appendix
Index
GPS Navigation
Selecting Recent Waypoints, Nearest Airports, Flight Plan Way-

Overview
points, or User Waypoints as a direct-to destination:

System
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active
flight plan waypoint as the default selection or a blank waypoint field if no
Instruments
flight plan is active).

Flight

the FPL Page.
3) Touch the waypoint identifier.
EIS
4) Touch Find
5) Touch the Recent Tab.
Interface
CNS
Or:
Touch the Nearest Airports Tab. When properly configured, the Best
Navigation
Glide Airport is displayed above the Nearest Airport List.

GPS
Or:
Touch the Flight Plan Tab.
Planning
Flight
Or:
Touch the User Tab.
Avoidance
6) Touch the desired waypoint.

Hazard
7) Touch Activate.
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
Additional
Features
1) Touch anywhere on the map.

2) Press the Direct-to Key.
AFCS
the FPL Page.

4) Touch Activate.
Annun/Alerts
Canceling or resuming a direct-to:

Appendix

the FPL Page.
3) Touch Stop Navigation or Resume Flight.
Index
Flight Planning
SECTION 6 FLIGHT PLANNING
Overview
System
6.1 INTRODUCTION
Instruments
Flight
CAUTION: Only the final course segment (usually from the final approach
fix to the missed approach point) of the published approach is available if
an external navigator is NOT configured.
EIS
NOTE: In order to add, delete, or change flight plan waypoints from the G3X
Interface
CNS
Touch™ when an external GPS navigator is configured, touch FPL Source >
Internal from the Active Flight Plan Page or Direct-to Page. Press the FPL
Source > External to return to the external GPS navigator’s flight plan.
Navigation
GPS
NOTE: While navigating using an external GPS navigation source, the ability
to edit/invert/delete the Active Flight Plan or activate a Saved Flight Plan is
Planning
disabled.
Flight
NOTE: Refer to section 8.9 (Connext Cockpit Connectivity) for information on
Avoidance
Hazard
wirelessly transferring flight plans from a mobile device (using Garmin Pilot
or Garmin Portables) to the G3X Touch or external navigator (if configured).
Additional
Flight planning on the G3X Touch consists of building a flight plan by entering Features
waypoints one at a time and inserting approaches as needed. The flight plan is
displayed on maps using different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of
leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being flown.
AFCS
Up to 50 flight plans with up to 300 waypoints each can be created and stored in
memory. One flight plan can be activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan.
Annun/Alerts
The active flight plan is erased when the destination is reached and the system is turned
off. When storing flight plans with an approach, the G3X Touch uses the waypoint
information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is
Appendix
changed or updated, the G3X Touch automatically updates the information. If an

approach is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the affected stored flight
plan(s), and an alert is displayed.
Index
Flight Planning
Whenever an approach is loaded into the active flight plan it replaces the destination
Overview
airport with a sequence of waypoints for the selected approach. The airport must have
System
a published instrument approach and only the final course segment (usually from final
approach fix to missed approach point) of the published approach is available if an
Instruments
external navigator is not configured.

Flight
FLIGHT PLAN DATA FIELDS

EIS
Changing the information shown in the flight plan data fields:

1) With a flight plan displayed, touch FPL Source > Internal if an external
navigator is configured (Active Flight Plan only).
Interface
CNS
2) Touch one of the data fields to change.

3) Touch the desired data field.
Navigation
GPS
MANUALLY SWITCHING BETWEEN INTERNAL AND

EXTERNAL FLIGHT PLAN SOURCES
Planning
Flight
NOTE: The selection of the GPS navigation source to persist through power
cycles or reset to the external GPS navigation source is dependent on the
Avoidance
Hazard
configuration. Refer to the G3X Touch Installation Manual for more informa-
tion.
Additional
Features
NOTE: On a standalone MFD, touch 'GPS' in the lower left corner of the
Touch FPL Source > Internal on the Active Flight Plan Page or the Direct-to Page,
AFCS
to temporarily allow flight planning through the G3X Touch using the internal GPS
flight plan when an external GPS Navigator is configured. Press the FPL Source >
Annun/Alerts
External to return to the external GPS navigator’s flight plan.

Appendix
Index
Flight Planning
When manually selecting the internal GPS flight plan, ‘INT’ is displayed in cyan in the
Overview
lower left quadrant of the HSI.
System
Instruments
Flight
If the external GPS navigation source fails, the system reverts to the internal GPS
navigation source and ‘REV’ is shown in yellow in the lower left quadrant of the HSI.
EIS
6.2 FLIGHT PLAN CREATION USING THE G3X
TOUCH
Interface
CNS
The active flight plan is listed on the Active Flight Plan Page. It is the flight plan to
Navigation
which the G3X Touch is currently providing guidance, and is shown on the navigation
GPS
maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan List Page, and are available for
activation (becomes the active flight plan).
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Flight Planning
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Active Flight Plan Page

Additional
Features
Creating an active flight plan using the G3X Touch:

2) Touch Active FPL.
AFCS
3) If an external navigator is configured, touch FPL Source > Internal.

4) Touch Add Waypoint.
Annun/Alerts
5) Enter the waypoint using the keypad.

Or:
Touch Find > Recent Tab.
Appendix
Or:
Touch Find > Nearest Airports Tab.
Or:
Index
Touch Find > Flight Plan Tab.
Flight Planning
Or:
Overview
System
Touch Find > User Tab.
Or:
Instruments
Flight
facility name using the keypad.
Or:
EIS
the keypad.
6) Touch Enter.
Interface
7) Repeat steps 4-6 for each additional waypoint.
CNS
Creating a stored flight plan using the G3X Touch:
Navigation
GPS
2) Touch Flight Plan List.
3) Press MENU.
Planning
Flight
4) Touch New Flight Plan.
5) Touch Add Waypoint.
Avoidance
Hazard
Or:
Additional
Or: Features

Or:
AFCS

Or:
Annun/Alerts

Or:
Appendix

Or:
Index
Flight Planning
Overview
the keypad.
System
7) Touch Enter.
8) Repeat steps 4-6 for each additional waypoint.
Instruments
Flight
9) The new flight plan is now in the list.
6.3 AUTOMATIC SHARING OF G3X TOUCH FLIGHT

EIS
PLANS WITH EXTERNAL IFR NAVIGATORS

Interface
The G3X Touch system has the ability to share (crossfill) flight plans created/edited on
CNS
the G3X Touch (using internal flight planning) with compatible external IFR navigators.
The IFR navigator must be correctly configured and wired to perform this function. To
Navigation
access the internal flight plan on the G3X Touch, touch FPL Source > Internal from
GPS
the Active Flight Plan Page.

Once configured/wired correctly, when an internal flight plan is created using the
Planning
Flight
G3X Touch, that flight plan is automatically shared (crossfilled) to the external IFR
navigator.
Avoidance
Hazard
If the G3X Touch is using internal flight planning during a VFR flight, the IFR navigator
stays synchronized with any changes in the G3X Touch flight plan (this is useful if there
is a need to switch to the IFR navigator during flight).
Additional
Features
SIDs, STARs, and approaches cannot be loaded/activated from the G3X Touch
display. Alternatively, a multi-point flight plan may be created/edited by switching
to the external navigator. Touch FPL Source > External from the Active Flight Plan
AFCS
Page, to switch to the external IFR navigator, which does allow loading/activating an
approach if needed.
Annun/Alerts
NOTE: The G3X Touch system only crossfills multi-point flight plans with the
external IFR navigator when using internal flight planning on the G3X Touch.
Direct-To operations and single point flight plans are not crossfilled between
Appendix
the systems.
NOTE: Any Direct-To operation must be commanded on the external IFR

Index
navigator (G3X Touch or IFR navigator) being used.
Flight Planning
Overview
NOTE: Switch the G3X Touch system to external flight planning to use the
System
IFR navigator for normal flight planning (including enroute, SIDs, STARs, and
approaches).
Instruments
Flight
EXTERNAL IFR NAVIGATOR CROSSFILL CONFIGURATION
(GPS 175, GNC® 355, GNX 375™, AND GTN™ 6XX/7XX
(VERSION 6.62 AND NEWER ONLY))
EIS
Two configuration changes are required to enable the crossfill function:
Interface
In normal mode, External FPL Crossfill must be enabled on the System Setup
CNS
page.
Enable External
Navigation
Flight Plan Crossfill
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
External Flight Plan Crossfill Enabled (Normal Mode)
Additional
Features
In configuration mode, External FPL must be enabled on the Main System
configuration page.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Flight Planning
Enable External
Flight Plan
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
External Flight Plan Enabled (Configuration Mode)
Refer to the appropriate installation manual for instructions on entering configuration

Interface
CNS
mode.
Navigation
6.4 FLIGHT PLAN STORAGE USING THE G3X

GPS
TOUCH
Planning
Flight
The G3X Touch can store up to 50 flight plans. The active flight plan is erased when
another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be viewed
Avoidance
on the Flight Plan List Page

Hazard
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:

Additional
Features

3) Touch the desired flight plan.
4) Touch Edit.
AFCS
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) From the Active Flight Plan, touch FPL Source > Internal if an external
Annun/Alerts
navigator is configured.
3) Touch Save Copy.
Appendix
Index
Flight Planning
6.5 FLIGHT PLAN ACTIVATION USING THE G3X
Overview
System
TOUCH
Instruments
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with a copy
Flight
of the flight plan being activated. A saved approach will be moved to 'loaded' when
activating a flight plan.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order. Touching 'Invert' on a
EIS
saved flight plan will invert the flight plan in place without activating it. The original
flight plan is overwritten by the inverted flight plan. A flight plan cannot be inverted if
Interface
it has an associated approach.
CNS
Activating a stored flight plan:
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
4) Touch Activate.
5) Touch Yes.
Avoidance
Or:
Hazard
1) When editing a saved flight plan, press the MENU Key.
2) Touch Activate.
Additional
Features
3) Touch Yes.
Activating a Flight Plan Leg:
AFCS
2) Touch the waypoint leg to be activated.
Annun/Alerts
3) Touch Activate Leg.

4) Touch Yes.
Canceling an On Route Direct-To or Active Leg:
Appendix

2) Touch Resume Flight Plan.
Or:
Index
Flight Planning
1) Press the Direct-To Key.

Overview
System
2) Touch Resume Flight Plan.
6.6 FLIGHT PLAN EDITING

Instruments
Flight
ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN

EIS
Waypoints can be added to the active internal flight plan or any stored flight plan.
Choose the flight plan, select the desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and
it is added before or after the selected waypoint. Flight plans are limited to 300
Interface
CNS
waypoints (including approach waypoints).

Adding a waypoint to a flight plan:
Navigation
GPS

2) Touch the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint.
Planning
Flight
3) Touch Insert Before or Insert After.

Avoidance
Or:
Hazard

Or:
Additional
Features

Or:
AFCS
Or:
Annun/Alerts
Or:
Appendix
Or:
the keypad.
Index
5) Touch Enter.
Flight Planning
Adding a waypoint to a flight plan using the map:
Overview
System
2) Press Menu.
Instruments
Flight
3) Touch Edit on Map.
4) Touch the desired leg on the map. Leg will transition from cyan to white to
indicate that it is the selected leg.
EIS
5) With the flight plan leg selected, touch the waypoint to insert. If multiple
waypoints are available at the selected location, they are displayed in boxes
next to the selected location.
Interface
CNS
Note: If no waypoints exist at the location, the pilot will be promted to create a User
Waypoint.
Note: A leg can also be dragged and dropped onto the new location.
Navigation
GPS
Note: Without selecting a desired leg, touching a waypoint (empty location, etc.) will add
that waypoint to the end of the flight plan.
6) Touch Save.
Planning
Flight
Removing a waypoint from a flight plan:
Avoidance
Hazard
2) Touch waypoint to remove.
3) Touch Remove.
Additional
Features
EDITING FLIGHT PLAN SPEED, FUEL, AND/OR NAME
NOTE: If a fuel flow sensor is configured, the user-entered ‘Plan Fuel’ value
AFCS
is used while on the ground. In the air, the ‘Plan Fuel’ field is hidden and the
fuel calculations are based on the actual measured fuel flow.
Annun/Alerts
On the ground, regardless of fuel input, Plan Fuel and Plan Speed data fields are
used to source information for data fields (such as 'Leg ETE' or 'Fuel Reqd') to help the
pilot in flight planning. Without fuel input, the 'specified' fuel burn value and 'actual'
Appendix
speed are used for the Plan Fuel and Plan Speed data fields. With fuel input, the
'actual' fuel burn and speed are used to populate these data fields.
Index
Flight Planning
Adjusting the Active Flight Plan fuel:

Overview
System
2) Touch Plan Fuel.
Instruments
Flight
3) Enter the desired value using the keypad and touch Enter.
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Plan Fuel
Hazard
Adjusting the Saved Flight Plan speed and fuel:

Additional

Features

3) Touch the desired saved flight plan.
AFCS
4) Touch Edit.
5) Touch Plan Fuel.
Annun/Alerts
7) Touch Plan Spd.
Appendix
Editing the Saved Flight Plan Name:

2) Touch Flight Plan List
Index
Flight Planning
4) Touch Edit.
Overview
System
6) Touch the Name field.
7) Enter the desired name using the keypad and touch Enter.
Instruments
Flight
Or:
Touch the name field at the top of the window.
Enter the desired name using the keypad and touch Enter.
EIS
COPYING FLIGHT PLANS
Interface
CNS
The G3X Touch allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot,
allowing editing, etc., without affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to
duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating a modified version of the
Navigation
GPS
original stored flight plan.
Copying a stored flight plan:
Planning
Flight
3) Touch the desired saved flight plan to copy.
Avoidance
Hazard
4) Touch Copy.
DELETING FLIGHT PLANS

Additional
Features
Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the G3X Touch memory.
Deleting a stored flight plan:
AFCS

Annun/Alerts
3) Touch the desired saved flight plan to delete.

4) Touch Delete.
5) Touch Yes.
Appendix
Deleting all stored flight plans:

Index
Flight Planning

Overview
System
4) Touch Delete All.

5) Touch Yes.
Instruments
Flight
NOTE: The changes made to the active flight plan affect navigation as soon
as they are entered. Editing the active flight plan does not affect any saved
flight plans. Waypoints in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or
MAP) can not be deleted individually.
EIS
Deleting the Active Flight Plan:

Interface
CNS
Navigation
3) Touch Stop Navigation.

GPS
Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:

Planning
Flight
2) Touch the desired waypoint to delete.
Avoidance
3) Touch Remove.
Hazard
4) Touch Yes.
Deleting an individual waypoint from a saved flight plan:
Additional
Features

AFCS
4) Touch Edit.
5) Touch the desired waypoint to delete.
Annun/Alerts
6) Touch Remove.
7) Touch Yes.
Appendix
Index
Flight Planning
INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN
Overview
System
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original
departure point.
Instruments
Inverting the active flight plan:
Flight
EIS
3) Touch Invert.
4) Touch Yes.
Interface
CNS
Inverting a saved flight plan:
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
5) Touch Invert.
6) Touch Yes.
Avoidance
Hazard
IMPORTING/EXPORTING FLIGHT PLANS
Importing/exporting flight plans requires an SD card to be inserted in the unit.
Additional
Features
Importing flight plans:

AFCS

Annun/Alerts
4) Touch Import.
6) Acknowledge flight plan import success or failure by touching OK.
Appendix
Index
Flight Planning
Exporting flight plans:

Overview
System

Instruments
Flight
4) Touch Export.
5) Acknowledge flight plan export success/failure by touching OK.
EIS
SENDING FLIGHT PLANS TO A GNS/GTN

Any flight plan may be sent to a properly connected GNS/GTN device so that it can
Interface
track the same flight plan.

CNS
Sending flight plans:

Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
3) Touch Send to Navigator.
6.7 APPROACHES (WITHOUT EXTERNAL

Avoidance
Hazard
NAVIGATOR CONFIGURED)
Additional
Features
WARNING: Do not use the approach information provided by the VFR naviga-
tion database residing within the G3X Touch as a means of navigating any
AFCS
purposes only.
Annun/Alerts
NOTE: This section is not applicable if an external GPS navigator is configured.

Approach selection is handled via the external GPS navigator’s controls only.
Refer to the external GPS navigator’s Pilot’s Guide for more information.
Appendix
Index
Flight Planning
An approach can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides
Overview
situational awareness for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with
System
published instrument approach procedures. Only one approach can be loaded at a
time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach is already in the
Instruments
active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach.
Flight
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “Load Approach” or “Activate
Approach” is given. “Load Approach” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan
EIS
without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows continued navigation
via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure
available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activate
Interface
CNS
Approach” also adds the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately
begins to navigate to the first waypoint in the approach.
Navigation
SELECTING AN APPROACH
GPS
When selecting an approach, it replaces the destination airport with the sequence of
Planning
waypoints for the selected approach. Keep in mind the airport must have a published
Flight
approach (GPS, RNAV, VOR, NDB, localizer, or ILS) and only the final course segment
(final approach fix to missed approach point) of the published approach is available
Avoidance
(unless an external navigator is configured).
Hazard
An approach can be selected from the Saved Flight Plan Page, Active Flight Plan
Page, and Direct-to Window, Waypoint (WPT) Page.
Additional
Features
NOTE: The approach airport can be modified from the Select Approach
Window (Active Flight Plan Page > MENU > Approach). When this is done,
AFCS
the approach is added but the destination airport is not. When removing
an approach (any active or loaded approach to an airport other than the
destination airport), the destination airport will be inserted at the end of the
Annun/Alerts
flight plan.
Loading an approach from the saved flight plan page:

1) Press the MENU Key Twice.
Appendix

Index
4) Touch Edit.
Flight Planning

Overview
System
6) Touch Select Approach.

7) Touch to view a list of approaches.
8) Touch the desired approach.
Instruments
Flight

Loading/Activating an approach from the active flight plan page:
EIS

Interface
CNS

5) Touch Load Approach.
Navigation
Or:
GPS
Touch Activate Approach.

Viewing a chart for the selected approach:
Planning
Flight
From the Waypoint Page, touch the Charts Tab.

Activating an loaded approach on the Active Flight Plan Page:
Avoidance
Hazard
1) Touch any leg of the loaded approach.

2) Touch Activate Approach.
Additional
Loading/Activating an approach from the Direct-to Window:

Features

AFCS

4) If necessary, touch the identifier name.
Annun/Alerts
5) Enter the identifier and touch Enter.

Appendix
8) Touch Load Approach.

Index
Flight Planning
Or:
Overview
System
Touch Activate Approach.
Removing an approach from the Active Flight Plan:
Instruments
Flight
2) Touch Remove Approach.
ACTIVATING VECTORS-TO-FINAL
EIS
Activate Vectors-to-Final is used when being vectored to the final approach course
by Air Traffic Control (ATC).
Interface
CNS
The G3X Touch creates an extension of the final course, beyond the final approach
waypoint in the database (final approach fix [FAF]). On the Active Flight Plan Page, a
Vector to Final symbol appears beside the first approach waypoint.
Navigation
GPS
Vectors-
to-Final
Planning
Symbol
Flight
Vectors-to-Final
Avoidance
Hazard
Final Course
Additional
Extension Features
Vectors-to-Final
AFCS
The G3X Touch does not provide guidance to the inbound course. The course
Annun/Alerts
deviation needle on the graphic HSI remains off-center until established on the final
approach course. The map shows an extension of the final approach course using a
bold magenta line.
Appendix
Index
Flight Planning
If Activate Vectors-to-Final is not selected, the G3X Touch creates a straight-line

Overview
course directly to the first waypoint in the approach.

System
Loading the approach cancels the Direct-to and initiates a route to the FAF.
Instruments
Activating Vectors-to-Final (Active Approach):

Flight
1) With an approach 'active' in the Active Flight Plan, press the MENU key.
2) Touch Vectors.
EIS
Activating Vectors-to-Final (Loaded Approach):

1) With an approach 'loaded' in the Active Flight Plan, touch the MENU key.
Interface
2) Touch the desired approach button (Example: KMCI ILS 01L).

CNS
3) Touch Activate Vectors-to-Final.

Canceling Vectors-to-Final:
Navigation
GPS
1) With Vectors-to-Final activated, press the MENU Key.

2) Touch Cancel Vectors-to-Final. Verify the green indicator clears.
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
SECTION 7 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Overview
System
7.1 WEATHER INFORMATION
Instruments
Flight
The G3X Touch™ is capable of increasing in-flight situational awareness when
considering weather by displaying pertinent information in a variety of locations
throughout the system (e.g., Weather Page, Waypoint Information Page, Data Fields,
EIS
etc.). The G3X Touch system is capable of receiving weather information from a variety
of sources and seamlessly switching the displayed information for comparison.
Interface
CNS
WEATHER SOURCES
On installations that include the capability to receive both SiriusXM and FIS-B weather
Navigation
information, there are three options available for selection through the Main Menu or
GPS
Weather Page; AUTO, SXM (SiriusXM), and FIS-B. The default selection is ‘AUTO.’ With
AUTO selected, and a SiriusXM subscription, SiriusXM weather information is displayed.
Planning
If SiriusXM service is unavailable with AUTO selected, FIS-B weather information is
Flight
displayed, if available. If either SiriusXM or FIS-B source is selected, only the selected
source is used to display weather information and no automatic source-switching will
Avoidance
Hazard
occur. Data from the selected weather source will apply to all weather shown on the
Map Page, Waypoint Page, Weather Page, Nearest Page, and configurable data fields.
Switching Weather Sources:
Additional
Features
2) Touch Setup > Weather.
AFCS
3) Touch the Weather Data Source.

4) Touch Auto, SiriusXM, or FIS-B.
Annun/Alerts
Or
1) From the Weather Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Touch Data Source.
Appendix
3) Touch Auto, SiriusXM, or FIS-B.

Index
Hazard Avoidance
DATA LINK WEATHER (OPTIONAL)

Overview
System
NOTE: See the G3X Touch Installation Manual for Data Link Weather activa-
tion instructions.
Instruments
Flight
DATA LINK WEATHER ADVISORY

Each time the system powers-up, the pilot is prompted to acknowledge a Data link
EIS
weather advisory.
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Data link Weather Advisory

Avoidance
Hazard
Touch Continue.
USING DATA LINK WEATHER PRODUCTS

Additional
Features
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in,
near, or around areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within
AFCS
data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather condi-
tions.
Annun/Alerts
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to
determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link weather
product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing weather
Appendix
data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data
link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated weather
product age.
Index
Data Link Weather Products can be displayed on the Map Page and individually on the
Weather (Wx) Page.
Hazard Avoidance
FIS-B
Overview
System
The supported FIS-B radios are designed to receive, process, and output traffic (ADS-B
air-to-air, and TIS-B traffic information), and weather (Flight Information Service-Broadcast
Instruments
(FIS-B)) information to the G3X Touch system through an RS-232 serial connection or
Flight
Bluetooth connection. As a UAT receiver, the FIS-B radios can receive and, when connected
to the G3X Touch, display Flight Information Service-Broadcast (FIS-B) weather products as
well as traffic.
EIS
FIS-B is a subscription-free weather service that is broadcast by Ground Based Transceivers
(GBTs) over the 978 MHz UAT frequency band as part of the FAA’s Next Generation Air
Interface
Transportation System (NextGen). To receive FIS-B weather information, the radio must be
CNS
within range and line-of-sight of an operating GBT. Reception may be affected by altitude,
terrain, and other factors.
Navigation
GPS
FIS-B Expiration Time
FIS-B weather broadcasts are updated regularly and may take approximately
Planning
Flight
ten minutes to transmit all available weather data. Therefore, weather data is not
immediately available. No pilot action is required to receive FIS-B weather information.
Weather product status can be viewed on the dedicated Weather Page,or the Data Link
Avoidance
Hazard
Page from the Tools menu.
When a FIS-B weather product is active on a map, the age of the data is displayed
Additional
on the screen in the lower left corner. The age of the product is based on the time Features
difference between when the data was assembled on the ground and the current GPS
time. Weather products are broadcast at specific intervals (see broadcast interval in
the table below).
AFCS
If, for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within the Expiration Time
intervals (see table), the data is considered expired and is removed from the display.
Annun/Alerts
This ensures that only data that is consistent with FIS-B broadcast data is displayed.
If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age
displayed changes to yellow. The system displays dashes instead of a product age
Appendix
when a product has expired.

The table below shows the FIS-B weather expiration time and the broadcast interval.
The broadcast interval represents the interval at which FIS-B GBTs broadcast new
Index
signals that may or may not contain new weather data. It does not represent the rate
at which weather data is updated or new content is received.
Hazard Avoidance
Expiration Broadcast
Overview
System
FIS-B Products Time Update Interval Interval

(Minutes)
Instruments
NEXRAD Composite ~5 minutes precipitation mode

Flight
75 minutes 15
Reflectivity (CONUS) 10 minutes for clear air
NEXRAD Composite
75 minutes As Available 2.5
Reflectivity (Regional)
EIS
Cloud Tops Forecast 105 minutes 1 hour 15

Interface
CNS
Winds and
12 hours 12 hours 10
Temperatures Aloft
Navigation
Lightning 75 minutes 5 minutes 5

GPS
1 minute (where available), As

METAR 8 hours 5
Available otherwise
Planning
Flight
TAF 12 hours 8 hours 10

CWA (Center
Avoidance
2 hours As Necessary 10
Hazard
Weather Advisory)
G-AIRMET (Graphical
12 hours 6 hours 5
AIRMET)
Additional
Features
As Available, then at 15 minute

SIGMET 12 hours 5
intervals for 1 hour
PIREP 4 hours As Available 10
AFCS
NOTAM (D)/FDC
12 hours As Available 10
(Including TFRs)
Annun/Alerts
Turbulence Forecast 105 minutes 1 hour 15
Icing Forecast 105 minutes 1 hour 15

Appendix
Weather Product Timing

Index
Hazard Avoidance
Viewing Ground Station Status:
Overview
System
2) Touch Data Link.
Instruments
Flight
4) Touch Ground Stations.
SiriusXM
EIS
Before SiriusXM Weather can be used, the service must be activated. Service is
activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a Radio ID.
Interface
CNS
SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses the Radio ID to send an activation signal that allows
the G3X Touch to display weather data and/or entertainment programming.
Navigation
SXM Weather Information
GPS
• Radio ID—Eight-digit ID number used for activation.
• Service Level—SiriusXM Weather subscription plan purchased.
Planning
Flight
• Weather Products—List of weather features and age of weather data in
minutes.
Avoidance
Hazard
Accessing Data Link Weather information:
From the Weather (Wx) Page, press the MENU Key and touch More
Additional
Info.... Features
DATA LINK WEATHER SETUP

The setup menu for the Map Page controls the map range settings above which weather
AFCS
products are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the weather product
map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. For
Annun/Alerts
weather products such as Lightning, and Storm Cells, the weather product is displayed
when a map range “smaller” than the weather product map range setting is selected
(Cloud Tops works inversely). The menu also provides a means for enabling/disabling
Appendix
display of weather products on the Map Page.

Additional information about many of the weather products can be displayed by
touching the weather product on the Weather Page or the Map Page:
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Viewing Data Link Weather products on the Map Page:

Overview
System

2) Touch Weather.
3) Touch the desired weather product on the map.
Instruments
Flight
4) With the weather product selected, touch the Map Feature Button to
display additional information.
Viewing Data Link Weather products on the Weather (Wx) Page:
EIS
1) From the Wx Page, touch the desired weather product on the map.
2) With the weather product selected, touch the Map Feature Button to
Interface
CNS
display additional information.

Setting up and customizing weather data for the Map Page:
Navigation

GPS

3) Scroll the tabs left/right or up/down if necessary.
Planning
Flight
4) Touch the Weather Tab.

5) Touch to view a list of options (On, Off, Auto, range settings, etc.).
Avoidance
6) Touch the desired option for each weather product.

Hazard
Restoring default weather data for the Map Page:

Additional
Features

3) Touch the Weather Tab.
AFCS
5) Touch Restore Category Defaults.

Viewing legends for displayed weather products:
Annun/Alerts
1) From the Wx Page, press the MENU Key.

2) Touch Weather Legend.
Appendix
3) Touch to cycle through the weather products.

Or
Index
2) Touch More.
Hazard Avoidance
3) Touch Weather Legend.
Overview
System
4) Touch to cycle through the weather products.
Animating weather:
Instruments
1) From the Map Page or the Wx Page, press the MENU Key.
Flight
2) Touch Animate Weather.
WEATHER PRODUCTS
EIS
SiriusXM Weather
FIS-B Weather
Weather Product (products vary by
Interface
(Subscription-free)
CNS
subscription)
NEXRAD Radar (CONUS)
Base and Composite +
Navigation
GPS
Reflectivity
NEXRAD Radar (CONUS
+
low resolution)
Planning
Flight
NEXRAD Radar (Regional
+
high resolution)
Avoidance
Hazard
NEXRAD Radar (Canada) +
Cloud Tops +
Additional
Cloud Tops Forecast + Features
Surface Precipitation +
Surface Analysis +
Sea Surface Temperatures +
AFCS
Echo Tops +
Surface Pressure +
Annun/Alerts
Lightning + +
Storm Cells +
METAR (US) + +
Appendix
METAR (Canada) +
TAF (US) * + +
TAF (Canada) +
Index
CWA (Center Weather

+
Advisories)
Hazard Avoidance
SiriusXM Weather
FIS-B Weather
Overview
System
Weather Product (products vary by

(Subscription-free)
subscription)
AIRMET +
Instruments
Flight
G-AIRMETs (Graphical
+
AIRMETs)
SIGMET + +
PIREP + +
EIS
Winds Aloft + +
Temperatures Aloft + +
Interface
CNS
NOTAMs * +
Temporary Flight
+ +
Restrictions
Navigation
GPS
Freezing Level +
Turbulence Forecast + +
Icing Forecast + +
Planning
Flight
* Only available from the Waypoint Page
Supported Weather Products by Source

Avoidance
Hazard
NEXRAD Radar
Additional
NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar), is a network of multiple high-resolution Doppler

Features
radar sites that are operated by the National Weather Service (NWS). NEXRAD data
provides centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and
selected overseas locations. The maximum range of a single NEXRAD radar site is 250
AFCS
nm. In addition to a wide array of services, the NEXRAD network provides important
information about severe weather and air traffic safety.
Annun/Alerts
NEXRAD data is not real-time. The lapsed time between collection, processing, and
dissemination of NEXRAD images can be significant and may not reflect the current
radar synopsis. Due to the inherent delays and the relative age of the data, it should
Appendix
be used for long-range planning purposes only. Never use NEXRAD data or any radar
data to penetrate hazardous weather. Rather, use it in an early-warning capacity of
pre-departure and enroute evaluation.
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Composite data from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown. This
Overview
data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The
System
display of the information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level.
The display of radar coverage is always active when NEXRAD is selected. Areas
Instruments
Flight
where NEXRAD radar coverage is not currently available or is not being collected are
indicated in grayish-purple.
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
NEXRAD Weather Legend (SiriusXM) NEXRAD Weather Legend (FIS-B)
Avoidance
Hazard
No Radar
Additional
Coverage Features
NEXRAD No Radar Coverage

AFCS
NEXRAD Abnormalities
There are possible abnormalities regarding displayed NEXRAD images. Some, but
Annun/Alerts
not all, of those include:

• Ground clutter
Appendix
• Strobes and spurious radar data

• Sun strobes, when the radar antenna points directly at the sun
• Military aircraft deploy metallic dust (chaff) which can cause alterations in radar
Index
scans
Hazard Avoidance
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows

Overview
System
NEXRAD Limitations
Certain limitations exist regarding the NEXRAD radar displays. Some, but not all, are
Instruments
Flight
listed for the user’s awareness:

• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine
cloud layers or precipitation characteristics (hail vs. rain). For example, it is not
EIS
possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet hail, and rain.

• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An
Interface
individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges, and
CNS
has no information about storms directly over the site.

• Radar coverage only extends to 55°N.
Navigation
GPS
• Any precipitation displayed between 52°N and 55°N is unknown.

No Radar
Planning
Coverage Above
Flight
55°N
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
NEXRAD Radar Coverage Limitations
Reflectivity
AFCS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors
on the NEXRAD display directly correlate to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity
Annun/Alerts
as it relates to hazardous weather can be very complex. The role of radar is essentially
to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather reflect radar
better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of
Appendix
the weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while
dry hail does not. Both wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
Index
Hazard Avoidance
NEXRAD Intensity
Overview
System
Colors are used to identify the different NEXRAD echo intensities (reflectivity)
measured in dBZ (decibels of Z). “Reflectivity” (designated by the letter Z) is the
amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. The dBZ values increase
Instruments
Flight
as returned signal strength increases. Precipitation intensity is displayed using colors
corresponding to the dBZ values.
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
NEXRAD Data (SiriusXM) NEXRAD Data (FIS-B)
FIS-B Radar Products

Additional
Features
FIS-B weather provides two different Radar products, CONUS and Regional. The
system can display each individually or a composite (COMBINED). When Regional
AFCS
Radar is displayed, only precipitation for your current region is displayed. The subdued
(grayish-purple colored) area represents the area not covered by the regional radar
product. When Combined radar data is viewed, Regional Radar data is displayed on
Annun/Alerts
top of CONUS data and the time shown in the lower left corner is associated with
Regional Radar data only.
Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Cloud Tops
Overview
System
Satellite observation of clouds is represented as temperature data, where colder tops

are typically found at higher altitudes. This temperature data is transformed into cloud
Instruments
top height contours, indicating the height of the cloud top in 5,000 foot increments.
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Cloud Tops Data

Avoidance
Hazard
Cloud Tops Forecast

Cloud Tops Forecast data displays forecasted cloud top heights. Heights are
Additional
indicated in 1,500 foot increments from 1,500 feet up to 15,000 feet and in 3,000
Features
foot increments from 15,000 feet up to 24,000 feet.

AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Cloud Tops Forecast Data

Hazard Avoidance
Echo Tops
Overview
System
Echo Tops are derived from NEXRAD radar and indicate the highest altitude at which
precipitation is falling. Echo Tops at or above the altitude you select are displayed, in
Instruments
5,000 foot increments up to 70,000 ft. Echo Tops can be helpful in determining the
Flight
severity of thunderstorms.
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Echo Tops Data
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Winds Aloft
Overview
System
Winds Aloft data shows the forecasted wind speed and direction at the surface
and at selected altitudes. Altitudes can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments up to
42,000 feet MSL.
Instruments
Flight
Winds Aloft are displayed using wind barbs or a wind streamline depending on
the selected range. The wind barbs indicate wind speed and direction. The wind
streamline indicates wind direction with arrows.
EIS
The wind barbs always point in the direction the wind is coming from. The wind
speed is depicted using flags at the end of the wind barb. A short wind flag is 5 knots,
Interface
CNS
a long wind flag is 10 knots, and a triangle flag is 50 knots.

Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
Winds Aloft Data

AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Winds Aloft Legend
Interface
When winds aloft data is zoomed out, the wind barbs are displayed as general wind
CNS
trend lines. This removes the magnitude of the wind speed, but shows general trends.
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Wind Lines
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Surface Pressure
Overview
System
This feature displays pressure isobars and pressure centers. The isobars connect
points of equal pressure. Pressure readings can help determine weather and wind
Instruments
conditions. High pressure areas are generally associated with fair weather. Low
Flight
pressure areas are generally associated with clouds and the chance of precipitation.
Isobars that are packed closely together show a strong pressure gradient. Strong
gradients are associated with areas of stronger winds. Pressure units can be displayed
EIS
in Millibars (mb) or Inches of Mercury (in).

Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Surface Pressure Data
Lightning
Additional
Features
Lightning data shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes.

A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region and
within the last seven minutes. The exact location of the lightning strike is not displayed.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Lightning Data
Hazard Avoidance
Storm Cells
Overview
System
The Storm Cells feature displays storms as well as the storm’s projected path in the
immediate future.
Instruments
The direction of the storm is displays by an arrow (at a range of 20 nm or less).
Flight
The tip of the arrow indicates where the storm should be in 15 minutes. Critical
information about the storm cell (tops and intensity) can be viewed by touching the
storm cell.
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Storm Cell Data
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
METARs and TAFs

Overview
System
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation

database service area.
Instruments
Flight
METAR (METeorological Aerodrome Report) is an international code used for

reporting weather observations. METARs are updated hourly or as needed. METARs
typically contain information about the temperature, dewpoint, wind, precipitation,
EIS
cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. They can also contain
information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical data. If METAR data
Interface
is available for an airport, a color-coded flag is shown next to the airport.

CNS
TAF (Terminal Area Forecast) is the standard format for 24-hour weather forecasts.
TAFs may contain some of the same code as METAR data. It typically forecasts
Navigation
GPS
significant weather changes, temporary changes, probable changes, and expected

changes in weather conditions. TAF information is only available from the Waypoint
Page.
Planning
Flight
METAR data is displayed on the Map Page and the Weather (WX) Page. An
abbreviated version can be viewed by touching the METAR flag. Touching the identifier
Avoidance
name displays additional information.

Hazard
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text.
Additional
Features
VFR (ceiling greater than 3000 feet AGL and visibility greater than 5
miles)
Marginal VFR (ceiling 1000-3000 feet AGL and/or visibility 3-5 miles)
AFCS
IFR (ceiling 500 to below 1000 feet AGL and/or visibility 1 mile to less
Annun/Alerts
than 3 miles)
Low IFR (ceiling below 500 feet AGL or visibility less than 1 mile)
Appendix
METAR text does not contain adequate information to determine

flight conditions
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
METAR Data
GPS
Center Weather Advisories (CWAs)
Planning
Center Weather Advisories are unscheduled bulletins to warn pilots of conditions
Flight
that meet or are approaching not previously forecast AIRMET, SIGMET, or Convective
SIGMET criteria. CWAs are valid for up to two hours and if a forecaster determines it's
Avoidance
warranted, they may be issued hourly for convective activity.
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Center Weather Advisory Data

Index
Hazard Avoidance
AIRMETS
Overview
System
An AIRMET (AIRmen’s METeorological Information) can be especially helpful for

pilots of light aircraft that have limited flight capability or instrumentation. An AIRMET
Instruments
must affect or be forecast to affect an area of at least 3,000 square miles at any one
Flight
time. AIRMETs are routinely issued for six-hour periods and are amended as necessary
due to changing weather conditions. AIRMETs are displayed as colored, dashed lines.
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
AIRMET Data
Graphical AIRMETs
Additional
Features
NOTE: Graphical AIRMETs are only available when using the FIS-B weather
source.
AFCS
A Graphical AIRMET (AIRmen’s METeorological Information) can be especially

helpful for pilots of light aircraft that have limited flight capability or instrumentation.
Annun/Alerts
A Graphical AIRMET must affect or be forecast to affect an area of at least 3,000

square miles at any one time. Graphical AIRMETs are routinely issued for six-hour
periods and are amended as necessary due to changing weather conditions. Graphical
Appendix
AIRMETs are displayed as colored, dashed lines.

Index
Hazard Avoidance
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
Graphical AIRMET Data
GPS
SIGMETs
Planning
A SIGMET (SIGnificant METeorological Information) advises of weather that is
Flight
potentially hazardous to all aircraft. In the contiguous United States, the following
items are covered: severe icing, severe or extreme turbulence, volcanic ash, dust storms,
Avoidance
Hazard
and sandstorms that lower visibility to less than three statute miles.
A Convective SIGMET is issued for the following conditions: thunderstorms, isolated
severe thunderstorms, embedded thunderstorms, hail at the surface, and tornadoes.
Additional
Features
A SIGMET is widespread and must affect or be forecast to affect an area of at least

3,000 square miles. SIGMETs are displayed as a yellow-dashed line.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFR)

Overview
System
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight
Restriction (TFR) information. Always confirm TFR information through official
Instruments
sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.

Flight
Temporary Flight Restrictions, or TFRs, temporarily restrict all aircraft from entering
the selected airspace unless a waiver has been issued. TFRs are routinely issued for
EIS
activities such as sporting events, dignitary visits, military depots, and forest fires. TFRs
are represented as an area highlighted by red (active) or yellow (not yet active).
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
TFR Data
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
PIREPs
Overview
System
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information for a particular
route of flight. When significant weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic
Instruments
Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs. A PIREP may contain unforecast
Flight
adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear,
and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
PIREP Data
Additional
PIREP TYPE Icons Description Features
Negligible Icing
Trace Icing
AFCS
Trace to Light Icing

Annun/Alerts
Light Icing
Icing
Light to Moderate Icing
Moderate Icing
Appendix
Moderate to Severe Icing

Severe Icing
Index
Hazard Avoidance
PIREP TYPE Icons Description

Overview
System
Unknown Sky Condition

Sky Clear
Instruments
Flight
Few Clouds
Sky Conditions Scattered Clouds
EIS
Broken Clouds
Overcast
Interface
CNS
IMC
Turbulence Negligible or Smooth
Navigation
GPS
Light Turbulence
Light to Moderate Turbulence
Planning
Flight
Turbulence Moderate Turbulence

Moderate to Severe Turbulence
Avoidance
Hazard
Severe Turbulence
Extreme Turbulence
Additional
Features
PIREP Icons
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Freezing Levels
Overview
System
Freezing Level shows contours for the lowest forecast altitude where icing conditions
are likely to occur.
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Freezing Level Data
Turbulence Forecast
Avoidance
Hazard
Turbulence data identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude air
mass associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe, or extreme.
Additional
Turbulence data is intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs. Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Turbulence Data
Hazard Avoidance
Icing Forecast (CIP & SLD)

Overview
System
Current Icing Product (CIP) data shows a graphical view of the current icing
environment. SiriusXM icing severity is displayed in three categories: light, moderate,
Instruments
and heavy (not specific to aircraft type). FIS-B icing severity is displayed in four
Flight
categories: trace, light, moderate, and heavy (not specific to aircraft type). The CIP
product is not a forecast, but a representation of the current conditions at the time of
the analysis.
EIS
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence
of relatively large, super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and
Interface
freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
Icing Data
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Lightning Detector
Overview
System
WARNING: Do not rely on information from the lightning detection system
display as the sole basis for hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations
Instruments
and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate or incomplete
Flight
information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system
manufacturer for detailed information about the system.
EIS
NOTE: Lightning detector data cannot be displayed simultaneously with data
link lightning weather products on the same map.
Interface
CNS
Lightning Detector data provides lightning cell and strike information on the PFD
inset map (GDU™ 460 only) and navigation map using the lightning symbology.
Lightning strike symbols appear the same size for the first minute and gradually fade
Navigation
GPS
away over the following two minutes.
The Lightning Detector operates in either Cell Mode or Strike Mode. When operating
Planning
in Cell Mode, the system displays clusters or cells of electrical activity. When operating
Flight
in Strike Mode, the system displays the approximate location of individual lightning
strikes.
Avoidance
Hazard
NOTE: Lightning Detection settings made on the Map Page are similarly
reflected for the PFD inset map (GDU 460 only) if enabled.
Additional
Features
Enabling/disabling Lightning Detection:
1) From the Map Page press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) Scroll the tabs left or right if necessary.

4) Touch the Lightning Tab.
Annun/Alerts
5) Touch under Lightning Detector Data On or Off as desired.

Or
Appendix
2) Touch Lightning Detector to toggle on or off as desired.

Index
Hazard Avoidance
Selecting a Lightning Detection mode:

Overview
System

Instruments
Flight

5) Touch under Lightning Detector Mode and select Strike or Cell as
desired.
EIS
Selecting a Lightning Detection map range:

Interface
CNS

Navigation

GPS
5) Touch under Lightning Detector Symbol and select a desired map range
setting from the list.
Planning
Flight
Clearing the Navigation Map removes any previously displayed cell or lightning
strike information from the navigation maps.
Avoidance
Clearing Lightning Detection information from Navigation Map:

Hazard

Additional
Features

5) Touch Clear Strikes.
AFCS
Surface Analysis
Annun/Alerts
Surface Analysis data is available for current and forecast weather conditions.
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, 48, 72, and 96 hours.
Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
Surface Analysis Data Selected
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
Surface Analysis Legend
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
7.2 TERRAIN
Overview
System
WARNING: Do not use Terrain information for primary terrain avoidance.

Terrain information is intended only to enhance situational awareness.
Instruments
Flight
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside the installed
terrain database coverage area.
EIS
NOTE: Terrain depicted in the Profile View is always “ahead” of the aircraft,
and will change as ground track changes.
Interface
CNS
The Terrain Page displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft
position and altitude with reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies.
Navigation
GPS
Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the database. Terrain and
obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should
never be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
Planning
Flight
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database.
No terrain and obstacle information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
Avoidance
Hazard
The G3X Touch GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude of the
aircraft. Aircraft GPS altitude is derived from satellite position. GPS altitude is then
converted to a mean sea level (MSL)-based altitude (GPS-MSL altitude) and is used to
Additional
Features
determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is affected by

satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that
normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GPS-MSL altitude does not require local
AFCS
altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.

Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position
Annun/Alerts
and altitude, the Terrain feature portrays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and
obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the aircraft. GPS position and GPS-
MSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the
Appendix
surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous
terrain and obstacle conditions.
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Alert windows appear on all pages (except the Terrain (Ter) Page) to inform the pilot
Overview
of proximity to the terrain and obstacles, as well as an unsafe descent rate. These
System
alerts depend on user-defined parameters in the Terrain Page setup.
Instruments
SYNTHETIC VISION
Flight
Terrain is integrated within Synthetic Vision (when active) to provide land contours
(colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display), large water
EIS
features, towers, obstacles over 200’ AGL, as well as visual and auditory alerts to
indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the projected flight
path. Synthetic Vision terrain information is displayed in red and yellow shading on the
Interface
CNS
PFD. Refer to Section 8.1 (Synthetic Vision) for more information.
TERRAIN INFORMATION
Navigation
GPS
The areas of the terrain shaded red are predicted to be within 100 feet below or
above the aircraft. The yellow terrain areas are between the user-defined Caution
Planning
Elevation and 100 feet below the aircraft. By default, the Caution Elevation is 1,000
Flight
feet; therefore, the areas in yellow are between 1,000 feet and 100 feet below the
aircraft. The black areas are further than the Caution Elevation. A projected point of
Avoidance
impact is marked with an “X” symbol.
Hazard
Enabling/disabling Terrain Shading on the Map Page:
From the Map Page, press MENU, then touch Terrain.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
TERRAIN VIEWS
Overview
System
Two views are displayed on the Terrain (Ter) Page: the Map View, and the Profile
View.
Instruments
Flight
Yellow Terrain is Obstacle

Between the User-
defined Caution
Elevation and Red Terrain is above
100 ft Below the the aircraft, or
EIS
Aircraft within 100 ft below

the aircraft.
Map View
Interface
CNS
Terrain Legend
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Profile View
Avoidance
Hazard
Terrain (Ter) Page

Additional
Features
NOTE: When on the ground, the terrain color scale changes so no yellow
AFCS
is shown, and the red band starts at 400 feet above the aircraft. This
allows the pilot to quickly identify threatening terrain while on the
ground. After the aircraft is airborne, the terrain display reverts to
Annun/Alerts
normal.
Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
OBSTACLE INFORMATION
Overview
System
Obstacles are shown on the Terrain Page at or below the map range of 12 nm.
Obstacles are also shown on the Map Page when the map range is set to 3 nm or
below.
Instruments
Flight
Standard aeronautical chart symbols are used for lighted or unlighted obstacles
taller than 200 feet Above Ground Level (AGL). Refer to the Obstacle Icons legend
below.
EIS
Each obstacle is labeled with the altitude of the top of the obstacle, or Mean Sea
Level (MSL). Each obstacle also lists, in parentheses, the actual height of the obstacle,
Interface
CNS
or Above Ground Level (AGL).
Unlighted Lighted Obstacle
Navigation
Potential
GPS
Obstacle
Impact Obstacle Location
< 1000’ > 1000’ < 1000’ > 1000’ Points
AGL AGL AGL AGL
Planning
Flight
WARNING: Red
obstacle is above or
within 100’ below
Avoidance
Hazard
current aircraft altitude
CAUTION: Yellow
obstacle is between
Additional
Features
100’ and 1000’
(default) below current
aircraft altitude
AFCS
Terrain Obstacle Colors and Symbology

Annun/Alerts
TERRAIN SETTINGS
Appendix
Use the terrain settings to set levels for terrain alerts as well as obstacles in or
near your flight path.
• Caution Elevation—The G3X Touch will provide an alert if the terrain or obstacle
Index
is within the default Caution Elevation or user-defined Caution Elevation.
Hazard Avoidance
• Look Ahead Time—Determines the maximum time when an alert annunciation

Overview
System
occurs. For example, if 120 seconds is selected, the G3X Touch provides an alert
up to 120 seconds before you reach the terrain or obstacle.
• Alert Sensitivity—The three Alert Sensitivity settings (Terrain, Obstacles, and
Instruments
Flight
Descent Rate) determine what level of alerts are annunciated. The G3X Touch
defaults to ‘High’ sensitivity, which annunciates all red and yellow alerts at the
time set in Look Ahead Time. ‘Medium’ sensitivity annunciates all of the red
EIS
and the highest priority of yellow alerts. ‘Low’ only annunciates red alerts. ‘Off’
disables the alert.
Interface
Accessing the terrain settings:

CNS
1) From the Terrain Page, press the MENU Key.

2) Touch Caution Elevation and touch 500ft Below, 750ft Below, or
Navigation
GPS
1000ft Below.
Or:
Touch Look Ahead Time and touch 60 Seconds, 90 Seconds, or 120
Planning
Flight
Seconds.
Or:
Avoidance
Touch Alert Sensitivity... > Terrain, Obstacles, or Descent Rate >

Hazard
Off, Low, Medium, or High.

Or:
Additional
Features
Touch Alerts to toggle between Enabled and Inhibited.

Or:
Touch Profile View to toggle on and off.
AFCS
TERRAIN ALERTS
Annun/Alerts
Terrain, Obstacle, and Descent Rate Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet
parameters that are set within the software algorithms. Terrain alerts typically employ
a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert is issued, visual
Appendix
annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued. When the
aircraft descends through 500 feet above the destination airport or user waypoint
(saved as an airport symbol) an audible “Five Hundred” altitude reminder occurs.
Index
Hazard Avoidance
If the Terrain Page is not displayed, a pop-up alert appears in the lower left corner of
Overview
System
the page. The Range Rings on the pop-up alert are spaced every whole mile/kilometer/
nautical mile. Touch the alert to acknowledge the pop-up and/or aural alert.
Terrain and obstacle annunciations appear on the PFD in the upper left corner of the
Instruments
Flight
Attitude Indicator. Arrows are depicted on the terrain and obstacle annunciations if
terrain is outside the Synthetic Vision field of view.
Arrows indicate the terrain is
EIS
outside the Synthetic Vision
field of view.
Interface
CNS
Terrain Annunciation on PFD
Navigation
GPS
Enabling/disabling terrain alerts:
1) From the Terrain Page, press the MENU Key.
Planning
Flight
2) Touch Alerts to toggle between Enabled and Inhibited.
AURAL ALERTS
Avoidance
Hazard
• “Five Hundred”—when the aircraft descends through 500 feet above the destina-
tion airport or user waypoint (saved as an airport symbol).
Additional
Features
The following aural terrain alerts are issued when flight conditions meet
parameters that are set within the software algorithms, and are dependent on
the sensitivity level set in the Terrain Setup Menu.
AFCS
Alert Severity Terrain Obstacle Descent Rate

Annun/Alerts
“caution, terrain” “caution, obstacle”

“caution, sink
Caution “caution, terrain “caution, obstacle
rate”
ahead” ahead”
Appendix
“terrain ahead! pull “obstacle ahead! pull

“sink rate, pull
up!” up!”
Warning up!”
“terrain! terrain! pull “obstacle! obstacle!
“pull up!”
Index
up! pull up!” pull up! pull up!”
Aural Alerts Summary

Hazard Avoidance
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
PFD Terrain Alert

Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Pop-up Alert
Planning
Flight
MFD Terrain Alerts

Avoidance
7.3 TRAFFIC SYSTEMS

Hazard
TRAFFIC SOURCE
Additional
Features
The G3X Touch is compatible with three different traffic sources; TIS-A traffic via
a Garmin Mode S Transponder, TAS/TCAS I via a GTS 8XX, or ADS-B/TIS-B traffic via
AFCS
a compatible ADS-B device. When the G3X Touch system is configured with both a
Mode S transponder capable of receiving TIS-A traffic and a compatible device capable
of receiving ADS-B/TIS-B traffic the G3X Touch will automatically switch between
Annun/Alerts
traffic sources. The following conditions describe the traffic display logic.
• If the GTX is not receiving TIS-A traffic data, GDL® ADS-B traffic will be displayed.
Appendix
• If the GDL is receiving both air-to-air ADS-B traffic data and ground uplink TIS-B
traffic, then the GDL ADS-B traffic will be displayed.
Index
Hazard Avoidance
• If the GTX is receiving TIS-A traffic, and the GDL is not receiving ground uplink
Overview
TIS-B traffic, then GTX TIS-A traffic will be displayed.
System
The current traffic source and altitude filter is annunciated in the upper left hand
corner of the Traffic Page (TRF).
Instruments
Flight
Traffic Source Name
ADS-B Status
TAS/TCAS Status
EIS
Altitude Filter
Traffic Source Annunciations
Interface
CNS
Traffic Source* States Description
FAIL Failed
Navigation
STBY Standby
GPS
ADS:
UNAVL Unavailable
TAS/TCAS**:
TEST Self-Test
Planning
Flight
OPER Operating
*ADS and TAS/TCAS are dynamically displayed depending on wether the active traffic device is capable
of reporting a state for it.
Avoidance
Hazard
**The TCAS prefix will always be displayed, except in the case where the traffic device can be
specifically identified as a TAS model.
Traffic Source (ADS, TAS/TCAS) States
Additional
Features
Altitude Filtering Mode Description

UNR Unrestricted
AFCS
NORM Normal
ALT:
ABV Above
Annun/Alerts
BLW Below
Altitude Filtering Modes

Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
TRAFFIC PRIORITIZATION
Overview
System
The G3X Touch supports multiple traffic receivers and automatically prioritizes these
devices.
Instruments
The following are the traffic receivers in order of priority:

Flight
- TAS/TCAS I (e.g., GTS or non-Garmin) configured with a GTX 345/345R/45R device.

- GTS 8XX device
EIS
- GTX 345/345R, GNX™ 375 devices

- GDL device receiving both air-to-air and TIS-B
Interface
CNS
- GTX 330ES device receiving TIS-A

- GDL device receiving only air-to-air
Navigation
GPS
The G3X Touch is capable of device switching in the event that a device becomes
unavailable.
Planning
Flight
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS-A) (OPTIONAL)

Avoidance
NOTE: Refer to Appendix E for general information regarding Traffic Informa-

Hazard
tion Service (TIS-A).
SYSTEM STATUS
Additional
Features
The traffic system status is annunciated in the upper right corner of the Map Page.
AFCS
System Status Traffic Icon
Operating
Annun/Alerts
No Traffic Data Available

Appendix
If a Traffic Icon is not displayed, check the Map Page range and/or
the Traffic Display Range on the Map Set Up menu.
Traffic Modes
Index
Hazard Avoidance
TRAFFIC SYMBOLOGY
Overview
System
Traffic is shown on the G3X Touch according to TCAS symbology, graphically shown
on the Traffic Page (Optional), Map Page, in the Traffic Warning Window, and Synthetic
Instruments
Vision.
Flight
A Proximity Advisory (PA) indicates the intruding aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is
within a 5 nm range, but is still not considered a threat.
EIS
A Traffic Advisory (TA) symbol appears as a solid yellow circle. All other traffic within
range is shown as a hollow white diamond. Altitude deviation from own aircraft
altitude is shown above the target symbol if traffic is above own aircraft altitude, and
Interface
CNS
below the symbol if they are below own aircraft altitude. Altitude trend is shown as an
up arrow (>+500 ft/min), down arrow (<-500 ft/min), or no symbol if less than 500 ft/
min rate in either direction.
Navigation
GPS
TIS-A Symbol Description
Planning
Flight
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Avoidance
Hazard
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Additional
Features
Traffic Symbols
AFCS
TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATIONS
Annun/Alerts
The G3X Touch displays traffic symbolically on the Map Page, and the Traffic Warning
Window (Inset Map) in the lower left corner of the GDU 460 MFD display.
When a traffic advisory (TA) is detected, the following automatically occur:
Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
• The Traffic Warning Window (Inset Map) is enabled and displays traffic (GDU 460
Overview
System
Only).
• A flashing black-on-yellow ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation will appear in the upper right
corner of the Attitude Indicator for five seconds and remains displayed until no TAs
Instruments
Flight
are detected in the area.

• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Traffic Alerts
Arrows are depicted on the traffic message if traffic is outside the Synthetic Vision
Avoidance
Hazard
field of view. The arrow points in the direction of the traffic.

Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Traffic Outside the Synthetic Vision

Field of View (PFD)
Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Traffic Voice Alerts
Overview
System
A traffic voice alert is generated whenever the number of Traffic Advisories on the
G3X Touch screen increases from one scan to the next. Limiting Traffic Advisories only
Instruments
reduces the “nuisance” alerting due to proximate aircraft. For example, when the first
Flight
Traffic Advisories appear on the TIS-A display, the user is alerted audibly. So long as
a single aircraft remains on the traffic display, no further voice alert is generated. If a
second (or more) aircraft appears on the screen, a new voice alert is sounded.
EIS
If the number of Traffic Advisories on the traffic display decreases and then increases,
a new voice alert is sounded. The traffic voice alert is also generated whenever traffic
Interface
becomes available. The following traffic voice alerts are available:
CNS
• “Traffic”— Traffic alert received.
Navigation
• “Traffic Not Available”—Traffic service is not available or out of range.
GPS
Enabling/disabling traffic alerts:
Planning
Flight
2) Touch Traffic.
Avoidance
Hazard
Traffic Warning Window

Additional
Features
When a traffic threat is imminent, the Traffic Warning Window is shown. The Traffic
Warning Window shows a small pop-up map in the lower left corner. The Range Rings
on the pop-up alert are spaced every whole mile/kilometer/nautical mile.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
Traffic
Warning
Window
EIS

Interface
CNS
NOTE: The Traffic Warning Window is disabled when the aircraft ground speed
is less than 30 knots or when on the approach leg of a route.
Navigation
GPS
TRAFFIC GROUND TRACK

Traffic ground track is indicated on the G3X Touch screen by a “target track vector,”
Planning
Flight
a short line shown in 45-degree increments, extending in the direction of target

movement.
Avoidance
Hazard
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA

Traffic is displayed by default on the Map Page and the Traffic Warning Window.
Additional
Features
Traffic information is also displayed on the PFD when Synthetic Vision is enabled.
See the ‘Additional Features’ Section for more information.
Displaying Traffic information:
AFCS
Touch the traffic on the map to display range and altitude separation
information.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Traffic Range
and Altitude
Overview
System
Separation
Traffic
Instruments
Ground
Flight
Track
EIS
Traffic (Map Page)
Interface
CNS
Enabling/disabling traffic data on the Map Page:
Navigation
2) Touch Traffic.
GPS
Enabling/disabling traffic on the Synthetic Vision display:
1) Touch the HSI or Attitude Indicator.
Planning
Flight
3) Touch and drag to scroll down.
Avoidance
Hazard
4) Touch Traffic to deselect it.
DEDICATED TRAFFIC PAGE (TRF)

Additional
Features
Enabling/disabling the traffic alerts:
NOTE: Traffic alerts are reset to ‘enabled’ on the next power cycle.
AFCS
1) From the Traffic (Trf) Page, press the MENU Key.

2) Touch Alerts to toggle between Inhibit and Enable.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Traffic Page
Planning
Flight
GARMIN GTS 8XX TRAFFIC (OPTIONAL)

Avoidance
Hazard
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for traf-
fic avoidance maneuvering. The GTS 8XX Traffic Advisory System (TAS) and
Traffic Collision Avoidance System (TCAS I) is intended for advisory use only
Additional
Features
to aid the pilot in visually acquiring traffic. No avoidance maneuvers should

be based solely upon TAS/TCAS I traffic information. It is the responsibility
of the pilot in command to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
AFCS
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of TAS/TCAS I system limitations. TAS/TCAS 1

systems require transponders of other aircraft to respond to system interroga-
Annun/Alerts
tions. If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due to phenomena

such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may
be displayed intermittently, or not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting
capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent indi-
Appendix
cation. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
NOTE: TIS-A is disabled when TAS/TCAS I installed.

Index
Hazard Avoidance
The optional Garmin GTS 8XX is a Traffic Advisory System (TAS) and Traffic Collision
Overview
Avoidance System (TCAS I). It enhances flight crew situational awareness by displaying
System
traffic information for transponder-equipped aircraft. The system also provides visual
and aural traffic alerts including voice announcements to assist in visually acquiring
Instruments
traffic.
Flight
The GTS 8XX is capable of tracking up to 45 intruding aircraft equipped with
Mode A or C transponders, and up to 30 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode S
transponders. A maximum of 30 aircraft with the highest threat potential can be
EIS
displayed simultaneously. No TAS/TCAS I surveillance is provided for aircraft without
operating transponders.
Interface
CNS
THEORY OF OPERATION
When the GTS 8XX is in Operating Mode, the unit interrogates the transponders of
Navigation
GPS
intruding aircraft while monitoring transponder replies. The system uses this information
to derive the distance, relative bearing, and if reported, the altitude and vertical trend
for each aircraft within its surveillance range. The GTS 8XX then calculates a closure
Planning
Flight
rate to each intruder based on the projected Closest Point of Approach (CPA). If the
closure rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic Advisory (TA), visual and aural alerting
is provided.
Avoidance
Hazard
TAS/TCAS I SURVEILLANCE VOLUME
Additional
The GTS 8XX surveillance system monitors the airspace within ±10,000 feet of own Features
altitude. Under ideal conditions, the GTS 8XX unit scans transponder traffic up to 12
nm in the forward direction. The range is somewhat reduced to the sides and aft of
own aircraft due to the directional interrogation signal patterns. In areas of greater
AFCS
transponder traffic density or when TCAS II (Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance
System II) systems are detected, the GTS 8XX automatically reduces its interrogation
Annun/Alerts
transmitter power (and therefore range) in order to limit potential interference from
other signals.
Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
TAS/TCAS I SYMBOLOGY
Overview
System
The GTS 8XX uses symbology to depict intruding traffic using the symbols shown
below.
Instruments
Flight
Symbol Description
Traffic Advisory.
EIS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range. Displayed at outer range
ring at proper bearing.
Interface
CNS
Proximity Advisory.
Navigation
GPS
Non-Threat Traffic.
Planning
Flight
GTS 8XX Traffic Symbols
A Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as a yellow circle or triangle, alerts the crew to
Avoidance
Hazard
a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft, if the closing rate, distance, and vertical
separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range
(off scale) is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative
Additional
Features
bearing of the intruder.

A Proximity Advisory (PA), displayed as a solid white diamond or triangle, indicates
the intruding aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range, but is still not
AFCS
considered a TA threat.
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond or triangle, is displayed for
Annun/Alerts
traffic beyond 6 nm that is neither a TA or PA.

Relative altitude, when available, is displayed above or below the corresponding
intruder symbol in hundreds of feet. When this altitude is above own aircraft, it is
Appendix
preceded by a ‘+’ symbol; a minus sign ‘-’ indicates traffic is below own aircraft.
A vertical trend arrow to the right of the intruder symbol indicates climbing or
descending traffic with an upward or downward-pointing arrow respectively.
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Overview
Relative Altitude
System
Vertical trend arrow
Instruments
Flight
Intruder Altitude and Vertical Trend Arrow
Flight IDs may also be displayed with traffic symbols; see the Flight IDs discussion in
this section for more information.
EIS
TAS/TCAS I ALERTS
Interface
CNS
When the GTS 8XX detects a new TA, the following occur:
• A single “Traffic!” voice alert is generated, followed by additional voice information
Navigation
about the bearing, relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that
GPS
triggered the TA. The announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would
indicate the traffic is in front of own aircraft, above own altitude, and approximately
Planning
four nautical miles away.
Flight
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashing
for five seconds and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
Avoidance
Hazard
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a yellow text banner will be
displayed in the center of the Traffic Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map
Additional
(GDU 460 only) instead of a TA symbol. The text will indicate “TA” followed by the Features
distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if known.
Bearing Relative Altitude Distance (nm)

AFCS
“High”, “Low”, “Same “Less than one mile”,

“One o’clock” through
Annun/Alerts
Altitude” (if within 200 “One Mile” through “Ten

“Twelve o’clock”
feet of own altitude), or Miles”, or “More than ten
or “No Bearing” “Altitude not available” miles”
Appendix
TA Descriptive Voice Announcements

Index
Hazard Avoidance
TA Alerting Conditions
Overview
System
The GTS 8XX automatically adjusts its TA sensitivity level to reduce the likelihood
of nuisance TA alerting during flight phases likely to be near airports. The system
uses Level A TA sensitivity when the groundspeed is less than 120 knots; Level B TA
Instruments
Flight
sensitivity applies in all other conditions.
Sensitivity Intruder Altitude TA Alerting Conditions

EIS
Level Available
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20
seconds of vertical and horizontal separation.
Interface
CNS
Or:
Navigation
A Yes seconds of horizontal separation and vertical

GPS
separation is within 600 feet.

Or:
Planning
Intruder range is within 0.2 nm and vertical

Flight

Avoidance
Hazard
A No seconds of separation or intruder range is within

0.2 NM.
Additional
Features
B No seconds of separation or intruder range is within

0.55 NM.
AFCS
seconds of vertical and horizontal separation.

Or:
Annun/Alerts

B Yes seconds of horizontal separation and vertical
Or:
Appendix
Intruder range is within 0.55 nm and vertical

Index
TA Sensitivity Level and TA Alerting Criteria
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM TEST
Overview
System
NOTE: Traffic surveillance is not available during the system test. Use cau-
tion when performing a system test during flight.
Instruments
Flight
The GTS 8XX provides a system test mode to verify the TAS/TCAS I system is operating
normally. The test takes ten seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated,
a test pattern of traffic symbols is displayed on the Traffic Page. If the system test
EIS
passes, the aural announcement “TAS/TCAS 1 System Test Passed” is heard, otherwise
the system announces “TAS/TCAS 1 System Test Failed.” When the system test is
complete, the traffic system enters Standby Mode.
Interface
CNS
1) From the Traffic Page, touch + or - to set the range to 2/6 nm to allow the
full test pattern to be displayed during test.
Navigation
GPS
3) Touch Self-test.
Planning
OPERATION
Flight
NOTE: The GTS 8XX automatically transitions from Standby to Operate
Avoidance
mode eight seconds after takeoff. The unit also automatically transitions
Hazard
from Operate to Standby mode 24 seconds after landing.
After starting the system, the GTS 8XX is in Standby Mode. The GTS 8XX must be in
Additional
Features
Operating Mode for traffic to be displayed and for TAs to be issued.
Touching Operate on the Traffic Page Options Menu, allows the traffic unit to
switch from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as necessary. Touching Standby,
AFCS
forces the unit into Standby Mode.

Switching from operating mode to standby mode:
Annun/Alerts
1) From the Traffic Page, press the MENU Key.

2) Touch Standby.
Switching from standby mode to operating mode:
Appendix

2) Touch Operate.
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Changing the altitude range:

Overview
System

2) Touch Alt Mode.
3) Touch one of the following:
Instruments
Flight
• Above: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet

above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during
climb phase of flight.
EIS
• Normal: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet

enroute phase of flight.
Interface
CNS
• Below: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet

Navigation
descent phase of flight.

GPS
• Unrestricted: All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900
feet below the aircraft.
Planning
Flight
FLIGHT ID DISPLAY
The Flight IDs of other aircraft (when available) can be enabled for display on
Avoidance
the Traffic Page. When a flight ID is received, it will appear above or below the
Hazard
corresponding traffic symbol on the Traffic Page when this option is enabled.
Enabling/disabling Flight ID Display:
Additional
Features
1) From the Traffic (Trf) Page, press the MENU Key.

2) Touch Flight ID to toggle the Flight ID on and off.
TRAFFIC PAGE
AFCS
The Traffic Page shows surrounding TAS/TCAS I traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s
Annun/Alerts
current position and altitude, without basemap clutter. It is the primary page for
viewing traffic information. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is
no valid heading. Map range is adjustable by touching + and -, as indicated by the
map range rings.
Appendix
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner
of the page.
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Traffic Non-Threat
Advisory, Traffic,
Overview
System
700’ above 500’ above
Instruments
Flight
Traffic Display
Range Rings
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Traffic Page (GTS 8XX)
DATA LINK TRAFFIC (OPTIONAL)

Additional
Features
The ADS-B receiver is a receive-only data link radio with on-board GPS, 978 MHz
(Universal Access Transceiver frequency band), and 1090 MHz Extended Squitter (1090 ES)
AFCS
receivers. It is designed to receive, process, and output traffic (ADS-B air-to-air, and TIS-B
traffic information), and weather (Flight Information Service-Broadcast (FIS-B)) information
to the G3X Touch system through an RS-232 serial connection or Bluetooth connection.
Annun/Alerts
ADS-B (Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast) is a surveillance technology

deployed across the United States as the cornerstone of the FAA’s Next Generation Air
Transportation System (NextGen). ADS-B enables improved surveillance services, both
Appendix
air-to-air and air-to-ground, especially in areas where radar is ineffective due to terrain
or where it is impractical or cost prohibitive. Initial applications of air-to-air ADS-B are
for “advisory” use only, enhancing a pilot’s visual acquisition of other nearby ADS-B
Index
equipped aircraft either when airborne or on the airport surface.
Hazard Avoidance
1090 ES
GPS
Overview
UAT
System
RADAR
Composite
Instruments
Flight
1090 ES
18,000 FT
EIS
10,000 FT
Mode A/C UAT
Interface
UAT
CNS
UAT
ATC 1090 ES
Navigation
RADAR
ADS-B
GPS
Ground
Station
ADS-B System
Planning
Flight
For the purpose of distinguishing between levels of ADS-B service, there are three
classifications of aircraft or system capability; ADS-B In, ADS-B Out, and ADS-B
Avoidance
Hazard
participating. ADS-B In refers to the capability to receive ADS-B information. ADS-B

Out refers to the capability to transmit ADS-B information. ADS-B participating refers
to the capability to both send and receive ADS-B information. Aircraft lacking either
Additional
Features
ADS-In, ADS-B Out, or both ADS-B capabilities may also be referred to as ADS-B non-
participating aircraft.
Currently, rule-compliant ADS-B Out capability in the United States requires a
AFCS
TSO’ed SBAS-enabled GPS, such as a Garmin GPS 400W or similar, and one of two
possible data links: 1090 ES transponder or a 978 MHz UAT. Either data link system
Annun/Alerts
is capable of transmitting the aircraft’s position, velocity, identification, and other

information every second to compatible aircraft and ground stations called Ground
Based Transceivers (GBTs).
Appendix
Because 1090 ES transponders and UATs operate on different frequencies, aircraft

not similarly equipped cannot transmit/receive data link information directly to/from
each other. Instead, operation within range of a GBT is required to receive data link
Index
information on both frequencies. The ADS-B receiver is unique in its ADS-B In capability
since it can receive data link information from both 1090 ES transponders and UATs.
Hazard Avoidance
Thus, the ADS-B receiver receives traffic information directly from any ADS-B Out
aircraft within range as well as the rebroadcast of ADS-B information from any nearby
Overview
System
GBT. This rebroadcast is called Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Rebroadcast
(ADS-R) and is automatically triggered by the detection of an ADS-B participating
Instruments
aircraft within the service volume of the GBT. As a 978 MHz (UAT frequency) receiver,
Flight
the ADS-B receiver can receive both the Traffic Information Service-Broadcast (TIS-B)
and Flight Information Service-Broadcast (FIS-B) provided in conjunction with ADS-R
services when in range of a GBT.
EIS
FIS-B service is provided continuously, but ADS-R including TIS-B will only be
broadcast by a GBT when an ADS-B participating aircraft is within the GBT’s defined
Interface
service volume. In this case, a GBT will only rebroadcast TIS-B information relative
CNS
to the ADS-B participating aircraft. Only traffic that is within 15 nm lateral
and 3,500’ vertical of the ADS-B participating aircraft is provided in the
Navigation
broadcast. Non-participating traffic aircraft located farther than 15 nm laterally and
GPS
3,500’ vertically from the participating aircraft is are excluded from the information
transmitted by the GBT.
Planning
Flight
TIS-B traffic information includes non-participating aircraft detected by ATC
surveillance radar. As TIS-B data is derived from ATC surveillance radar data, TIS-B
traffic position updates typically occur every three to thirteen seconds. Therefore,
Avoidance
Hazard
TIS-B traffic may be displayed with degraded positional accuracy. Aircraft
without operating transponders are invisible to TIS-B. Aircraft operating
outside of the ATC radar coverage area are also not displayed.
Additional
Features
Since the ADS-B receiver is a receive-only device, even when used onboard an aircraft
equipped with a qualifying GPS and 1090 ES transponder, a GBT may not identify it as
an ADS-B participating aircraft. The squitter of some 1090 ES transponders must be
AFCS
configured to communicate the aircraft has 978 MHz receive capability in order to be
identified as an ADS-B participating aircraft.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
avoidance resolution advisories and does not, under any circumstances or

conditions, relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Overview
System

Instruments

Flight
the display.
Viewing the ADS-B Receiver Traffic and Weather Status:

EIS

2) Touch Data Link.
Interface
SYSTEM STATUS
CNS
The traffic system status is annunciated in the upper right corner of the Map Page
as well as the lower left corner of the dedicated Traffic Page.
Navigation
GPS
Traffic Icon System Status

Full traffic services available for an ADS-B participating aircraft (ground
Planning
Flight
linked TIS-B, FIS-B and ADS-R, and Air-to-Air ADS-B). If you are using
the ADS-B receiver on a non-participating aircraft you may still see
this when you are within the service area of any participating aircraft.
Avoidance
Hazard
As a non-participating aircraft you are only receiving TIS-B traffic

information for traffic within 15 nm and 3,500’ of a participating
aircraft.
Additional
Features
Limited traffic services available (may be limited to Air-to-Air ADS-B)

AFCS
Annun/Alerts
No Traffic Data Available

Appendix
Traffic Modes
Index
Hazard Avoidance
TRAFFIC DESCRIPTION
Overview
System
ADS-B traffic operation is similar to the TAS/TCAS I systems discussed previously, but ADS-B adds
additional symbology. The symbols used to display ADS-B traffic are shown in the table below. The
traffic identifier and altitude are displayed below the traffic symbol. A small up or down arrow next
Instruments
to the traffic symbol indicates the traffic is climbing or descending at a rate of at least 500 feet per
Flight
minute. The vector line that extends from the traffic symbol is an indication of the intruder aircraft
track. For directional traffic symbols, the arrow head points in the direction of aircraft’s ground track.
EIS
Symbol Description
Non-threat, non-directional airborne traffic
Interface
CNS
Non-threat directional airborne Traffic with absolute vector. Points in the
direction of the aircraft track.
Non-directional airborne Proximity Advisory (PA). Proximity Advisories are
Navigation
GPS
issued for any traffic within 6 nautical miles and +/- 1,200’.
Directional airborne Proximity Advisory (PA) with absolute vector. Points in
the direction of the aircraft track. Proximity Advisories are issued for any
Planning
Flight
traffic within 6 nautical miles and +/- 1,200’.
Non-directional airborne Traffic Advisory (TA)
Avoidance
Hazard
Non-directional off-scale airborne Traffic Advisory (TA). Displayed at outer
range ring at proper bearing.
Additional
Directional airborne Traffic Advisory (TA) with absolute vector. Points in the Features
direction of the aircraft track.
Directional off-scale airborne Traffic Advisory (TA). Points in the direction of
the aircraft track.
AFCS
*Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only

displayed when own aircraft is below 1,500 feet AGL or on the ground.
Annun/Alerts
*Directional surface traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed when own

aircraft is below 1,500 feet AGL or on the ground.
*Non-directional non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only
Appendix
displayed when own aircraft is below 1,500 feet AGL or on the ground.
*Directional non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed
when own aircraft is below 1,500 feet AGL or on the ground.
Index
*Ground traffic is only displayed on the Map Page when the aircraft is on the ground or below 1,500 feet
AGL. Ground traffic is always displayed on the dedicated traffic page.
ADS-B Traffic Symbology
Hazard Avoidance
Traffic Advisories (TA)

Overview
System
ADS-B traffic devices automatically adjust the Traffic Advisory (TA) sensitivity level
to reduce the likelihood of nuisance TA alerts during various phases of flight. TAs are
Instruments
issued for traffic when they are predicted to be within a specified volume of airspace
Flight
around your aircraft in a specified amount of time. The protected volume and time
interval varies based on the current geodetic altitude and groundspeed. Thus, the
protected volume of airspace increases with altitude and ground speed. Refer to the
EIS
following table for details.

Interface
CNS
The following Traffic symbols are displayed on the display when Synthetic Vision is
installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for more information about
Navigation
Synthetic Vision.
GPS
ADS-B Symbol on the PFD

Description
Planning
(Synthetic Vision Only)

Flight
Proximity Advisory (PA)

Avoidance
Hazard
Traffic Advisory (TA)

Additional
Features
Non-threat traffic
AFCS
PFD ADS-B Symbology (Synthetic Vision Only)
TRAFFIC ALERTS (ADS-B TIS-B)

Annun/Alerts
A traffic voice alert is generated whenever the number of Traffic Advisories on the
G3X Touch display increases. Limiting Traffic Advisories only reduces the “nuisance”
alerting due to proximate aircraft. For example, when the first Traffic Advisories appear
Appendix
on the display, the user is alerted audibly. So long as a single aircraft remains on the
display, no further voice alert is generated. If a second (or more) aircraft appears on
the screen, a new voice alert is sounded. Traffic Advisories can only be issued when the
Index
GDL knows its own altitude and the altitude of the intruder aircraft.
Hazard Avoidance
If the number of Traffic Advisories on the traffic display decreases and then increases,
Overview
a new voice alert is sounded. The traffic voice alert is also generated whenever TIS-B
System
service becomes available. The traffic voice alerts are as follows:
• “Traffic”—TIS-B/ADS-B traffic alert received.
Instruments
Flight
• “Traffic Not Available”—TIS-B/ADS-B service is not available or out of range.
Enabling/disabling the traffic alerts:
EIS
NOTE: Traffic alerts are reset to ‘enabled’ on the next power cycle.
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
The Traffic Warning Window is shown, when the ADS-B receiver issues a traffic
advisory (TA). The Traffic Warning Window shows a small pop-up map in the lower left
Planning
Flight
corner. The Range Rings on the pop-up alert are spaced every whole mile/kilometer/
nautical mile.
Avoidance
Hazard
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
Traffic is displayed by default on the Map Page and in the Traffic Warning Window.
Additional
Traffic Symbol and Traffic Label (i.e., relative altitude, altitude trend and absolute Features
motion vectors) settings selects the maximum range at which traffic labels or symbols
are shown. Traffic Labels can also be turned off.
AFCS
Traffic information is also displayed on the PFD when Synthetic Vision is enabled.
See the ‘Additional Features’ Section for more information.
Annun/Alerts
Enabling/disabling traffic data on the Map Page:

2) Touch Traffic.
Appendix
Customizing traffic data on the Map Page:

Index
Hazard Avoidance
3) Touch and swipe the tabs to find the Traffic Tab.

Overview
System
4) Touch the Traffic Tab.

5) Touch the Traffic Data to view a list of options.
6) Touch On or Off.
Instruments
Flight
7) Touch the Traffic Symbol to view a list of options.

8) Touch Auto or a range option.
9) Touch the Traffic Label to view a list of options.
EIS
10) Touch Off, Auto, or a range.

11) Touch the Traffic Identifier to view a list of options.
Interface
CNS
12) Touch Off, Auto, or a range.

Navigation
1) Touch the HSI or Attitude Indicator on the PFD.

GPS

3) Touch Traffic to toggle traffic on and off.
Planning
Flight
Displaying Traffic information:

Touch the traffic on the map to display range and altitude separation
Avoidance
information.
Hazard
Traffic Range
and Altitude
Additional
Separation
Features
Traffic
Ground
AFCS
Track
Annun/Alerts
Traffic (Map Page)

Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Dedicated Traffic Page (Trf)
Overview
System
NOTE: Traffic alerts and altitude filters can only be changed on the dedicated
Traffic Page (Trf). If the Traffic Page (Trf) is configured off, voice alerts are
Instruments
enabled and the altitude filter is automatically set to ‘Normal’
Flight
Displaying/removing the Traffic Page:
EIS
2) Touch the Traffic Page .
3) Touch Show or Hide.
Interface
CNS
Changing the altitude range:
Navigation
2) Touch Alt Mode.
GPS
3) Touch one of the following:
• Above: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9,000 feet
Planning
Flight
above the aircraft to 2,700 feet below the aircraft. Typically used
during climb phase of flight.
• Normal: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2,700 feet
Avoidance
Hazard
during enroute phase of flight.
• Below: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2,700 feet
Additional
Features
during descent phase of flight.
• Unrestricted: All traffic is displayed.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Hazard Avoidance
Traffic
Display
Overview
System
Traffic Source Name Range

Rings
ADS-B, TAS/TCAS
Status and Altitude
Instruments
Flight
Filter Directional
Air-to-Air and Traffic
TIS-B Uplink (Selected),
1800 feet
below
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
Selected Traffic Target

GPS
Details
(Touch Next to scan
through any co-located
traffic targets)
Planning
Flight
Traffic Page (Traffic Target Selected)
When a traffic target is selected, a decluttering scheme is applied to direct the

Avoidance
Hazard
pilot's attention to the seleted target. Traffic targets not selected (except active TAs)
temporarily display decluttered symbology.
Additional
Features
Flight ID Display
The Flight IDs of other aircraft (when available) can be displayed on the Traffic Page.
When a Flight ID or call sign is received, it will appear below the corresponding traffic
AFCS
symbol when enabled.

Relative Altitude (in
Annun/Alerts
Aircraft this case 500 feet

Identification (tail above own aircraft)
number or Flight
ID number) Altitude Trend (up
arrow indicates
Appendix
climbing, down
arrow indicates
descending)
Traffic Absolute
Motion Vector
Index
Example ADS-B Traffic Symbol
Hazard Avoidance
Enabling/disabling Flight ID Display:
Overview
System
2) Touch the Flight ID.
Instruments
Flight
Motion Vectors
There are two pilot-selectable and mutually exclusive types of motion vectors, Absolute
and TargetTrend, which are differentiated by color and function. Absolute vectors are
EIS
white and indicate ground track as reported by the traffic. TargetTrend vectors are green
and indicate the flight path and position, relative to your aircraft, at which the traffic
Interface
will be after the passing of one of four predetermined look-ahead intervals. The end of
CNS
the TargetTrend vector indicates the traffic’s predicted location relative to your predicted
location at the end of the look-ahead time. For example, if traffic is ahead of you and
Navigation
traveling along the same track but at a slower rate, the motion vector would point
GPS
opposite of its indicated direction of flight showing that you are overtaking the traffic.
The TargetTrend look-ahead time interval is automatically adjusted from 30 seconds to
Planning
Flight
five minutes and corresponds to the traffic display range setting. The greater the range
setting, the longer the time interval and vise versa. Refer to the table below for more
details.
Avoidance
Hazard
Traffic Page Range Ring Settings TargetTrend Look-ahead
.5nm to 2nm 30 seconds
Additional
Features
2nm to 6nm 60 seconds
6nm to 12nm 2 minutes
12nm to 40nm 5 minutes
AFCS
TargetTrend Look-ahead
Annun/Alerts
Motion vector selection is made from the Traffic Page Menu by enabling/disabling
TargetTrend. Absolute vectors are selected by default and are replaced when TargetTrend
is enabled.
Appendix
Enabling/disabling TargetTrend:
Index
2) Touch the TargetTrend.
Hazard Avoidance
TargetTrend On Map
Overview
System
In addition to the Traffic Page, the Map Page can show TargetTrend vectors of nearby
traffic. These indications are overlaid on top of regular topographic maps and VFR/IFR
Instruments
charts, showing how nearby traffic relates to surrounding waypoints, airspaces and
Flight
ground features.
EIS
Traffic Direction TargetTrend

Interface
with Relative
CNS
Altitude and Motion Vector

Altitude Trend
TargetTrend Traffic Direction
Navigation
Motion Vector and Relative

GPS
Altitude
TargetTrend Overlaid on Moving Map

Planning
Flight
Enabling/disabling TargetTrend Overlay:

Avoidance
Hazard

3) Under the ‘Traffic’ Tab, touch and drag to scroll to the TargetTrend field.
Additional
4) Touch On or Off.
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Additional Features
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Overview
System
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi, FliteCharts, and ChartView in elec-
Instruments
tronic form, it is still advisable to carry another source of charts on board the
Flight
aircraft.
Additional features of the system include the following:
EIS
• Synthetic Vision (SVX)
• SafeTaxi®
Interface
CNS
• ChartView and FliteCharts® electronic charts
• Airport Directory Data (AOPA , AC-U-KWIK, etc.)
Navigation
GPS
• SiriusXM Radio entertainment (Optional)
• Electronic Checklists (Optional)
Planning
Flight
• Flight Data Logging
Synthetic Vision provides a three-dimensional forward view of terrain features on the
PFD. Synthetic Vision imagery shows the pilot’s view of relevant features in relation
Avoidance
Hazard
to the aircraft attitude, as well as the flight path pertaining to the active flight plan.
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information.
Additional
Features
ChartView and FlightCharts provide on-board electronic terminal procedure charts.
Electronic charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either
ChartView or FliteCharts may be used at one time, but not both.
AFCS
The Airport Directory contains airport statistics such as pattern altitudes, noise
abatement information, FBO phone numbers, hours of operation, local attractions,
Annun/Alerts
ground transportation, lodging, and services.

The optional SiriusXM Radio entertainment audio feature offers more than 170
channels of music, news, and sports.
Appendix
Optional checklists help to quickly find the proper procedure on the ground or
during flight.
Index
Additional Features
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data
Overview
on an SD data card. A 2 GB SD card can store over 1,000 hours of flight data or up to
System
1,000 files (whichever comes first).

Instruments
8.1 SYNTHETIC VISION (SVX)

Flight
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain,
EIS
obstacle, and traffic avoidance. Synthetic Vision is intended as an aid to situ-

ational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain,
Interface
CNS
obstacles, or traffic.
Synthetic Vision is a visual enhancement to the G3X Touch™. Synthetic Vision

Navigation
depicts a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front

GPS
of the aircraft. Synthetic Vision information is shown on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD). The depicted imagery is derived from the aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-
Planning
Flight
dimensional position, and databases of terrain, obstacles, and other relevant features.
Loss of any of the required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause
Synthetic Vision to be disabled until the required data is restored.
Avoidance
Hazard
The Synthetic Vision terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent
with those of the topographical map display), large water features, towers, and other
obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural features
Additional
Features
on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries
are not displayed even if those features are found on the Navigation Map. The terrain
display also includes a north-south east-west grid with lines oriented with true north.
AFCS
Terrain is integrated within Synthetic Vision to provide visual and auditory alerts to
indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the projected flight
Annun/Alerts
path. Terrain alerts are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the
accuracy or fidelity on which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain
Appendix
or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated solely upon the use of the terrain or
obstacle data displayed by Synthetic Vision.
Index
Additional Features
The following Synthetic Vision enhancements appear on the PFD:
Overview
System
• Pathways • Runway Display
• Flight Path Marker • Terrain Alerting
Instruments
• Traffic Display • Obstacle Alerting
Flight
• Airport Signs • Zero-Pitch Line
EIS
Interface
CNS
Zero Pitch
Line (ZPL)
Navigation
Pathways
GPS
Flight Airport
Path Runway
Marker
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Synthetic Vision
Appendix
Index
Additional Features
SYNTHETIC VISION OPERATION

Overview
System
Synthetic Vision is activated from the PFD Setup Page.

Activating and deactivating synthetic vision:
Instruments
1) Touch the Attitude Indicator or HSI to display the PFD Options.

Flight

EIS
4) Touch Synthetic Vision to toggle on and off.
PATHWAYS
Interface
CNS
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course
and altitude deviation information provided by the CDI, VSI, and VDI.
Navigation
GPS
NOTE: Pathways boxes may not be displayed for holding patterns, procedure
turns and certain portions of the flight plan being received from an external
Planning
Flight
GPS navigator.
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of

Avoidance
flight shown as colored rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical
Hazard
flight path of the active flight plan. The box size represents 700 feet wide by 200 feet
tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During an approach, the box
Additional
Features
width is 700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. Other
than the descending portion of an ILS or WAAS GPS approach (starting from the leg
leading into the FAF), pathways boxes are shown at the level of the altitude bug.
AFCS
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending
on the route of flight and navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay
flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes that correspond to the Magenta CDI.
Annun/Alerts
A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a green CDI. An

inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a
white line drawn on the Navigation Map indicating an inactive leg.
Appendix
Index
Additional Features
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/
Overview
VNAV, and some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational
System
awareness and should not be used independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator,
and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the display when the selected
Instruments
navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the active
Flight
leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the
flight plan leg that would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.
EIS
Activating and deactivating pathways:
Interface
CNS
4) Touch Pathways to toggle on and off.
Navigation
GPS
Departure and Enroute
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of
Planning
Flight
boxes with pointers at each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint.
Pathways are not displayed for the first leg of the flight plan if that segment is a
Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the first active GPS
Avoidance
Hazard
leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the
SVX field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward
this leg. While approaching the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the
Additional
Features
number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum of four.
Pathways are displayed along the flight plan route at the selected altitude for the
leg. Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft
AFCS
performance. Flight plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at
a level above the aircraft at the altitude selected.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Additional Features
Descent and Approach

Overview
System
NOTE: During the final segment of an ILS or WAAS GPS approach, the path-
ways boxes automatically adjust to correspond with the localizer/glideslope
Instruments
(ILS) or horizontal/vertical (GPS) deviation signals received from the external

Flight
navigator.
When an approach providing vertical guidance is activated, Pathways are shown

EIS
level at the selected altitude. Pathways are shown level at the selected altitude up to
the point along the final approach course where the altitude intercepts the extended
vertical descent path or glideslope. From the vertical path descent or glideslope
Interface
CNS
intercept point, the pathways are shown inbound to the Missed Approach Point (MAP)
along the published lateral and vertical descent path.
Navigation
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at

GPS
the segment altitudes if GPS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When
switching to the localizer inbound with LOC selected as the navigation source on the
Planning
CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glideslope.
Flight
If GPS is the selected navigation source on the HSI, the pathways boxes are magenta.
If LOC is the selected navigation source on the HSI, the pathways boxes are green for
Avoidance
Hazard
the ILS. Pathways boxes are not displayed for segments such as heading legs or VOR
radials.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Additional Features
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Overview
System
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
Instruments
Flight
Climbs NOT Non-approach descents NOT displayed by pathway
displayed
by pathway
Selected Altitude
EIS
for Step Down
Descending final
approach segment
displayed by pathway
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Pathways - Enroute, Descent, and Approach
Avoidance
Missed Approach
Hazard
Pathways are displayed at the selected altitude upon activating the missed approach
on the external GPS navigator.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Additional Features
FLIGHT PATH MARKER

Overview
System
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at
groundspeeds above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft
Instruments
accounting for wind speed and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
Flight
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Vision feature is in operation. The FPM
represents the direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the
display, while the airplane symbol represents the aircraft heading and attitude.
EIS
The FPM may be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant
terrain or obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above
Interface
CNS
the FPM could indicate a potential conflict, even before a terrain alert is issued. However,
decisions regarding terrain and/or obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
Navigation
Activating and deactivating the flight path marker:

GPS

Planning
Flight

4) Touch Flt. Path Marker to toggle the flight path marker on and off.
Avoidance
Hazard
ZERO PITCH LINE

The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the
Additional
Features
aircraft attitude with respect to the horizon. It may not align with the terrain horizon,
particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high
altitudes.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Additional Features
TRAFFIC
Overview
System
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the
Synthetic Vision display or may appear as a partial symbol.
Instruments
Flight
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations. Traffic symbols are
displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be
EIS
displayed on the Synthetic Vision display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent
with that used for traffic displayed on the Inset Map or Map Page. If the traffic altitude
is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the Synthetic Vision display. For
Interface
CNS
more details refer to the Traffic Information Service (TIS-A) discussion in the Hazard
Avoidance section. Arrows are depicted on the traffic message if traffic is outside the
Navigation
Synthetic Vision field of view.
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
4) Touch Traffic to toggle synthetic vision traffic on and off.
Additional
Traffic Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Synthetic Vision Traffic

Appendix
Index
Additional Features
AIRPORT SIGNS
Overview
System
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on

the synthetic vision display. Airport Signs appear on the display when the aircraft is
Instruments
approximately 15 nm from and airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport
Flight
signs are shown without the identifier until the aircraft is approximately eight nautical
miles from the airport.
EIS
Airport
Sign with
Interface
Identifier
CNS
(Between
4.5 nm
and
Navigation
8 nm)
GPS
Planning
Flight
Airport Signs
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Additional Features
RUNWAYS
Overview
System
WARNING: Do not use Synthetic Vision runway depictions as the sole means
for determining the proximity of the aircraft to the runway or for maintaining
Instruments
Flight
the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database,
therefore, these runways are not displayed.
EIS
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the
surrounding terrain. All runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations
Interface
CNS
as defined in the database. In some situations, where threshold elevations differ
significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are displayed,
those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are outlined in white. Other runways
Navigation
GPS
(those NOT aligned with the aircraft heading) are outlined in gray When an approach
for a specific runway is active, that runway appears brighter and is outlined with a
white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As
Planning
Flight
the aircraft gets closer to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and
centerlines are displayed.
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Other Features
Runway on
Airport
AFCS
Runway
Selected for
Approach
Annun/Alerts
Airport Runways
Appendix
Index
Additional Features
SYNTHETIC VISION TERRAIN AND OBSTACLE DATA

Overview
System
Terrain alerting on the synthetic vision display corresponds to the red and yellow X
symbols on the Inset Map (GDU™ 460 only) and Navigation Map. For more detailed
Instruments
information regarding Synthetic Vision Terrain and Obstacle Data, refer to the Hazard
Flight
Avoidance Section.
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading
displayed on the synthetic vision. In these cases, the conflict is outside the Synthetic
EIS
Vision field of view and the alert will have arrows indicating the direction of the alert.
Interface
Terrain
CNS
Annunciation
Navigation
Terrain
GPS
Warning
Planning
Flight
PFD Terrain Alert

Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
Potential
Impact
Points
Pop-up Alert
AFCS
MFD Terrain Alerts

Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Additional Features
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic vision display by standard two-
Overview
dimensional tower symbols found on the Inset Map (GDU 460 Only) and Navigation
System
Map. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative height above
terrain and distance from the aircraft. Unlike the Inset Map and Navigation Map
Instruments
display, obstacles on the synthetic vision display do not change colors to warn of
Flight
potential conflict with the aircraft’s flight path until the obstacle is associated with an
actual terrain alert. Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the aircraft altitude are
not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays.
EIS
Arrows indicate the
obstacle is outside the
Interface
Synthetic Vision field
CNS
of view.
Obstacle Outside the Synthetic Vision Field of View
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Synthetic Vision Obstacle Alerts
During unusual attitude conditions or when the terrain gradient is great enough
Avoidance
Hazard
to completely fill the display, a brown (earth) or blue (sky) colored bar at the top or
bottom of the screen is displayed to prevent the pilot from losing sight of the horizon.
Additional
Features
Blue Band
AFCS
Terrain
Completely
Fills Display
Annun/Alerts
Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain

Appendix
Index
Additional Features
SYNTHETIC VISION FIELD OF VIEW

Overview
System
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two
dashed lines forming a V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent
Instruments
the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.

Flight
EIS
Lines Depict
PFD Field
Interface
of View
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Synthetic Vision Field of View

Avoidance
Configuring field of view:

Hazard
1) With Synthetic Vision enabled, from the Map Page press the MENU Key.
Additional
Features
3) Touch and drag the tabs to scroll.

4) Touch the Miscellaneous Tab.
5) Touch the Field of View .
AFCS
6) Touch On or Off.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Additional Features
8.2 SAFETAXI®
Overview
System
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports
at close range. When viewing at ranges close enough to show the airport detail, the
Instruments
map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, runway incursion “Hot Spots”,
Flight
and airport landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent
features. Resolution is greater at lower map ranges. The SafeTaxi feature can be seen
on the Map Page and the Waypoint Page
EIS
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways
and runways, and/or complex ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution
Interface
pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional awareness confusion or runway
CNS
incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined by magenta outlines.
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways,
Navigation
runways, and airport features. When panning over the airport, features such as runway
GPS
holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
Taxiway Identi-
AFCS
Airport Hot fication

Spot Outline
Annun/Alerts
SafeTaxi Depiction on the Map Page

Enabling/disabling SafeTaxi:
Appendix

3) Touch and drag the tabs to scroll.
4) Touch the Airport Tab.
Index
5) Touch and drag to scroll down
Additional Features
6) Touch the SafeTaxi .

Overview
System
7) Touch On or Off.
SAFETAXI CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION

Instruments
Flight
The SafeTaxi database is provided by Garmin. Refer to Appendix C for instructions

on updating the SafeTaxi database.
EIS
8.3 CHARTVIEW
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
purposes only.
Planning
Flight
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedure charts. The
MFD depiction displays the aircraft position on the moving map in the plan view of the
Avoidance
approach charts and on airport diagrams.

Hazard
ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a
period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the disabled date. ChartView is
Additional
Features
disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no longer available for viewing. When
turning on the system, the initial page displays the current status of the ChartView
database.
AFCS
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data
includes:
Annun/Alerts
• Arrivals (STAR) • Airport Diagrams

• Departure Procedures (DP) • NOTAMs
• Approaches
Appendix
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on

the chart when the current position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes
are not considered within the chart boundaries. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol
Index
reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the aircraft symbol is removed from the
display.
Additional Features
The figure below, shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading.
Overview
Note, the grey shading is for illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the
System
published chart or display. These off-scale areas appear on the chart to convey
supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of this
Instruments
information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position.
Flight
Therefore, when the aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft
position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to the off-scale area.
EIS
Interface
CNS
Off-Scale
Navigation
Area
GPS
Planning
Flight
Off-Scale
Areas
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas

AFCS
Displaying ChartView:
1) From the Waypoint Page, touch the Charts Tab.
Annun/Alerts
2) If necessary, touch the Waypoint Identifier Field at the top of the page.
3) Enter the desired airport using the keypad or the Find option.
4) Touch to display a list of charts.
Appendix
5) Touch the desired chart from the list.

Index
Additional Features
When a terminal procedure chart is not available for the requested airport or there is
Overview
an error rendering the data, the banner “Chart Not Available” appears on the screen.
System
The “Chart Not Available” banner does not refer to the ChartView subscription, but
rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected
Instruments
airport.
Flight
EIS
Chart Not Available Banner

Interface
CNS
AIRCRAFT SYMBOL
Navigation
The aircraft symbol is shown in magenta on the chart when the chart is to scale and
GPS
the aircraft position is within the boundaries of the chart.
CHART RANGE
Planning
Flight
Changing the chart range:

Avoidance
From the Waypoint Page with the Charts Tab selected, touch - or + to
Hazard
change the range.
CHART EXPAND BUTTON

Additional
Features
The Chart Expand Button in the lower left hand corner of the chart (Waypoint Page
> Charts Tab) quickly expands the chart.
AFCS
Expanding the chart:

From the Waypoint Page with the Charts Tab selected, touch the Chart
Annun/Alerts
Expand Button. Touch the Chart Expand Button again to resume normal
viewing.
Appendix
Index
Additional Features
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Touch
Expand
Chart
Navigation
GPS
Chart Expand Button
NAVIGATION DATABASE-PUBLISHED NOTAMS
Planning
Flight
NOTE: Only NOTAMs for the selected airport is shown (when available).
Avoidance
Hazard
There may be other NOTAMs available pertaining to the flight that may not
be displayed. Contact Jeppesen for more information regarding Jeppesen
database-published NOTAMs.
Additional
Features
Recent NOTAMs applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the
ChartView database. If NOTAMs are available for the selected airport, a ‘Chart
NOTAMs’ option will be displayed at the bottom of the drop-down menu of available
AFCS
charts. Select the ‘Chart NOTAMs’ option from the chart menu to display the applicable
NOTAM information.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Additional Features
8.4 FLITECHARTS®
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight

EIS
purposes only.
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of National Aeronautical Charting Office

Interface
(NACO) terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed with high-resolution
CNS
and in color for applicable charts. FliteCharts database subscription is available from
Garmin. Available data includes:
Navigation
• Arrivals (STAR) • Airport Diagrams

GPS
• Departure Procedures (DP) • Takeoff Minimums

Planning
• Approaches • Alternate Minimums

Flight
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on

the chart when the current position is within the boundaries of the chart. An aircraft
Avoidance
Hazard
symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area depicted on some charts.

The figure below shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading.
Additional
Features
Note, these areas are not shaded on the published chart. These off-scale areas appear
on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical
position of this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual
geographic position. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol appears within one of these
AFCS
areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to the off-
scale area.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Additional Features
Overview
System
Off-Scale
Instruments
Flight
Areas Off-Scale
Area
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Off-Scale
Areas
Additional
Off-Scale
Features
Area AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced
Appendix
aircraft symbol.
Index
Additional Features
Displaying FliteCharts:
Overview
System
1) From the Waypoint Page, touch the Charts Tab.

2) If necessary, touch the Waypoint Identifier Field at the top of the page.
3) Enter the desired airport using the keypad or the Find option.
Instruments
Flight
4) Touch to display a list of charts.

5) Touch the desired chart from the list.
EIS
Touch
to view
Available
Approaches
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
FliteCharts
AFCS
When a terminal procedure chart is not available for the requested airport or there is
an error rendering the data, the banner “Chart Not Available” appears on the screen.
The “Chart Not Available” banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but
Annun/Alerts
rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected
airport.
Appendix
Index
Chart Not Available Banner
Additional Features
AIRCRAFT SYMBOL
Overview
System
The aircraft symbol is shown in magenta on the chart only if the chart is to scale and
the aircraft position is within the boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not
Instruments
displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears. The Aircraft Not Shown Icon may
Flight
appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
CHART RANGE
EIS
Changing the chart range:
From the Waypoint Page with the TERPs Tab selected, touch - or + to
Interface
CNS
change the range.
FLITECHARTS CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
Navigation
GPS
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. FliteCharts do not expire and will remain
viewable after the expiration date. There are four different possible criteria for chart
availability. These indications are whether the databases are not configured, not
Planning
Flight
available, current or out of date.
8.5 AIRPORT DIRECTORY DATA
Avoidance
Hazard
The Airport Directory contains airport statistics such as pattern altitudes, noise
Additional
abatement information, FBO phone numbers, hours of operation, local attractions, Features
ground transportation, lodging, and services.

The AOPA Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the
AFCS
U.S. and it is updated on a 56-day cycle. Detailed information for over 5,300 U.S.
airports, along with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs can be
Annun/Alerts
viewed. This service allows the pilot to plan an overnight, choose fuel stops, find
ground transportation, etc.
Appendix
Index
Additional Features
Optional airport directory databases such as AC-U-KWIK are also supported. AC-
Overview
U-KWIK provides complete listings of FBOs, charter companies, fuel suppliers, ground
System
transportation, maintenance and catering services at public airports across the world.
If the AOPA database is in use, the AOPA Tab is displayed on the Waypoint (Wpt) Page.
Instruments
Flight
If another airport directory database is in use, such as AC-U-KWIK, the DIRECTORY

Tab is displayed on the Waypoint (Wpt) Page.
Viewing Airport Directory information:
EIS
From the Waypoint (WPT) Page, touch the AOPA or DIRECTORY Tab.
Interface
CNS
Airport Identifier
Service Icon
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Airport Directory Information

Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Additional Features
Icon Description
Overview
System
Restaurant on Field
Instruments
Flight
Self Serve Fuel
Courtesy Car
EIS
Airport Directory Service Icons
Interface
CNS
8.6 SiriusXM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT (OPTIONAL)
Navigation
GPS
NOTE: See the G3X Touch Installation Manual for SiriusXM activation instruc-
tions.
Planning
Flight
NOTE: SiriusXM Radio is only available with the an optional SiriusXM capable
radio and a SiriusXM subscription.
Avoidance
Hazard
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about Weather
products.
Additional
Features
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances
without having to constantly search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites,
coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions. SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are
AFCS
subscription-based.
Annun/Alerts
ACTIVATING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICES

The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a coded ID (Radio
ID).
Appendix
Accessing the Radio ID:

View on the Data Link Information Page from the tab of the appropriate
device (GDU, GDL®).
Index
Additional Features
USING SiriusXM RADIO

Overview
System
The SXM Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features
of the SiriusXM Satellite Radio.
Instruments
Selecting the SXM Page:

Flight

2) Touch SiriusXM Audio.
EIS
Categories
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Selected Channel
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Signal Strength
Additional
Features
3 or 4 bars
Volume
AFCS
SXM Page
Annun/Alerts
Selecting a category:
From the SXM Page, touch to cycle through the categories or select from
the drop down list.
Appendix
Selecting a channel:
From the SXM Page, touch a Channel to select it.
Index
Or:
Touch the Now Playing Channel Button and enter the desired channel
number.
Additional Features
Adding a channel to Favorites:
Overview
System
1) From the SXM Page, touch a Channel to select it.
3) Touch Add to Favorites.
Instruments
Flight
Selecting Favorites:
From the SXM Page, touch to cycle through the categories until you see
the Favorites Category.
EIS
Deleting a channel from Favorites:
1) With a Favorite Channel selected, press the MENU Key.
Interface
CNS
2) Touch Remove Favorite.
3) Touch Yes.
Navigation
GPS
VOLUME
Adjusting the volume:
Planning
Flight
From the SXM Page, touch the volume, and touch the volume slider to
adjust the volume.
Or:
Avoidance
Hazard
Use the Knobs.
Additional
8.7 ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS (OPTIONAL) Features
NOTE: The information described in this section is not intended to replace

AFCS
the checklist information described in the AFM.

Annun/Alerts
NOTE: Garmin does not create, modify, or update G3X Touch checklists and
thus cannot be responsible for the availability and/or content.
Appendix
NOTE: Checklists cannot be edited from within the system.

Index
Additional Features
The G3X Touch is capable of displaying checklists (if available from the aircraft
Overview
manufacturer) which allow a pilot to quickly find the proper procedure on the ground
System
and during each phase of flight. The G3X Touch accesses the checklist file (*.ace) from
the root directory (/*.ace) of the SD card. If a checklist file is available on the SD card,
Instruments
the Checklists option is available from the Main Menu. The Checklist Editor may be
Flight
downloaded from the Updates & Downloads page which can be accessed via the G3X
or G3X Touch webpage.
EIS
8.8 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING USING THE SD CARD

Interface
CNS
The flight data logging feature automatically stores flight and engine data to an SD
card. Data is recorded to the SD card every second. A data file is created each time
the system is powered on with an SD card inserted, or each time an SD card is inserted
Navigation
GPS
after starting the system. A 2 GB SD card can store over 1,000 hours of flight data or
up to 1,000 files (whichever comes first). The data files stored on the SD card have
an extension of .csv. This file format can be opened using a spread sheet application.
Planning
Flight
Garmin recommends using a 8 GB SanDisk® or Toshiba® SD card.

Data Logging must be enabled in Configuration Mode.
Avoidance
Hazard
8.9 CONNEXT COCKPIT CONNECTIVITY

Additional
Features
Connext allows the sharing of data between devices via Bluetooth® or serial
connection. For example:
• Flight plans are wirelessly transferred from a mobile device to the G3X Touch or
AFCS
external navigator (if configured).

• An iOS or Android device (with Garmin Pilot™) paired with both a G3X Touch and
Annun/Alerts
another compatible device, shares GPS, attitude, traffic and weather data.
Visit www.flygarmin.com for a list of platforms that support Connext.
Appendix
Connext Bluetooth pairing recommendations:

• Do not attempt to pair the displays to each other in a multiple display installation.
• Turn off the Bluetooth transceiver for any display which is not using it.
Index
Additional Features
Overview
NOTE: In general one or two iOS or Android devices running Garmin Pilot
System
may be connected as shown below. Due to the wide variability of these
devices, the best user experience may, in some cases, be limited to a single
Instruments
mobile device connected to the system components.
Flight
Connext Bluetooth Supported Configurations
G3X Touch
iOS or
EIS
Android
One or two Android or iOS devices may

be connected to the G3X Touch iOS or
Android
Interface
CNS
G3X Touch
Navigation
GPS
One Android or iOS device may be con- iOS or Android
nected to both a GDL and a G3X Touch.
Planning
Flight
GDL
Avoidance
Hazard
G3X Touch
iOS* or Android
Additional
Features
A second Android or iOS device may be iOS or Android

GDL
connected to either a GDL or the G3X

Touch, but not both.
AFCS
G3X Touch
iOS* or Android
Annun/Alerts
iOS or Android
GDL
Appendix
Index
Additional Features
PAIRING THE G3X TOUCH WITH A BLUETOOTH DEVICE

Overview
System
Pairing the G3X Touch with a Bluetooth device:

Instruments
NOTE: For iOS and Android devices, the Bluetooth pairing to the G3X Touch
Flight
may be established from the iOS or Android Bluetooth settings page with
the G3X touch Bluetooth Setup Page selected and visible.
1) Power on the Bluetooth device and ensure Bluetooth is turned on in
EIS
Settings.
2) Refer to the iOS or Android device’s documentation for instructions on
Interface
making the device discoverable.

CNS
3) Refer to the iOS or Android device’s documentation for instructions on

finding the device name. Take note of the device name as it is the name
Navigation
you will want to select in step 8.

GPS

5) Touch Setup > Bluetooth.
Planning
Flight
6) Touch On. The G3X Touch will begin searching for devices.
7) When the G3X Touch has completed the search for available devices, touch
Avoidance
Not Paired next to the iOS or Android device to be paired.

Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Bluetooth Setup
Additional Features
8) The first time a device is paired, a Bluetooth Passkey Window may be
Overview
displayed to confirm what device you are attempting to pair with. Touch
System
OK to confirm the passkey. When the device is paired, Connected is
displayed next to the device.
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
Bluetooth Passkey Window
GPS
TRANSFERRING A FLIGHT PLAN
Planning
Flight
Transferring a flight plan from a Bluetooth device to the G3X
Touch:
1) If not already paired, pair the iOS or Android device to the G3X Touch.
Avoidance
Hazard
Refer to the previous procedure. NOTE: Previously paired devices can be
set to make future connections automatic.
2) Install (if not already installed) and open the Garmin Pilot App on the iOS/
Additional
Features
Android device.
3) If an external navigator is configured, touch FPL Source > Internal or
FPL Source > External on the Flight Plan Page of the G3X Touch.
AFCS
4) Send a flight plan to the G3X Touch from the Garmin Pilot App on the
device. Refer to the Garmin Pilot Help File for more information on sending
Annun/Alerts
a flight plan to a navigator.

5) Tell the G3X Touch or external navigator what to do with the transferred
flight plan:
Appendix
If FPL Source > Internal is selected on the Flight Plan Page, a Flight
Plan Received notification is displayed on the G3X Touch. Touch one of
the following:
Ignore: Discard the flight plan.
Index
Store: Save the flight plan to the Flight Plan List.

Activate: Activate the flight plan without saving it to the Flight Plan List.
Additional Features
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Flight Plan Received Notification

Or:
Navigation
If FPL Source > External is selected on the Flight Plan Page, the flight
GPS
plan is automatically pushed to the external navigator. A message flashes

on the external navigator to prompt the pilot to review and accept the
flight plan. The pilot can then choose to save or activate the transferred
Planning
Flight
flight plan on the external navigator.
FLIGHT DATA LOGGING IN GARMIN PILOT

Avoidance
Hazard
NOTE: Previous flights' data logs will NOT be synced to Garmin Pilot or
flygarmin.
Additional
Features
Flight Data Logging sends the CSV file to Garmin Pilot on an iOS device. When
transferred to the iOS device the Flight Data Log is attached to an appropriate logbook
entry, or a new one is created. The logbook entry with the Flight Data Log is also
AFCS
synced to flyGarmin.
Annun/Alerts
Transferring the flight data log (CSV file) to Garmin Pilot via Con-
next:
1) If not already paired, pair the iOS device to the G3X Touch. Refer to the
"Pairing the G3X Touch with a Bluetooth device" procedure above. NOTE:
Appendix
Previously paired devices can be set to make future connections automatic.

Index
Additional Features
2) Install (if not already installed) and open the Garmin Pilot App on the iOS
Overview
device.
System
3) If this is the first time using Flight Data Logging with Garmin Pilot, an alert
to consent to collection of flight data will appear. Tap Enable Data Log
Instruments
Transfer on Garmin Pilot.
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Tap to enable data log transfer
Flight Data Logging on Garmin Pilot
4) Tap the blue Connext icon in the app's bezel to display the status of the
Additional
Features
flight data collection.
Tap to display flight data collection status
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Flight Data
Log status
Flight Data Log Status on Garmin Pilot

Index
Additional Features
5) After the flight, disconnect from the avionics (power off the G3X Touch or
Overview
disable Bluetooth on the iOS device). The app will attach the flight log to
System
an existing logbook entry that matches the flight, or create a new one.
Instruments
NOTE: Tap to confirm the entire flight log is downloaded before turning
Flight
off the avionics.

6) From Garmin Pilot, tap Home > Logbook > Entries > Auto-Generated
Flight Logs to view the Flight Log.
EIS
7) Tap the Auto-Generated Flight Log and tap Accept to add the entry to the
logbook.
Interface
CNS
Auto-
Generated
Flight Logs Tap to add the
Navigation
Flight Log to the

GPS
logbook
Tap to share
Flight Log
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Flight Data Log on Garmin Pilot
8) Optional: From the logbook entry in Garmin Pilot, tap to share the
Additional
Features
Flight Data Log.

Pairing the G3X Touch to a GDL:
AFCS
NOTE: Lightning, Cloud Tops Forecast, Turbulence Forecast, and Icing Forecast
FIS-B weather products are only available over a Bluetooth connection. Even
Annun/Alerts
if the G3X Touch is connected via RS-232 to the ADS-B receiver, it is recom-
mended to add a Bluetooth connection to receive these weather products.
1) Power on the GDL. The GDL will automatically enter Bluetooth pairing
Appendix
mode.
3) Touch Setup > Bluetooth.
Index
4) If Bluetooth is set to Off, touch the Bluetooth .
Additional Features
5) Touch On. The G3X Touch will begin searching for devices.
Overview
System
6) When the G3X Touch has completed the search for available devices, touch
Not Paired next to the GDL.
7) The first time a device is paired, a Bluetooth Passkey Screen will be
Instruments
Flight
displayed to confirm what device you are attempting to pair with. Touch
OK to confirm the passkey. When the device is paired, Connected is
displayed next to the device.
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Bluetooth Setup
8) Press the BACK Key twice and touch Data Link to display the device
Planning
Flight
information.
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Data Link Information
Additional Features
The Bluetooth Setup Menu provides several options for connecting to Bluetooth
Overview
devices. Manage Paired Devices can enable Automatic Reconnect and remove
System
connections on a per-device basis. Forget all devices will remove all Bluetooth
connections. Edit GDU Name is used to change the name the G3X Touch shows
Instruments
other devices while pairing. Restore Default will disable Bluetooth and remove all
Flight
Bluetooth connections.
Managing Connected Bluetooth Devices:
EIS
From the Main Menu, touch Setup > Bluetooth > Menu.
8.10 ELECTRONIC STABILITY & PROTECTION (ESP-X)

Interface
CNS
WARNING: Do not assume ESP-X will provide stability protection in all

circumstances. There are in-flight situations that can exceed the capabilities
Navigation
GPS
of ESP-X technology.
NOTE: Non-Garmin autopilot installations are not supported for ESP-X. ESP-X
Planning
requires the optional GFC 500 autopilot.

Flight
Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP) is an optional feature that is intended to

monitor the aircraft and provide control input feedback when necessary to discourage
Avoidance
Hazard
operating the aircraft at potentially unsafe attitudes and/or airspeeds. If enabled,

this feature will automatically arm when the aircraft is above 500 feet AGL and the
autopilot is not engaged, and disarm when below 200 feet AGL.
Additional
Features
When selected, ESP engages automatically when the aircraft approaches or exceeds
one or more predetermined airspeed or attitude limitations. Stability protection
for each flight axis is provided by the autopilot servos, which apply force to the
AFCS
appropriate control surface(s) to discourage pilot control inputs that would cause the
aircraft to exceed the normal or "protected" flight envelope. This is perceived by the
Annun/Alerts
pilot as resistance to control movement in the undesired direction when the aircraft
approaches a steep attitude, and/or the airspeed is below the minimum or above the
maximum configured airspeed.
Appendix
As the aircraft deviates further from the normal attitude and/or airspeed, the
force increases proportionally (up to an established maximum) to encourage control
movement in the direction necessary to return to the normal attitude and/or airspeed
Index
range.
Additional Features
When ESP has been engaged for more than ten seconds (cumulative; not necessarily
Overview
consecutive seconds) of a 20-second interval, the autopilot can be configured to
System
engage with the flight director in Level Mode, bringing the aircraft into level flight. An
aural “Engaging Autopilot” alert is played and the flight director mode annunciation
Instruments
will indicate ‘LVL’ for vertical and lateral modes.
Flight
Level mode as activated by ESP is limited by altitude. ESP will not be able to activate
Level mode until the aircraft climbs above 2000 feet AGL. ESP will be locked out of
automatically activating Level mode after the aircraft descends below 1500 feet AGL
EIS
as well. Also note that Level mode as activated by ESP is different than manually
selected Level mode. Manually selected Level mode is not limited by altitude at all.
Interface
CNS
NOTE: If AGL height data is unavailable (i.e., GPS altitude or terrain data is
unavailable), automatic engagement of Level mode is not supported.
Navigation
GPS
The pilot can interrupt ESP by pressing and holding the Autopilot Disconnect / Control
Wheel Steering (AP DISC) switch. Upon releasing the AP DISC switch, ESP force will
again be applied. ESP can also be overridden by overpowering the servo’s torque limit.
Planning
Flight
ESP is configured on the Electronic Stability Configuration page in Configuration
Mode. Refer to the Installation Manual for more information on configuring ESP.
Avoidance
ESP is enabled or disabled from the Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) page or
Hazard
using an externally wired ESP discrete switch.
Enabling/disabling ESP using the G3X Touch Autopilot Interface:
Additional
Features
1) From the PFD, touch the Autopilot Status Box. The Automatic Flight Control
System page is displayed.
Or:
AFCS
From the Main Menu, touch Flight Controls.

2) Touch the ESP button on the Automatic Flight Control System page to
Annun/Alerts
enable/disable ESP.
ESP can be configured to be automatically enabled when starting the system.
Appendix
Index
Additional Features
Autopilot Status
Box - Touch To
Overview
ESP Roll Engage- G3X Touch Touch To

System
ment Indication Display the G3X Touch Autopilot Enable/

(ESP NOT Engaged) Autopilot Interface Interface Disable ESP
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
AFCS (ESP Enabled)
ROLL ENGAGEMENT
Avoidance
Hazard
Roll Limit Indicators displayed on the roll scale are configurable between 45º and
60º right and left, indicating where ESP will engage. As roll attitude exceeds the
Additional
Features
configured limit, ESP will engage and the Roll Limit Indicators will move to 15º less
than the configured ESP bank limit. The Roll Limit Indicator now indicates where ESP
will disengage as roll attitude decreases.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Additional Features
Roll Limit Indicator

ESP Engage (45º)
Overview
System
(Configurable)
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
ESP Roll Engagement Indication (ESP Enabled but NOT Engaged)
ESP Engage (45º)(Configurable) ESP Disengage (30º)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 35º (15º < Configured Bank Limit)
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
Roll Increasing to ESP Engagement

AFCS
Once engaged, the torque applied by ESP is at its maximum when bank angle is
Annun/Alerts
15º more than the configured bank limit, and tapers to the minimum applied torque
when the bank angle is 15º less than the configured bank limit. The force increases
as roll attitude increases and decreases as roll attitude decreases. The applied force is
intended to encourage pilot input to return the airplane to a more normal roll attitude.
Appendix
When beyond 15º of the configured bank limit, the maximum torque is held until the
aircraft returns inside the protected envelope.
Index
Additional Features
Minimum Minimum
ESP Torque 0º ESP Torque
Overview
10º 10º
System
20º 20º
(30º) 30
º 30
º
(30º)
Configured 45º Configured
45
Instruments
Bank Limit Bank Limit
º
Flight
(45º) (45º)
º
60
60º
Maximum Maximum
ESP Torque ESP Torque
75º
(60º)
75º
(60º)
EIS
90º
90º
Interface
CNS
ESP Roll Operating Range When Engaged

(Force Increases as Roll Increases & Decreases as Roll Decreases)
Navigation
PITCH ENGAGEMENT
GPS
ESP pitch engagement is configurable between 10º and 25º nose-up and between
5º and 25º nose-down. Once engaged, the torque applied by ESP is at its maximum
Planning
Flight
when pitch is 5º more than the configured nose-up and nose-down pitch limits, and
tapers to the minimum applied torque when pitch is 5º less than the configured nose-
up and nose-down pitch limits. When beyond 5º of the configured pitch limit, the
Avoidance
Hazard
maximum torque is held until the aircraft returns inside the protected envelope.
The opposing force increases or decreases depending on the pitch angle and the
Additional
Features
direction of pitch travel. This force is intended to encourage movement in the pitch axis
in the direction of the normal pitch attitude range for the aircraft.
The presence of yellow chevrons indicate that ESP is engaged in these nose-up/
AFCS
nose-down conditions.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
ESP Engaged (Nose-Low) ESP Engaged (Nose-High)

Index
Additional Features
50˚ 50˚
Overview
System
45˚ 45˚
40˚ 40˚
35˚ 35˚
Instruments
ESP
Flight
30˚ 30˚
Maximum 25˚ 25˚
ESP Torque
20˚ 20˚ Configured Roll Limit (20º)
(25º)
EIS
15˚ 15˚ Minimum
ESP Torque
10˚ 10˚
(15º)
5˚ 5˚
Interface
CNS
0˚ 0˚
5˚ 5˚
Navigation
10˚ 10˚ Minimum
GPS
15˚ 15˚ ESP Torque
Configured Roll Limit (-17.5º)
20˚ 20˚ (-12.5º)
Maximum
25˚ 25˚
Planning
ESP Torque
Flight
(-22.5º) 30˚ 30˚
ESP
35˚ 35˚
Avoidance
40˚ 40˚
Hazard
45˚ 45˚
50˚ 50˚
Additional
Features
ESP Pitch Operating Range When Engaged
(Force Increases as Pitch Increases & Decreases as Pitch Decreases)
AIRSPEED PROTECTION
AFCS
NOTE: If AGL height data is unavailable (i.e., GPS altitude or terrain data is
Annun/Alerts
unavailable), low-airspeed protection is not supported.
An airspeed below the minimum configured airspeed or above maximum

configured airspeed will result in ESP applying force to raise or lower the nose
Appendix
of the aircraft. When the high or low airspeed condition is remedied, ESP
force is no longer applied. An audible "Airspeed" alert may be configured.
Index
Additional Features
8.11 CARBON MONOXIDE (CO) DETECTOR

Overview
System
(OPTIONAL)
Instruments
Flight
NOTE: Refer to the approved Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for emergency
procedures.
If a carbon monoxide (CO) detector is installed, the current CO measurement in parts

EIS
per million (ppm) can be displayed in the Data Bar.

Displaying the current CO measurement in the Data Bar field:
Interface
CNS

2) Touch Setup > Data Fields > Change....
Navigation

GPS
4) Touch CO PPM from the list of data fields.

Carbon monoxide levels are recorded in the G3X Touch data log file as well.
Planning
Flight
CO Measurement In PPM
Avoidance
Hazard
Data Bar
In the event high CO levels are detected, the CO data field will flash yellow (if
Additional
Features
displayed) and a CO LEVEL CAS Message is displayed.

AFCS
CO Data Bar Field (High CO) High CO CAS Message (PFD)

Annun/Alerts
If the carbon monoxide (CO) detector is inoperative, a CO FAIL CAS Message is

displayed.
Appendix
CO Detector is Inoperative
Index
AFCS
SECTION 9 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL
Overview
System
SYSTEMS (OPTIONAL)
Instruments
Flight
NOTE: This section describes capabilities and functions of the optional Garmin
GFC 500 autopilot system unless otherwise noted.
EIS
NOTE: The approved Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) always supersedes
the information in this Pilot’s Guide.
Interface
CNS
NOTE: Refer to the approved Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for emergency
procedures.
Navigation
GPS
NOTE: VOR, LOC, and GS modes are all GPS-aided. You must have a GPS
position to use VOR, LOC, or GS modes.
Planning
Flight
AFCS SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
An Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) is typically comprised of two major
Avoidance
components: A Flight Director (FD) and Autopilot servos. The Flight Director provides
Hazard
pitch and roll commands to the autopilot servos. These pitch and rolls commands are
displayed on the PFD as Command Bars. When the Flight Director is active the pitch
Additional
and roll commands can be hand-flown by the pilot or when coupled with the flight Features
director, the autopilot servos drive the flight controls to follow the commands issued by
the Flight Director. The Flight Director operates independently of the autopilot servos,
but in most cases the autopilot servos can not operate independent of the Flight
AFCS
Director. On G3X Touch™ installations that do not have a separate and independent
Flight Director, the Flight Director is always coupled to the autopilot. The autopilot and
Annun/Alerts
optional yaw damper operate the flight control surface servos to provide automatic
flight control.
Appendix
Index
AFCS
AFCS AND YAW DAMPER OPERATION

Overview
System
The optional yaw damper reduces Dutch roll tendencies, coordinates turns, and
provides a steady force to maintain directional trim. It can operate independently
Instruments
of the autopilot and may be used during normal hand-flight maneuvers. Yaw rate
Flight
commands are limited to 6 deg/sec by the yaw damper.
FLIGHT CONTROL
EIS
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos based on the active flight director
modes. Yaw commands are provided by the yaw servo. Servo motor control limits the
Interface
maximum servo speed and torque. Torque values are set at installation. This allows
CNS
the servos to be overridden in case of an emergency. Non-Garmin autopilot systems

may not allow servos to be overridden, consult the non-Garmin autopilot documents
Navigation
for limitations.
GPS
Pitch Axis and Trim

Planning
Flight
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during
flight director maneuvers. Flight director pitch commands are rate and attitude-limited,
combined with pitch damper control, and sent to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo
Avoidance
Hazard
measures the output effort (torque) and optionally provides this signal to the pitch trim
motor. The pitch servo commands the pitch trim motor to reduce the average pitch
servo effort.
Additional
Features
Roll Axis
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during flight
AFCS
director maneuvers. The flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited,
combined with roll damper control, and sent to the roll servo motor.
Annun/Alerts
Yaw Axis
The optional yaw damper uses yaw rate and roll attitude to dampen the aircraft’s
Appendix
natural Dutch roll response. It also uses lateral acceleration to coordinate turns and
reduce or eliminate the need for the pilot to use rudder pedal force to maintain
coordinated flight during climbs and descents.
Index
AFCS
G3X TOUCH AFCS STATUS BOX
Overview
System
The AFCS status box displays Autopilot (AP), Optional Yaw Damper (YD), Flight
Director (FD) mode annunciations on the PFD, and Autopilot Preflight Test (PFT).
Instruments
Autopilot (AP) status is displayed on the far left of the G3X Touch Autopilot Status
Flight
Box. Lateral modes are displayed in the center, and vertical modes are displayed on
the right. Armed modes are displayed in white and active in green.
EIS
Flight Director
Autopilot Modes
and
Yaw Damper
Interface
Status Lateral Modes Vertical Modes
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Active Active Active Active Armed
Autopilot Status Box
Planning
Flight
Selected
Avoidance
Altitude
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Autopilot Display
AFCS
Autopilot
Preflight Test
Overview
System
Instruments
Autopilot Preflight Test

Flight
9.1 AFCS OPERATION

EIS
When a GMC AFCS Mode Control Unit is installed AFCS functionality is distributed
across the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
Interface
CNS
• GDU™ 4X0 Display Units • GSA 28 AFCS Pitch/Roll/Yaw

• GSU 25D ADAHRS Unit Damper/Pitch Trim servos
Navigation
GPS
• GMC AFCS Mode Control Unit

Planning
Flight
The AFCS system can be divided into these main operating functions:
• Flight Director (FD) — Flight director operation takes place within the GDU™
Avoidance
460. Flight director commands are displayed on the PFD. The flight director provides:
Hazard
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance

– Vertical/lateral mode selection and processing
Additional
Features
– Autopilot communication
• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, roll, and yaw
AFCS
servos. It also provides servo monitoring and automatic flight control in response
to flight director steering commands, Air Data and Attitude and Heading Reference
System (ADAHRS) attitude, rate information, and airspeed.
Annun/Alerts
• Yaw Damper (YD) — The yaw servo (optional), is self-monitoring and provides
Dutch roll damping and turn coordination in response to yaw rate, roll angle, lateral
Appendix
acceleration, and airspeed. If installed the YD comes on when the autopilot is engaged
and stays on after disengaging the autopilot. The YD can be turned on/off independent
of the autopilot using the YD Key.
Index
• Manual Electric Trim (MET) — Manual electric trim provides trim capability for
the pitch axis when the autopilot is not engaged.
AFCS
The G3X Touch can also communicate with various non-Garmin autopilot units. With
Overview
an appropriate non-Garmin autopilot installed and the G3X Touch Analog Autopilot
System
Interface is configured (refer to the G3X Touch Installation Manual), the G3X Touch
issues course and heading information to the autopilot unit. The autopilot unit is then
Instruments
responsible for moving the flight controls. The G3X Touch system will not display flight
Flight
director, modes, or annunciations for a non-Garmin autopilot system.
NOTE: Refer to the G3X Touch Installation Manual and the non-Garmin
EIS
autopilot vendor documentation for information on installing and configuring
the G3X Touch Analog Autopilot Interface.
Interface
CNS
NOTE: Refer to the non-Garmin autopilot vendor documentation for stand-
alone autopilot functionality and control features.
Navigation
GPS
NOTE: When the autopilot is engaged with auto trim enabled, moving the
MET Switch will disengage the autopilot.
Planning
Flight
AFCS PRE-FLIGHT ACTIONS
To ensure the Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) is operating properly prior to
Avoidance
Hazard
flight, perform the following Garmin recommended preflight checks.
Before takeoff checklist - Garmin GFC 500:
Additional
1) Autopilot - ENGAGE (using AP button, or AP button on mode controller) Features
2) Flight controls - CHECK (verify autopilot can be overpowered in both pitch

and roll)
AFCS
3) AP DISC button - PRESS (verify autopilot disengages and audio alert is

heard)
Annun/Alerts
4) Verify yaw damper - OFF (if installed) (verify yaw damper disengages and
audio alert is heard)
5) Flight director - SET FOR TAKEOFF (select TO or VS mode or push FD Button
to turn off the Flight Director)
Appendix
6) Flight controls - CHECK (verify autopilot servos are disengaged from pitch,
roll, and yaw controls, and all controls move freely)
7) Elevator trim control - SET FOR TAKEOFF
Index
AFCS
AFCS CONTROLS
Overview
System
GMC 507 AFCS CONTROLS

The GMC 507 AFCS Control Units have the following controls:
Instruments
Flight
1 HDG Key Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode

2 NAV Key Selects/deselects Navigation Mode. Cancels GS
EIS
Mode if LOC Mode is either active or armed.

Cancels GP Mode if GPS Mode is either active or
armed. Cancels LOC Mode if GPS Mode is active
Interface
CNS
and LOC Mode is armed.

3 AP Key Engages/disengages the autopilot
Navigation
4 LVL Key Engages the autopilot (if the autopilot is

GPS
disengaged) in level vertical and lateral modes

5 NOSE UP/DN Wheel Adjusts the vertical mode reference in Pitch Hold,
Planning
Flight
Vertical Speed, Indicated Airspeed, and Altitude

Hold modes
6 IAS Key Selects/deselects Indicated Airspeed Mode
Avoidance
Hazard
7 ALT Key Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode

8 VNV Key Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for
Additional
Vertical Navigation flight control

Features
9 VS Key Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode

10 YD Key (if installed) Engages/disengages the yaw damper
AFCS
11 FD Key Activates/deactivates the flight director only

Pressing once turns on the director in the default
Annun/Alerts
vertical and lateral modes. Pressing again

deactivates the flight director and removes the
Command Bars. If the autopilot is engaged, the key
is disabled.
Appendix
12 APR Key Selects/deselects Approach Mode

13 HDG/TRK Knob Selects the desired Heading/Track
14 ALT SEL Knob Selects the desired Altitude setting
Index
15 TRK Key Selects/deselects Track (TRK) Mode
AFCS
Overview
System
13 12 3 4 5 6 14
Instruments
Flight
EIS
1 2 15 11 10 9 89 7
Interface
CNS
GMC 507 AFCS Control Unit
Navigation
GPS
G3X TOUCH AUTOPILOT INTERFACE
Accessing the G3X Touch AFCS interface:
Planning
Flight
Touch the AFCS Status Box on the PFD.
Or:
Avoidance
Hazard
2) Touch the Flight Controls button.
See figure on following page to view on screen controls.
Additional
Features
HDG Selects/deselects heading mode
NAV Selects/deselects navigation mode. Cancels GS Mode if LOC
Mode is either active or armed. Cancels GP Mode if GPS Mode
AFCS
is either active or armed. Cancels LOC Mode if GPS Mode is

active and LOC Mode is armed.
Annun/Alerts
TRK Selects/deselects track mode

AP Engages/disengages the autopilot.
LVL Engages the autopilot (if the autopilot is disengaged) in level
Appendix
vertical and lateral modes

Nose Up / Nose Adjusts the vertical mode reference in Pitch Hold, Vertical
Down Speed, Indicated Airspeed, and Altitude Hold modes
Index
IAS Selects/deselects Indicated Airspeed Mode

ALT Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
AFCS
VNAV Selects/deselects vertical navigation

Overview
System
or
APPR
Selects/deselects approach mode
Instruments
VS Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode

Flight
FD Activates/deactivates the flight director only

EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
G3X Touch AFCS Controls

Appendix
Index
AFCS
The following AFCS controls are located separately from the GDU and GMC 507
Overview
AFCS Control Unit:
System
AP DISC Button Press and release the AP DISC Button to disengage the
Instruments
(Autopilot Disconnect) autopilot. Pressing and releasing the button again will
Flight
acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the
associated aural tone.
Pressing and holding the AP DISC Button will also
EIS
interrupt Manual Electric Trim.
TO/GA Button Selects flight director Takeoff (on ground) or Go Around (in
Interface
(Takeoff/Go Around) air) Mode
CNS
When properly configured with a GTN™, if an approach
procedure is loaded, this switch also activates the missed
Navigation
approach when the selected navigation source is GPS
GPS
or when the navigation source is VOR/LOC and a valid
frequency has been tuned.
Planning
Flight
MET Switch Used to command manual electric trim for the pitch servo.
(Manual Electric Trim)
Avoidance
Hazard
ENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT
An initial press of the AP Key on the GMC control unit will activate the Flight Director
Additional
Features
and engage the autopilot in the default PIT and ROL modes.
DISENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT

AFCS
NOTE: When the autopilot is engaged with auto trim enabled, moving the
Annun/Alerts
MET Switch will disengage the AP.
The Autopilot is manually disengaged by pushing the autopilot disconnect button on

the pilot's flight controls or by pressing the AP Key on the GMC control unit. Manual
Appendix
disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘AP’ annunciation and an

aural alert. Cancel the aural alert by pressing and releasing the AP Button again or
by touching the 'AP' annunciation in the Autopilot Status Box at the top of the PFD.
Index
AFCS
Automatic disengagement is indicated by a flashing red ‘AP’ annunciation and

Overview
an aural alert. Touch to acknowledge or touch Back to acknowledge. Automatic

System
disengagement occurs due to:

• System failure
Instruments
Flight
• Invalid sensor data

• Inability to compute default autopilot modes
EIS
Disengaging the autopilot when a malfunction is suspected

If an autopilot failure or trim failure is suspected to have occurred, perform the
Interface
CNS
following steps:
1) Firmly grasp the control wheel.
Navigation
2) Press and hold the AP DISC Switch. The autopilot will disconnect and power
GPS
is removed from the trim motor. Power is also removed from all primary
servo motors and engaged solenoids. Note the visual and aural alerting
Planning
indicating autopilot disconnect.

Flight
3) Retrim the aircraft as needed. Substantial trim adjustment may be needed.

4) Pull the appropriate Autopilot and Trim Switch (if installed) circuit breaker(s)
Avoidance
Hazard
to electrically isolate the servo and solenoid components.

5) Release the AP DISC Switch.
Additional
Overpowering Autopilot Servos

Features
In the context of this discussion, “overpowering” refers to any pressure or force

applied to the pitch controls when the autopilot is engaged. A small amount of
AFCS
pressure or force on the pitch controls can cause the autopilot automatic trim to run to
an out-of-trim condition. Therefore, any application of pressure or force to the controls
Annun/Alerts
should be avoided when the autopilot is engaged.

Overpowering the autopilot during flight will cause the autopilot’s automatic trim to
run, resulting in an out-of-trim condition or cause the trim to hit the stop if the action
Appendix
is prolonged. In this case, larger than anticipated control forces are required after the
autopilot is disengaged.
Index
AFCS
The following steps should be added to the preflight check:
Overview
System
1) Check for proper autopilot operation and ensure the autopilot can be
overpowered.
2) Note the forces required to overpower the autopilot servo clutches.
Instruments
Flight
FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the pilot and
EIS
autopilot, which are displayed on the PFD. With the flight director active, the aircraft
can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars. The Flight Director
has the following maximum commands: pitch (-15°, +20°) and roll (30°) angles.
Interface
CNS
Flight Director Indicator Type
Navigation
The Flight Director Indicator Type controls whether the flight director command
GPS
indicator on the PFD uses a single-cue or dual-cue presentation.
Setting the Flight Director Indicator Type:
Planning
Flight
1) From the PFD1, press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Touch Setup > Flight Director.
Avoidance
Hazard
3) In the Indicator Type field, touch Single Cue or Dual Cue.
ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR USING THE GMC 507

Additional
Features
An initial press of a key listed in the table below (when the flight director is not
active) activates the flight director in the listed modes. The flight director may be
turned off and the Command Bars removed from the display by pressing the FD Key
AFCS
again. The FD Key is disabled when the autopilot is engaged.

Modes Selected
Control Pressed
Annun/Alerts
Lateral Vertical
FD Key Roll Hold (default) ROL Pitch Hold (default) PIT
AP Key Roll Hold (default) ROL Pitch Hold (default) PIT
Appendix
Takeoff (on ground)Go TO Takeoff (on ground)Go TO

TO/GA Button
Around (in air) GA Around (in air) GA
ALT Key Roll Hold (default) ROL Altitude Hold ALT
Index
VS Key Roll Hold (default) ROL Vertical Speed VS
AFCS
Modes Selected
Overview
Control Pressed
System
Lateral Vertical
VNV Key Roll Hold (default) ROL Vertical Navigation* VNAV
Instruments
IAS Key Roll Hold (default) ROL Indicated Airspeed IAS

Flight
GPS
APR Key Approach** VOR Pitch Hold (default) PIT
LOC
EIS
GPS
VOR
NAV Key Navigation** Pitch Hold (default) PIT
LOC
Interface
CNS
BC
HDG Key Heading Select HDG Pitch Hold (default) PIT
Navigation
TRK Key Track Select TRK Pitch Hold (default) PIT

GPS
LVL Key Level Hold LVL Level Hold LVL

*Valid VNV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates flight director.
Planning
Flight
**The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course before
NAV or APR Key press activates flight director.
Avoidance
Flight Director Activation (GMC 507)

Hazard
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES

Additional
Features
Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes.
Unless otherwise specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off).
In the absence of specific mode selection, the flight director reverts to the default pitch
and/or roll modes.
AFCS
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box.
Under normal operation, when the control for the active flight director mode is pressed,
Annun/Alerts
the flight director reverts to the default mode(s) for the axis(es). Automatic transition
from armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode annunciation moving
to the green active mode field and flashing for 10 seconds.
Appendix
Index
AFCS
If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or
Overview
unavailable, the flight director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis.
System
A flashing yellow mode annunciation and annunciator light indicate loss of sensor
(ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS, VNAV) required to compute commands.
Instruments
When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level (enters
Flight
Roll Hold Mode) or maintain the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on
the affected axis. The flashing annunciation stops when the affected mode key is
pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. If after 10 seconds no action is taken,
EIS
the flashing annunciation stops.
The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to
Interface
CNS
compute the default flight director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.
Autopilot
Navigation
Status
GPS
Planning
Flight
Autopilot Manually Disengaged
Avoidance
Hazard
COMMAND BARS
Single Cue
Additional
Features
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed in magenta on
the PFD. If the aircraft is being flown by hand, the command bars are displayed hollow.
The Command Bars do not override the Aircraft Symbol. The Command Bars move
AFCS
together vertically to indicate pitch commands and bank left or right to indicate roll
commands.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
AFCS
Hollow Single Cue Command Bars (Pilot Hand Flying Aircraft, FD Only)
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
Solid Single Cue Command Bars (Autopilot Engaged)

EIS
Interface
CNS
Aircraft Symbol
Command Bars (Single Cue)

Navigation
GPS
Dual Cue
Planning
Flight
The Dual Cue Command Bars are useful to visually separate pitch from roll when
flying the aircraft by hand.
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Dual Cue Command Bars Dual Cue Command Bars

Command Bars (Dual Cue)
Appendix
If the attitude information being sent to the flight director becomes invalid or
unavailable, the Command Bars are removed from the display.
Index
AFCS
9.2 VERTICAL MODES
Overview
System
The table lists the vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations.
The mode reference is displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold,
Instruments
Flight
Vertical Speed, and Indicated Airspeed modes. The NOSE UP/DN Wheel (GMC control
unit) or the on-screen VS MODE can be used to change the vertical mode reference
while operating under Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Indicated Airspeed, or Altitude Hold
modes. Increments of change of values for each of these references using the NOSE
EIS
UP/DN Wheel, are also listed in the table.
Interface
Reference
CNS
Vertical
Description Control Annunciation Change
Mode
Increment
Navigation
Holds the current aircraft
GPS
pitch attitude; may be used to
Pitch Hold (default) PIT 0.5°
climb/descend to the Selected
Altitude
Planning
Flight
Selected
Altitude Captures the Selected Altitude * ALTS
Avoidance
Capture
Hazard
ALT Key
10 ft
(GMC
Altitude
Additional
Holds the current Altitude 507) or ALT nnnnn ft Features
Hold
ALT G3X
Touch
AFCS
VS Key
Maintains the current aircraft (GMC
Vertical vertical speed; may be used to 507)
Annun/Alerts
VS nnnn fpm 100 fpm

Speed climb/descend to the Selected or
Altitude VS G3X
Touch
Appendix
Maintains the current aircraft

Indicated
airspeed in IAS while the
Airspeed IAS Key IAS nnn kt 1 kt
aircraft is climbing/descending
(IAS)
Index
to the Selected Altitude
AFCS
Reference
Vertical
Overview
System
Description Control Annunciation Change

Mode
Increment
VNAV
Instruments
Flight
Vertical Captures and tracks descent G3X

VNAV
Navigation legs of an active vertical profile Touch/
GMC 507
EIS
VNV Target Captures the Vertical

Altitude Navigation (VNV) Target ** ALTV
Capture Altitude
Interface
CNS
Captures and tracks the SBAS APR Key

Glidepath GP
glidepath on approach (GMC
507)
Navigation
GPS
or
Captures and tracks the ILS
Glideslope APPR GS
glideslope on approach
G3X
Planning
Flight
Touch
Commands a constant pitch
Avoidance
angle and wings level on

Hazard
Takeoff TO
ground in preparation for TO/GA
takeoff Button
Additional
Commands a constant pitch

Features
Go Around GA
angle and wings level in the air
* ALTS armed automatically when PIT, VS, IAS, or GA active, and under VNAV when Selected Altitude
is to be captured instead of VNV Target Altitude
AFCS
** ALTV armed automatically under VNAV when VNV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of
Selected Altitude
Annun/Alerts
Flight Director Vertical Modes

Appendix
Index
AFCS
PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)
Overview
System
When the flight director is activated (FD touched) or when the Autopilot is activated,
Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default. Pitch Hold Mode is indicated as the active
Instruments
vertical mode by the green ‘PIT’ annunciation. This mode may be used for climb or
Flight
descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude
Capture Mode is automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude. The pitch
EIS
reference is set to the aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the
aircraft pitch attitude exceeds the flight director pitch command limitations, the flight
Interface
director commands a pitch angle equal to the nose-up/down limit.
CNS
CHANGING THE PITCH REFERENCE:
Navigation
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by
GPS
using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel (GMC control unit) or by touching Nose Up
or Nose Down on the G3X Touch.
Planning
Flight
Selected Altitude
Pitch Hold Capture Mode
Mode Active Armed
Avoidance
Hazard
Selected
Altitude
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Pitch Hold & Selected Altitude Capture Modes

Index
AFCS
SELECTED ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTS)

Overview
System
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the

following modes:
Instruments
Flight
• Pitch Hold • Vertical Path Tracking (if the

• Vertical Speed Selected Altitude is to be
captured instead of the VNV
• Indicated Airspeed
EIS
Target Altitude)
• TO/GA (GMC control unit)
Interface
CNS
The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed.
Touch the autopilot on the PFD and touch ALT. Use the large knob associated with
Navigation
GPS
the PFD and adjust the Selected Altitude until the Selected Altitude Capture Mode
becomes active.
Planning
Flight
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions
Avoidance
Hazard
to Selected Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic
transition is indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds
and the appearance of the white ‘ALTS’ annunciation. The Selected Altitude is shown
Additional
Features
as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTS’ annunciation.

Automatic transition to ALTS
Mode with ALT Mode armed
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions
from Selected Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the reference altitude.
As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active, the white ‘ALTS’ annunciation moves to the
Appendix
active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to indicate the automatic
transition.
Automatic transition to ALTS
Index
Mode with ALT Mode armed
AFCS
Setting the selected altitude (Integrated Autopilot Interface):
Overview
System
Touch the Autopilot Status Box, and use the Altitude knob on the PFD to
select the desired Selected Altitude.
Or:
Instruments
Flight
Touch the Selected Altitude on the PFD, and use the keypad to enter the
desired Selected Altitude.
Setting the selected altitude (GMC 507):
EIS
Press the AP key, and use the ALT SEL Knob.
Or:
Interface
CNS
Touch the Selected Altitude on the PFD, and use the keypad to enter the
desired Selected Altitude.
Changing the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude Capture Mode is
Navigation
GPS
active causes the autopilot to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with Selected Altitude
Capture Mode armed for the new Selected Altitude.
Planning
Flight
ALTITUDE HOLD MODE (ALT)
Altitude Hold Mode can be activated by touching ALT or ALT Key (GMC
Avoidance
control unit); the AFCS maintains the current aircraft altitude (to the nearest
Hazard
10 feet) as the Altitude Reference. The Altitude Reference, shown in the G3X
Touch Autopilot Status Box, is independent of the Selected Altitude, displayed
Additional
above the Altimeter. Altitude Hold Mode active is indicated by a green ‘ALT’ Features
annunciation in the G3X Touch Autopilot Status Box.

Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when in Selected Altitude
AFCS
Capture Mode. Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically transitions to

Altitude Hold Mode when within 50 feet of the Selected Altitude. In this case,
the Selected Altitude becomes the Altitude Reference.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
AFCS
CHANGING THE ALTITUDE REFERENCE

Overview
System
When operating in Altitude Hold Mode, the Altitude Reference can be

adjusted in the following ways:
Instruments
• The Altitude Reference can be adjusted up or down in 10-foot

Flight
increments by Higher Alt or Lower Alt or rolling the NOSE UP/DN

Wheel (GMC control unit). Using this method, up to 200 feet of
altitude change can be commanded. To change the Altitude Reference
EIS
by more the 200 feet, climb/descend using another vertical mode (PIT,
VS) to capture the desired Selected Altitude.
Interface
CNS
Altitude Hold Altitude

Navigation
Mode Active Reference

GPS
Planning
Altitude Hold Mode

Flight
VERTICAL SPEED MODE (VS)

Avoidance
Hazard
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed
Reference. Current aircraft vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical
Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical Speed Mode activation. This mode may be
Additional
Features
used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) since
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when Vertical Speed Mode is
selected.
AFCS
When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key (GMC control unit)
or touching VS, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the Autopilot Status Box along with
Annun/Alerts
the Vertical Speed Reference. The Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed above the
Vertical Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical
Speed Reference is shown on the indicator.
Appendix
Index
AFCS
CHANGING THE VERTICAL SPEED REFERENCE
Overview
System
The Vertical Speed Reference may be adjusted in the following ways:
• Use the NOSE UP/DN Wheel (GMC control unit) or touch the autopilot,
Instruments
touch VS, and touch Nose Up or Nose Down to adjust the Vertical Speed
Flight
Reference in increments of 100 fpm. The current Vertical Speed Reference
is displayed in the G3X Touch Autopilot Status Box for 10 seconds after a
change is made and as a reference bug on the Vertical Speed Indicator.
EIS
Interface
CNS
Vertical Speed Vertical Speed
Navigation
GPS
Vertical Speed Mode
Planning
Flight
INDICATED AIRSPEED MODE (IAS)
Indicated Airspeed Mode is selected by touching IAS on the PFD and selecting either
Avoidance
Faster or Slower, or by pressing the IAS button on the GMC control unit and adjusting
Hazard
the Nose UP/DN Wheel. This mode acquires and maintains the Airspeed Reference
(IAS) while climbing or descending. When Indicated Airspeed Mode is active, the flight
Additional
director continuously monitors Selected Altitude, airspeed and altitude. Features
The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation.
Indicated Airspeed Mode is indicated by a green ‘IAS’ annunciation beside the Airspeed
AFCS
Reference in the Autopilot Status Box. The Airspeed Reference is also displayed as a
cyan bug corresponding to the Airspeed Reference along the airspeed tape.
Annun/Alerts
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch
attitude corresponding to the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining
the Airspeed Reference.
Appendix
NOTE: If IAS Mode is selected while aircraft is stopped on ground, airspeed

is set to Vy.
Index
AFCS
CHANGING THE AIRSPEED REFERENCE

Overview
System
The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the Autopilot Status Box and above the
Airspeed Indicator) may be adjusted by using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel or by touching
Instruments
Nose Up or Nose Down in the AFCS Window.

Flight
IAS Speed Airspeed

EIS
Indicated Airspeed Mode

Interface
CNS
VERTICAL NAVIGATION MODE (VNAV)

Navigation
GPS
NOTE: If another vertical mode is touched while VNAV Mode is selected,

VNAV Mode reverts to armed.
Planning
Flight
NOTE: VNAV mode will not capture a descending profile unless the
selected altitude is valid and at least 75 feet below the current aircraft
altitude.
Avoidance
Hazard
Vertical Navigation (VNAV) Mode is available for enroute/terminal cruise and

descent operations any time that VNAV flight planning is available. Refer to Section
Additional
Features
2.3 (Vertical Navigation) for more information.

AFCS
Vertical Navigation
Vertical Navigation Target Altitude Capture
Mode Active Mode Armed
Annun/Alerts
Vertical Navigation Mode

Appendix
Index
AFCS
Activating Vertical Navigation Mode:
Overview
System
 When a flight plan is active, VNAV data is valid, and the VNAV Key is selected on
the GMC 507 or G3X Touch, VNAV mode is armed in preparation for descent path
capture. ‘VNAV’ is annunciated in white in the G3X Touch Autopilot Status Box. If
Instruments
Flight
applicable, the appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the VNAV
Target Altitude (ALTV) or the Selected Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.
 When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), VNAV Mode
EIS
is activated and tracks the descent profile. An altitude capture mode (ALTS or ALTV)
is armed as appropriate.

Interface
When approaching the VNAV Target Altitude (or Selected Altitude) the system
CNS
automatically transitions to ALTS or ALTV Mode with ALT Mode armed.
Navigation
GPS


Planning
Flight
Avoidance
If the altimeter’s barometric setting is adjusted while VNAV mode is active, the
Hazard
autopilot increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the
aircraft on the descent path (without commanding a climb). For large changes, it may
Additional
take several minutes for the aircraft to reestablish on the descent path. If the change Features
is made while nearing the VNAV waypoint, the aircraft may not reestablish on the
descent path in time to level off at the VNAV Target Altitude. In this case, the autopilot
will revert to Pitch Hold mode upon passing the VNAV waypoint, and Selected Altitude
AFCS
Capture (ALTV) mode will be automatically armed.

Annun/Alerts
AUTOMATIC REVERSION TO PITCH HOLD MODE

Several situations can occur while VNAV Mode is active which cause the
AFCS to revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
Appendix
• Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.

• Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Deviation Indicator is removed
from the PFD).
Index
AFCS
Following a reversion to Pitch Hold Mode, VNAV Mode and the appropriate
Overview
altitude capture mode become armed to allow for possible profile recapture.
System
VNAV TARGET ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTV)

Instruments
Flight
VNAV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture

Mode and is armed automatically after the VNV Key (GMC 305) or VNAV
(GMC 307/507) is selected if the VNAV Target Altitude is to be intercepted
EIS
before the Selected Altitude. The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates the VNAV
Target Altitude is to be captured. Refer to Section 2.3 (Vertical Navigation)
for more information on setting up the VNAV target altitude.
Interface
CNS
As the aircraft nears the VNAV Target Altitude, AFCS automatically transitions
to VNAV Target Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This
Navigation
automatic transition is indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for

GPS
up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation.

At 50 feet from the VNAV Target Altitude, the AFCS automatically transitions from
Planning
Flight
VNAV Target Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and selects the VNAV target
altitude as the new Autopilot Altitude Reference. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes
active, the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes
Avoidance
Hazard
green for 10 seconds to indicate the automatic transition.

Automatic Transition to ALTV
Additional
Mode with ALT Mode Armed

Features
Automatic Transition
AFCS
from ALTV to ALT Mode Altitude

Reference
Annun/Alerts
Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture

Appendix
Index
AFCS
GLIDEPATH MODE (GP) (WITH EXTERNAL WAAS ENABLED
Overview
System
IFR NAVIGATOR ONLY)
Glidepath Mode is used to track a WAAS or other satellite-based augmentation
Instruments
system SBAS generated glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is annunciated
Flight
in white in the Autopilot Status Box.
Selecting Glidepath Mode:
EIS
1) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Ensure a GPS approach with vertical guidance
(LPV, LP+V, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV +V) is loaded into the active flight plan.
The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan (cannot be a direct-to a
Interface
CNS
waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source.
Navigation
3) Press the APR Key (GMC control unit) or touch the autopilot, then touch
GPS
APPR (only available when an external GPS navigation source (i.e., GTN or
GNS Series) is configured).
Planning
Flight
NOTE: Some RNAV (GPS) approaches provide a vertical descent angle as an
aid in flying a stabilized approach. These approaches are NOT considered
Approaches with Vertical Guidance (APV). Approaches that are annunciated
Avoidance
Hazard
on the HSI as LNAV or LNAV+V are considered Nonprecision Approaches (NPA)
and are flown to an MDA even though vertical glidepath (GP) information
may be provided.
Additional
Features
WARNING: When flying an LNAV approach (with vertical descent angle)

with the autopilot coupled, the aircraft will not level off at the MDA even if
the MDA is set in the altitude preselect.
AFCS
Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and
begins to capture and track the glidepath.
Annun/Alerts
Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured:
• The active waypoint is at or after the final approach fix (FAF).
Appendix
• Vertical deviation is valid.

Index
AFCS
• The CDI is at less than full-scale deviation.

Overview
System
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints has not been suspended (no ‘SUSP’

annunciation on the HSI).
Instruments
Flight
Glidepath
Mode Active
EIS
Glidepath Mode
Interface
CNS
GLIDESLOPE MODE (GS)

Navigation
GPS
NOTE: Glideslope Mode requires a valid GPS position.
Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the
glideslope. When Glideslope Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC
Planning
Flight
Approach Mode is armed as the lateral flight director mode.

Selecting Glideslope Mode:
Avoidance
Hazard
1) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Tune and activate the desired localizer frequency.

2) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source.
Additional
Features
3) Press the APR Key (GMC control unit) or touch the autopilot and touch
APPR. This simultaneously selects LOC and GS (Glideslope) Modes.
Or:
AFCS

2) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Load the approach (LOC, ILS, LDA, SDF, etc.) into
Annun/Alerts
the flight plan.

3) Press the APR Key (GMC control unit) or touch the autopilot and touch
APPR. This simultaneously selects LOC and GS (Glideslope) Modes.
Appendix
Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured.
Upon reaching the glideslope, the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and
begins to capture and track the glideslope.
Index
Glideslope Mode Armed

AFCS
GO AROUND (GA) AND TAKEOFF (TO) MODES
Overview
System
Go Around and Takeoff modes are coupled pitch and roll modes and are annunciated
as both the vertical and lateral modes when active. In these modes, the flight director
Instruments
commands a constant set pitch attitude and keeps the wings level. The GA Switch
Flight
is used to activate both modes. The mode entered by the flight director depends on
whether the aircraft is on the ground or in the air.
Takeoff Mode provides an attitude reference during rotation and takeoff. This mode
EIS
can be selected only while on the ground by pushing the TO/GA Button. The flight
director Command Bars assume a wings-level, pitch-up attitude.
Interface
CNS
Pressing the TO/GA Button while in the air activates the flight director in a wings-
level, pitch-up attitude, allowing the execution of a missed approach or a go around.
Navigation
GPS
9.3 LATERAL MODES
Planning
The following table lists the lateral modes and respective control(s) and annunciation.
Flight
Refer to the vertical modes section for information regarding Takeoff and Go Around
Modes.
Avoidance
Hazard
Lateral Mode Description Control Annunciation
Holds the current aircraft roll
Additional
attitude or rolls the wings level, Features
Roll Hold (default) ROL
depending on the commanded
bank angle
HDG Key
AFCS
(GMC
Captures and tracks the Selected
Heading Select 507) HDG
Heading
Annun/Alerts
or
HDG
TRK Key
Appendix
Captures and tracks the Selected (GMC 507)

Track TRK
Ground Track or
TRK
Index
AFCS
Lateral Mode Description Control Annunciation

Overview
System
Navigation,
GPS
GPS
Navigation,
Instruments
Flight
VOR Enroute VOR

Capture/Track Captures and tracks the selected NAV Key
Navigation, navigation source (GPS, VOR, LOC) (GMC
EIS
LOC Capture/ 507)

Track or LOC
(No NAV
Interface
CNS
Glideslope)
Navigation,
Captures and tracks a localizer
Navigation
Backcourse BC
signal for backcourse approaches
GPS
Capture/Track
Approach, GPS GPS
APR Key
Planning
Approach, LOC
Flight
Capture/Track (GMC
Captures and tracks the selected
(Glideslope 507)
navigation source (GPS and LOC) LOC
Avoidance
Mode or
Hazard
automatically APPR
armed)
Additional
Features
Commands a constant pitch angle

Takeoff and wings level on ground in TO
preparation for takeoff TO/GA
Button
AFCS
Commands a constant pitch angle

Go Around GA
and wings level in the air
The AFCS limits the turn rate to a standard rate turn (3 degs/sec) except in cases when the AFCS is
Annun/Alerts
following an external navigator providing GPS (bank angle) steering. In this case the turn rate is limited
by the flight director maximum bank angle configuration setting.
Appendix
Flight Director Lateral Modes

Index
AFCS
ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)
Overview
System
NOTE: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the
flight director rolls the wings level.
Instruments
Flight
When the flight director is activated or switched, Roll Hold Mode is selected by
default. This mode is annunciated as ‘ROL’ in the Autopilot Status Box. The current
aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank angle condition.
EIS
Interface
CNS
Roll Hold Mode Annunciation
Bank Angle Flight Director Response
Navigation
GPS
< 6° Rolls wings level
6 to 20° Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
>20° Limits bank to 20°
Planning
Flight
Roll Hold Mode Responses
Avoidance
Hazard
Changing the Roll Reference
When operating in Roll Hold Mode, the roll reference can be adjusted in the following
Additional
ways: Features
• To decrease the roll reference, turn the inner knob associated with
the PFD right. The AFCS slowly decreases the bank angle. The current
AFCS
bank angle is held (if the bank angle exceeds 6°). If the bank angle
is less than 6°, the AFCS will roll the aircraft wings level.
Annun/Alerts
HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)

Heading Select Mode is activated by touching the autopilot, then touching HDG or
the HDG Key (GMC control unit). Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains
Appendix
the Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a cyan bug on the HSI and in
the box to the upper left of the HSI.
Index
AFCS
Changing the Selected Heading

Overview
System
Changing the selected heading (Integrated Autopilot Interface):

1) Touch the Selected Heading on the PFD.
Instruments
2) Enter the selected heading using the keypad and touch Enter.
Flight
Changing the selected heading (GMC 507):

1) Turn the HDG Knob to select the desired heading.
EIS
2) Press the HDG Key on the GMC control unit to activate HDG Mode.
Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug
movement, even if the Bug is turned more than 180˚ from the present heading
Interface
CNS
(e.g., a 270˚ turn to the right). However, Selected Heading changes of more
than 330˚ at a time result in turn reversals.
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Heading Mode Annunciation

Avoidance
Hazard
TRACK SELECT MODE (TRK)

The Track Select Mode is activated by touching the autopilot, then touching TRK on
Additional
the PFD or pressing the TRK Key . Track Mode acquires and maintains the Selected
Features
Ground Track.
Changing the selected track:
AFCS
1) Use the HDG/TRK Knob to select the desired ground track.

Or:
Annun/Alerts
Touch the Selected Track on the PFD, Enter the selected track using the
keypad and touch Enter.
2) Select TRK to activate TRK Mode.
Appendix
Index
Track Mode Annunciation
AFCS
NAVIGATION MODES (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)
Overview
System
NOTE: When making a VOR or LOC approach, a valid GPS position is required.
Instruments
Flight
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal
or active GPS course for the flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
NOTE: When intercepting a flight plan leg, the flight director gives com-
EIS
mands to capture the active leg at approximately a 45° angle to the track
between the waypoints defining the active leg. The flight director does not
give commands fly to the starting waypoint of the active leg.
Interface
CNS
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the
localizer front course.
Navigation
GPS
Pressing the NAV Key or touching NAV on the G3X Touch selects Navigation Mode.
Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation source (GPS, VOR, LOC).
Planning
Flight
The flight director follows GPS roll steering commands when GPS is the selected
navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director
creates roll steering commands from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation
Avoidance
Hazard
Mode can also be used to fly non-precision GPS and LOC approaches where vertical
guidance is not required.
Backcourse Navigation Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse
Additional
Features
direction. The annunciation ‘BC’ in the Autopilot Status Box indicates Backcourse
Navigation Mode.
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV
AFCS
Key is pressed or NAV is touched, the selected mode is armed. If the CDI is less than
one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured when the NAV Key is pressed or
Annun/Alerts
NAV is touched. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active
roll mode.
Appendix
Navigation Mode Annunciation

Index
AFCS
When the CDI has automatically switched from GPS to LOC during a LOC/ILS
Overview
approach, GPS Navigation Mode remains active, providing GPS steering guidance until
System
the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation Mode is armed when the automatic
navigation source switch takes place. If the APR Key is pressed or NAV is touched
Instruments
prior to the automatic navigation source switch, LOC Navigation Mode is armed.
Flight
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director
reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
EIS
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts
to armed)
Interface
• Navigation source manually switched

CNS
• During a LOC/ILS approach, the FAF is crossed while in GPS Navigation Mode
after the automatic navigation source switch from GPS to LOC
Navigation
GPS
LOC Mode is activated when the automatic navigation source switch takes
place. If the APR Key is pressed or APPR is touched prior to the automatic
Planning
navigation source switch, LOC Mode is armed.

Flight
In the right circumstances, LOC and GS Modes can be armed while GPS
Mode is still active and the external navigator (GTN X50, GTN X50 Xi, or GNS
Avoidance
Hazard
X30 WAAS only) is set to GPS (not VLOC).

Arming LOC & GS Modes while GPS Mode is still active:
Additional
Features

2) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Load the approach (LOC, ILS, LDA, SDF, etc.) into
the flight plan.
AFCS
3) G3X Touch: While GPS is still the selected navigation source on the
external navigator, press the APR Key (GMC control unit) or touch APPR to
arm LOC and GS (Glideslope) Modes even with GPS Mode still active. The
Annun/Alerts
external navigator will switch from GPS to VLOC automatically and the G3X
Touch will capture the localizer and then the glideslope.
Appendix
Index
AFCS
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the AFCS
Overview
reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
System
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation
Mode reverts to armed)
Instruments
Flight
• Active navigation source manually switched
• Active flight plan is deleted (only GPS-based modes)
EIS
• GPS reception is lost
If VOR Navigation Mode is active and the VOR signal is lost, the autopilot
Interface
reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level) and reverts VOR Mode to armed
CNS
in the event the VOR signal is reestablished.
OBS MODE
Navigation
GPS
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode (without external GPS navigator):
1) While navigating a flight plan or Direct-to, touch CRS on the PFD.
Planning
Flight
2) Touch Yes on the 'Set OBS and hold?' window.
3) Enter the desired course to/from the waypoint using the keypad and touch
Avoidance
Enter.
Hazard
4) To cancel OBS Mode and return to automatic waypoint sequencing, touch
OBS on the PFD.
Additional
5) Touch Release OBS Hold. Features
Or:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page press the MENU Key while navigating a
AFCS
flight plan or Direct-to.

Annun/Alerts
Appendix
the MENU Key.

5) Touch Release Hold.
Index
AFCS
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode (with external GPS navigator config-

Overview
ured):
System
1) Press the OBS Key on the external navigator. The ‘Set OBS and Hold’ Active
Flight Plan Page menu option is now available.
Instruments
Flight
2) From the Active Flight Plan Page press the MENU Key while navigating a
flight plan or Direct-to.
EIS
Interface
CNS
the MENU Key.

6) Touch Release Hold.
Navigation
GPS
VOR MODE FOR NAVIGATION

VOR Mode can be used for navigation when an external navigation receiver is
configured.
Planning
Flight
Tracking Direct-to a VOR:

1) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Tune and activate the desired VOR frequency. If a
Avoidance
Hazard
GTN or GNS series unit is not configured skip to Step 3.

2) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR (GTN or GNS series units only): Ensure the ‘VLOC’
indication is showing in the lower-left corner. If not, press the CDI Key.
Additional
Features
3) G3X Touch: Ensure that VOR1 or VOR2 is the selected navigation source. It
should say ‘VOR1’ or ‘VOR2’ on the HSI and the needle should be green.
4) G3X Touch: From the PFD, touch the course on the PFD and touch Sync
AFCS
Course.
5) G3X Touch: Touch the autopilot on the PFD, then touch NAV to activate
Annun/Alerts
VOR Mode.
Or:
Press the NAV Key on the GMC control unit.
Appendix
A green ‘VOR’ indication is displayed in the autopilot status bar and the flight
director tracks the selected course to the VOR.
Index
AFCS
Intercepting and tracking a VOR radial:
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
indication is showing in the lower-left corner of the. If not, press the CDI
Key.
EIS
4) G3X Touch: From the PFD, touch the course on the PFD and touch Sync
Course.
Interface
CNS
5) G3X Touch: From the PFD, touch the autopilot and touch NAV.
Or:
Navigation
GPS
If there is less than half-scale deviation when NAV is touched or the NAV Key is
pressed, VOR Mode will activate (green text), intercept, and track the selected radial.
Planning
Flight
If there is more than half-scale deviation when NAV is touched, VOR Mode will arm
(white text) first, then activate when closer to the radial.
Avoidance
Hazard
APPROACHES WITHOUT VERTICAL GUIDANCE
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal
Additional
Features
or active GPS course for the flight director to enter Approach Mode.
NOTE: For the autopilot to enter a VLOC mode, the G3X Touch must have GPS
AFCS
reception, a valid navigation database, and the external navigation receiver

must have a valid signal (VOR or LOC).
Annun/Alerts
Touch NAV or press the NAV Key (GMC control unit) to arm/activate VOR, LOC/
BC, and GPS (LNAV only) lateral modes. Lateral modes acquire and track the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC), depending on the loaded approach. These
Appendix
modes use the selected navigation receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly
the approach. Touch NAV when the CDI is greater than one dot to arm the selected
modes (annunciated in white). Touch NAV when the CDI deviation is less than one
dot to activate, capture and track the selected navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC).
Index
AFCS
Example Control Lateral Mode Annunciation Description

Overview
System
LNAV Approach, GPS GPS
VOR NAV Key VOR Approach VOR

Captures and tracks
(GMC Capture/Track the selected navigation
Instruments
Flight
LOC Capture/Track source (GPS, VOR, LOC)

LOC 507) LOC
(No Glideslope)
or
NAV Captures and tracks
EIS
Backcourse
BC BC a localizer signal for
Capture/Track
backcourse approaches
Interface
CNS
Approaches without Vertical Guidance
GPS APPROACH WITHOUT VERTICAL GUIDANCE

Navigation
GPS
A GPS approach without vertical guidance (LNAV) is flown using GPS NAV Mode.
Selecting a GPS Approach without vertical guidance:
Planning
Flight
1) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Ensure a GPS approach without vertical guidance

(LNAV) is loaded into the active flight plan.
2) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Ensure the ‘GPS’ indication is showing in the
Avoidance
Hazard
lower-left corner. If not, press the CDI Key.

3) G3X Touch: Ensure that GPS1 is the selected navigation source on the PFD.
Additional
Features
4) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Select and activate the GPS approach using the
PROC Key.
5) G3X Touch: From the PFD touch the autopilot and touch NAV to activate
GPS Mode.
AFCS
Or:
Annun/Alerts
6) Adjust the aircraft’s pitch axis as required.

Appendix
Index
AFCS
VOR APPROACH
Overview
System
A VOR approach is flown using VOR Mode.
Selecting a VOR Approach:
Instruments
Flight
EIS
indication is showing in the lower-left corner of the. If not, press the CDI
Key.
Interface
CNS
4) G3X Touch: From the PFD touch the autopilot and touch CRS. Select the
Navigation
inbound approach course (radial).
GPS
5) G3X Touch: From the PFD, touch the autopilot and touch NAV.
Or:
Planning
Flight
If there is less than half-scale deviation when touching NAV or when the
NAV Key is pressed, VOR Mode will activate (green text), intercept, and
Avoidance
Hazard
track the selected radial. If there is more than half-scale deviation when
NAV is touched or when the NAV Key is pressed, VOR Mode will arm
(white text) first, then activate when closer to the radial.
Additional
Features
6) Adjust the aircraft’s pitch axis as required.
LOCALIZER APPROACH (NO GS)

AFCS
LOC Mode is used to fly a localizer only approach (no glideslope).

Selecting LOC Mode for a localizer only approach:
Annun/Alerts
1) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Tune and activate the desired LOC frequency,

2) G3X Touch: Ensure that LOC1 is the selected navigation source. The HSI
should automatically slew the needle to the correct course.
Appendix
3) G3X Touch: From the PFD, touch the autopilot and touch NAV to activate
LOC Mode.
Or: Press or the NAV Key on the GMC control unit.
Index
AFCS
If the localizer deviation is less than half-scale when NAV is touched

Overview
or when the NAV Key is pressed, the autopilot will activate LOC Mode
System
and track the localizer, otherwise LOC Mode is armed and the pilot is
responsible for intercepting the localizer. In some cases it may be necessary
Instruments
to use HDG Mode with LOC Mode armed to follow a vector to the localizer.
Flight
BACKCOURSE APPROACH
EIS
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the
localizer front course.
Interface
CNS
NOTE: ‘BC’ will not be displayed on the G3X Touch HSI.
Backcourse Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction.
Navigation
GPS
Backcourse is indicated by ‘BC’ in the autopilot status box.

If GS and LOC Mode are armed, the flight director can only capture the localizer
front course, indicated by ‘LOC’ in the autopilot status box. If only LOC Mode is armed
Planning
Flight
(not GS Mode), the flight director will capture either the front course or the backcourse
based on the angle at which the aircraft intercepts the localizer.
Avoidance
Selecting BC Mode:
Hazard
1) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Tune and activate the desired LOC frequency.

Additional
Features

3) G3X Touch: From the PFD touch the autopilot then touch NAV.
Or:
AFCS

If the aircraft heading is within 75˚ of the localizer backcourse then BC
Annun/Alerts
Mode will be armed. If the aircraft heading is within 105˚ of the localizer
front course, LOC Mode will be armed.
Appendix
Index
AFCS
APPROACHES WITH LATERAL + VERTICAL GUIDANCE
Overview
System
Touch APPR or press the APR Key (GMC control unit) to arm/activate both lateral
and vertical modes for approach. When Glidepath (GP) Mode is armed for a GPS
Instruments
approach with vertical guidance, GPS Mode is automatically armed. When Glideslope
Flight
(GS) Mode is armed for an ILS approach, LOC Mode is automatically armed. Touch
APPR or press the APR Key (GMC control unit) when the CDI is greater than one dot
to arm the selected modes (annunciated in white). Touch APPR or press the APR Key
EIS
(GMC control unit) when the CDI deviation is less than one dot to activate, capture and
track the selected navigation source.
Interface
CNS
Example Control Modes Annunciation Description
Captures and tracks the
Lateral:
Navigation
LPV, LP+V, APR Key GPS lateral portion of a GPS
GPS
GPS
LNAV/ (GMC 507) approach
VNAV, or Captures and tracks
LNAV+V Vertical:
APPR GP a WAAS approach
Planning
Flight
Glidepath
glidepath
Lateral: Captures and tracks the
APR Key LOC
Avoidance
Localizer localizer
Hazard
LOC, ILS, (GMC 507)
LDA, SDF or Vertical: Captures and tracks the
GS
APPR Glideslope glideslope
Additional
Features
Lateral + Vertical Approaches
GPS APPROACH WITH VERTICAL GUIDANCE

AFCS
NOTE: To cancel Glidepath (GP) Mode without canceling GPS Mode, NAV
Annun/Alerts
once. Pressing it a second time cancels GPS Mode.
When Glidepath (GP) Mode is armed for a GPS approach with vertical guidance, GPS
Mode is automatically armed.
Appendix
Selecting a GPS approach with vertical guidance:

1) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Ensure a GPS approach with vertical guidance
Index
(LPV, LP+V, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V) is loaded into the active flight plan.
AFCS

Overview
System
lower-left corner. If not, press the CDI Key.

4) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Select and activate the GPS approach using the
Instruments
Flight
PROC Key.
5) G3X Touch: From the PFD touch the autopilot then touch APPR.
Or:
EIS
Press the APR Key on the GMC control unit.
LOCALIZER WITH GLIDESLOPE

Interface
CNS
LOC Mode (lateral) and GS Mode (vertical) are both armed by touching APPR
from the G3X Touch PFD or by pressing the APR Key on the GMC control unit. LOC/
Navigation
ILS approach captures are inhibited if the difference between aircraft heading and
GPS
localizer course exceeds 105˚.

Planning
Flight
NOTE: To cancel Glideslope (GS) Mode without canceling LOC Mode, touch
NAV once. Pressing it a second time cancels LOC Mode.
Avoidance
Selecting LOC Mode with GS Mode:

Hazard
1) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Tune and activate the desired LOC frequency.

Additional
Features

3) G3X Touch: From the PFD touch the autopilot then touch APPR.
Or:
AFCS

This simultaneously selects LOC Mode and GS (Glideslope) Mode. If the
Annun/Alerts
localizer deviation is less than half-scale when touching APPR or the APR
Key is pressed, the autopilot will activate LOC Mode and track the localizer,
otherwise LOC Mode is armed and the pilot is responsible for intercepting
Appendix
the localizer.
If the following occurs, the autopilot reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• Approach Mode is active and the Navigation source is manually
Index
switched
AFCS
• The localizer signal is lost
Overview
System
If the Glideslope signal is lost , GS Mode will revert to Pitch Hold Mode and hold the
last pitch attitude.
Instruments
COUPLED ILS APPROACH WITH PROCEDURE TURN
Flight
NOTE: Configuration of a combination GPS/VLOC external navigator (GPS
175, GNX™ 375, GTN, or GNS) is required for a coupled ILS approach.
EIS
The combination GPS/VLOC external navigator (GPS 175, GNX 375, GTN, or GNS),
G3X Touch, and autopilot can be used to fly a full ILS approach with procedure turn,
Interface
CNS
from the enroute environment to the missed approach point.
Setting up a coupled ILS approach:
Navigation
GPS
lower-left corner. If not, use the CDI Key.
Planning
Flight
3) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Select and activate the ILS approach using the
PROC Key.
4) G3X Touch: From the PFD touch the autopilot and touch NAV to activate
Avoidance
Hazard
GPS Mode. The flight director should start navigating to the IAF (Initial
Approach Fix).
Additional
Or: Features

5) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Tune and identify the localizer frequency by
pressing the VLOC Flip-flop Key. (Note: The external navigator should have
AFCS
automatically loaded the localizer frequency into the standby VLOC slot.)
6) G3X Touch: From the PFD touch the autopilot and touch APPR to arm LOC
Annun/Alerts
and GS modes. Touch ALT.

Or:
Appendix
GPS Mode is now active and LOC Mode is armed in the roll axis. ALT Mode
is active and GS is armed in the pitch axis. The flight director should now
navigate the entire approach from the IAF (Initial Approach Fix) to the MAP
Index
(Missed Approach Point) with the only adjustment being the throttle.
AFCS
Overview
NOTE: Check step #5 if the external navigator doesn’t automatically switch

System
from GPS to VLOC Mode shortly after turning inbound on the final approach
course.
Instruments
Flight
LEVEL MODE
Level Mode is coupled in pitch and roll modes and is annunciated as both the vertical
and lateral modes when active. Pressing the LVL Key engages the autopilot in Level
EIS
vertical and lateral modes. Level Mode does not track altitude or heading. When the
LVL Key is pressed all armed and active modes are canceled and the autopilot and
Interface
flight director revert to LVL mode for pitch and roll. While in level mode, all other
CNS
modes are available by pressing the corresponding button.

Navigation
9.4 NON-GARMIN AUTOPILOTS

GPS
When interfacing the G3X Touch with a non-Garmin autopilot, the following applies:
Planning
Flight
• The PFD can be used to select 'Course' and 'Heading' for non-Garmin autopilots.
• G3X Touch cannot support NAV source selection between two external navigators
Avoidance
Hazard
for a non-Garmin autopilot, therefore installations with a non-Garmin autopilot

are limited to one external navigator interface.
Additional
Features
• The PFD supports GPS Steering (GPSS) mode which converts GPS roll steering
commands into heading commands for non-Garmin autopilots that lack a GPS
Navigation interface. GPSS mode is selected/deselected directly on the PFD.
Either the internal G3X Touch flight plan can be used or the external flight plan
AFCS
from a compatible Garmin navigator. While GPSS mode is active on the G3X
Touch PFD, the pilot must select 'GPS' as the active NAV source and 'Heading'
Annun/Alerts
mode on the non-Garmin autopilot.

Appendix
Index
AFCS
GPS STEERING (GPSS)
Overview
System
NOTE: GPS Steering is only applicable to non-Garmin autopilots.
Instruments
GPS Steering (GPSS) provides roll command signals calculated by the GPS navigator
Flight
to the non-Garmin autopilot in order to allow the aircraft to anticipate turns, make
smooth transitions when passing waypoints, and fly leg types such as procedure turns
and holding patterns.
EIS
GPS Steering is enabled by selecting 'GPS' as the active navigation source, HDG
mode on the non-Garmin autopilot, and touching GPSS on the PFD Options menu.
Interface
CNS
Enabling GPSS Mode:
1) From the PFD, touch the HSI to display the PFD Options menu.
Navigation
2) Touch GPS from the 'CDI Source' options.
GPS
3) Touch GPSS.
When GPSS is enabled, the heading bug will change to a hollow outline, and a
Planning
Flight
crossed-out heading bug symbol is displayed indicating the autopilot is not coupled
to the heading bug. The heading bug is still controllable and may still be used for
reference.
Avoidance
Hazard
GPS Active
Navigation
GPSS Enabled Source
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
GPSS
Selected
Appendix
Hollow
Heading
Bug
Index
GPSS Enabled (PFD) GPSS Enabled (PFD Options Menu)
AFCS
If the GPSS data is invalid (for example, if there is not an active GPS leg) or the
Overview
selected HSI source on the G3X Touch is not GPS, the annunciated "GPSS" text will
System
turn yellow and a zero turn command will be sent to the autopilot.
Yellow
Instruments
'GPSS'
Flight
Text
GPSS Invalid (PFD)

EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Annunciations & Alerts
SECTION 10 ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
Overview
System
10.1 MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Instruments
Flight
Message Comments
Approaching Target Altitude Within 200 feet of final VNAV target altitude.
Approaching VNAV Profile The aircraft is within one minute of reaching the
EIS
initial VNAV descent point.
Arriving at XXX The aircraft is nearing the destination.
Interface
CNS
Can’t Unlock Maps No applicable unlock code for one or more maps
was found. All MapSource maps are not accessible.
Navigation
Database Error Internal problem with the system. Contact your
GPS
dealer.
Switch Fuel Tanks A reminder for switching fuel tanks. The reminder
message repeats at the specified interval after the
Planning
Flight
beginning of each trip.
Lost Satellite Reception The system is unable to receive satellite signals.
Avoidance
Hazard
Memory Full System memory is full, no further data can be saved.
Proximity Alarm XXXXX You have reached the distance set for a proximity
waypoint.
Additional
Features
Next DTK XXX The aircraft is nearing a turn in a route.
No SXM Signal The SXM antenna is not receiving a signal.
Proximity Alarm Memory Full No additional proximity waypoints can be saved.
AFCS
Proximity Waypoints Overlap The radius of two proximity waypoints overlap.

Route Already Exists A route name that already exists has been entered.
Annun/Alerts
Route Memory Full No additional routes can be saved.

Route Truncated Uploaded route from another device has more than
300 waypoints.
Appendix
Route Waypoint Memory Full No additional route waypoints can be saved.

Saving SXM Program An SXM Radio channel lineup change has occurred
Information and the unit is saving the channel lineup to memory.
Index
Message Comments
Overview
System
Steep Turn Ahead Approaching a turn that requires a bank angle in

excess of 25 degrees to stay on course.
Track Already Exists A saved track with the same name already exists.
Instruments
Flight
Track Log Full The track log is full and track recording was turned
off. To record more track points, you need to clear
the track log and turn track recording on.
EIS
Track Memory Full No more track data can be stored. Delete the old
track data to store the new data.
Interface
Transfer Complete Data transfer was completed.

CNS
VNAV Cancelled VNAV function has been cancelled due to a change

in the active route.
Navigation
GPS
Waypoint Already Exists A waypoint with the same name already exists.
Waypoint Memory Full The unit has stored the maximum number of
waypoints.
Planning
Flight
Miscellaneous Message Advisories

Avoidance
Hazard
10.2 AIRSPACE MESSAGES

Additional
Features
Message Comments
Inside Airspace Inside the boundaries of the airspace.
Airspace Near and Ahead Within two nautical miles of an airspace
AFCS
and your current course takes you inside the

airspace.
Annun Alerts
Airspace Ahead, Within 10 The projected course takes you inside an

Minutes airspace within the next 10 minutes or less.
Airspace Near, Within 2 nm Within two nautical miles of an airspace but not
Appendix
projected to enter it.

Index
10.3 SYSTEM STATUS MESSAGES
Overview
System
A yellow (Messages) alert will flash at the bottom of the display. Messages are
removed when they no longer apply. Flashing stops when all messages have been
Instruments
Flight
viewed.
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
Message Alert
AFCS
Accessing messages:
Touch Messages at the bottom of the screen to view.
Annun/Alerts
Or:
Touch Main Menu > Tools > Messages.
Appendix
Index
SYSTEM STATUS MESSAGES

Overview
System
Message Comments
[LRU name] hardware fault The specified LRU has a hardware fault and
Instruments
Flight
requires service.
Config module error The GDU™ has encountered a problem writing
to/from the config module The G3X Touch™
EIS
system should be serviced.

Config module missing The PFD config module is not connected.
Interface
[LRU name] using backup RS-232 The specified LRU was wired for both CAN and
CNS
interface RS-232 communication paths, and the device is

not communicating via CAN.
Navigation
[LRU name] temperature out of The specified LRU is either too hot or too cold.
GPS
spec Check installation and/or hardware for cause.

[LRU name] power supply fault The specified LRU’s internal power supply has
Planning
Flight
a problem or the input voltage is out of the

required specifications.
AHRS not calibrated The specified AHRS is either not calibrated
Avoidance
Hazard
or requires the post installation calibration

procedure. See G3X Touch installation manual
for calibration instructions.
Additional
Features
AHRS magnetometer not The specified AHRS is either not calibrated or

calibrated requires the magnetometer post installation
calibration procedure. See G3X Touch
AFCS
installation manual for calibration instructions.

AHRS not receiving The specified AHRS is not receiving
magnetometer data
Annun Alerts
magnetometer data. Check installation and

configuration.
AHRS not receiving air data The specified AHRS is not receiving air data.
Check installation and configuration.
Appendix
AHRS not receiving GPS data The specified AHRS is not receiving any or any
useful GPS information. Check installation and
configuration.
Index
Message Comments
Overview
System
AHRS magnetic anomaly - check An anomaly has been detected in the
mag installation magnetometer data. Heading may or may not
be flagged invalid.
Instruments
Flight
AHRS magnetic field model The data being communicated by the GMU
invalid to the specified AHRS is invalid. Heading is
flagged invalid and the AHRS will use GPS for
EIS
backup mode operation.
AHRS IGRF data out of date The AHRS Earth magnetic field model is out
of date. Update magnetic field model when
Interface
CNS
practical by updating the GDU to the latest
software version.
Navigation
Network communication error Two or more LRUs may have the same network
GPS
address. Check wiring and configuration.
[LRU name] Network address One or more LRUs on the CAN bus have an
changed indeterminate network address. This likely
Planning
Flight
indicates a wiring issue or an intermittent
connector pin. If the problem persists, the G3X
Avoidance
Touch system should be serviced.
Hazard
[GDU name] software version The PFD and MFD do not have the same
mismatch software version installed. Display crosstalk is
Additional
disabled. Ensure all installed display software Features
matches.
[GDU name] obstacle database The PFD and MFD have different obstacle
mismatch database versions installed. Install the correct
AFCS
obstacle database on all displays for proper

terrain/obstacle alerting.
Annun/Alerts
[GDU name] obstacle database The obstacle database is missing. Install the
missing correct obstacle database on all displays for
proper terrain/obstacle alerting.
Appendix
[GDU name] terrain database The PFD and MFD have different terrain
mismatch database versions installed. Install the correct
terrain database on all displays for proper
terrain/obstacle alerting.
Index
Message Comments
Overview
System
[GDU name] terrain database The terrain database is missing. Install the
missing correct terrain database on all displays for
proper terrain/obstacle alerting.
Instruments
Flight
[GDU name] navigation The PFD and MFD have different navigation
database mismatch database versions installed. Install the correct
navigation database on all displays for proper
EIS
navigation.
[GDU name] navigation The navigation database is missing. Install the
database missing correct navigation database on all displays for
Interface
CNS
proper navigation.
[GDU name] audio database The audio database is missing. Return unit for
Navigation
missing. service
GPS
[GDU name] audio database The audio database is incompatible. Return

incompatible unit for service
Planning
Using external GPS position data The display that is configured for a GPS antenna
Flight
connection is not available; the remaining

displays are using 2D GPS position data from
Avoidance
an external GPS navigator.

Hazard
[GDU name] GPS antenna not The display that is configured for a GPS antenna
connected connection does not detect any antenna current
Additional
Features
draw from the GPS antenna RF connector.

[GDU name] GPS antenna The display that is configured for a GPS antenna
shorted to ground connection detects the GPS antenna RF
AFCS
connector is shorted to ground.

[GDU name] GPS receiver needs The internal GPS receiver in the specified GDU
service is not responding. The affected GDU should be
Annun Alerts
serviced.
SXM receiver needs service The display should be serviced when possible.
Not receiving external GPS Not receiving RS-232 data from the specified
Appendix
[number] RS-232 Aviation data external GPS navigator.

Index
Message Comments
Overview
System
Not receiving GTX TIS-A RS-232
Not receiving RS-232 data from the GTX.
data
Not receiving nav/comm
Instruments
Not receiving RS-232 data from the nav/comm.
Flight
[number] RS-232 data
VHF nav/comm communication Incorrect OBS value received from nav/comm.
error Check nav/comm OBS resolver setup (see
EIS
Installation Manual guidance).
Not receiving data on ARINC 429 Data is not being received on the specified
channel [number] ARINC 429 input (port number can be 1-4).
Interface
CNS
ARINC 429 receiver error Data received on an ARINC 429 input does not
match the expected configuration.
Navigation
Using internal GPS flight plan for Communication with the external GPS
GPS
navigation navigation source has failed. The G3X Touch
internal flight plan is being used for navigation.
Planning
Flight
Aviation waypoint was deleted A waypoint that was part of a stored flight
plan was deleted from the latest navigation
database. Check stored flight plans
Avoidance
Hazard
Aviation waypoint has moved A waypoint that was part of a stored flight plan
was moved. Check stored flight plans.
Demo Mode - Do not use for The system is in demo mode, do not use for
Additional
Features
navigation navigation.
Point no longer in navigation Displayed when the user attempts to activate a
database flight plan with invalid waypoints.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
10.4 AUDIO ALERTS

Overview
System
VOICE ALERTS
Instruments
Flight
• “Five Hundred”—when the aircraft descends through 500 feet above the destina-
tion airport.
The following voice terrain alerts are issued when flight conditions meet
EIS
parameters that are set within the software algorithms, and are dependent on
the sensitivity level set in the Terrain Setup Menu.
Interface
CNS
Alert Severity Terrain Obstacle Descent Rate

“caution, terrain” “caution, obstacle”
Navigation
“caution,
GPS
Caution “caution, terrain “caution, obstacle

sink rate”
ahead” ahead”
Planning
“terrain ahead! “obstacle ahead!

Flight
“sink rate,
pull up!” pull up!”
Warning pull up!”
“terrain! terrain! “obstacle! obstacle!
“pull up!”
Avoidance
pull up! pull up!” pull up! pull up!”

Hazard
Voice Alerts Summary

Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun Alerts
Appendix
Index
AOA AURAL ALERT
Overview
System
When a G3X Touch is configured with a GSU 25, a GAP 26, and AOA is configured,
the G3X Touch will issue an aural alert when the aircraft’s pitch attitude approaches
Instruments
a stall. A persistent beeping will begin at the first red chevron and will become
Flight
progressively faster as the AOA is increased. A constant tone will be heard at the
second red chevron indicating a stall condition.
EIS
Stall Warning
AOA (Flashes)
(Constant
Aural Tone)
Interface
CNS
Aural Beeping
begins
Navigation
Angle of Attack Display (AOA)
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
10.5 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING

Overview
System
FUNCTIONS
Instruments
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD.
Flight
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATION

Marker Beacon annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected
EIS
Altitude. Outer marker reception is indicated in blue, middle in amber, and inner in
white. Refer to the CNS Interface Section for more information regarding Marker
Interface
CNS
Beacons.
Outer Marker Middle Marker Inner Marker
Navigation
O M I
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Altimeter
Hazard
Marker Beacon Annunciations

Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun Alerts
Appendix
Index
CAS MESSAGES
Overview
System
NOTE: A standalone MFD does not display CAS messages.
Instruments
The CAS messages displayed depend upon the current configuration, and will vary
Flight
from the examples listed below. Refer to the G3X Touch Installation Manual for more
information on configuring CAS messages (if applicable).
CAS Messages are grouped by criticality (warning, caution, advisory, and safe):
EIS
• WARNING (red): Requires immediate attention. Warning messages will flash
until acknowledged by pressing the BACK Key or touching the on-screen message.
Interface
CNS
• CAUTION (yellow): Requires pilot awareness and possible future corrective
action.
Navigation
GPS
• ADVISORY (white): Provides general information.
• SAFE (green): Indicates a safe condition (i.e., GEAR DOWN).
Planning
Flight
Warning annunciation text is shown in red in the CAS Annunciation Window on the
full-screen PFD and/or split-screen PFD Page.
Touch on an active CAS message to acknowledge it.
Avoidance
Hazard
When in split-screen mode on the GDU 470, the CAS Window is hidden. A yellow or
red warning symbol is depicted on the PFD indicating the presence of a CAS message.
Additional
To view the CAS message(s) return to full screen PFD mode. Features
AFCS
Caution CAS
Annun/Alerts
Warning
Message CAS Message
Symbol Symbol
Appendix
Caution CAS Message Symbol Warning CAS Message Symbol

(Split-Screen GDU 470) (Split-Screen GDU 470)
Index
ELECTRICAL CONTROL SYSTEM ANNUNCIATION

Overview
System
Annunciation Description
The Electrical Control System (GAD 27) has failed. The landing light
ECS FAIL
Instruments
wig-wag and backup power to the PFD may no longer function.

Flight
Electrical Control System Alerts
TERRAIN ANNUNCIATIONS
EIS
In addition to the Terrain Pop-up Alert in the lower left corner of the page, terrain
Interface
and obstacle annunciations appear on the PFD in the upper left corner of the Attitude
CNS
Indicator. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for more details.

Navigation
TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATIONS
GPS
The G3X Touch displays traffic symbolically on the Map Page, and the Traffic Warning
Window (Inset Map). Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and the Annunciations
Planning
Flight
and Alerts section for more details.
AHRS ALERTS (OPTIONAL)

Avoidance
Hazard
REVERSION ALERTS
Additional
Features
If a Garmin G5 standby flight display is present and the primary ADAHRS source
is unavailable, the messages ‘AHRS REVERT’ and ‘ADC REVERT’ will appear. These
messages indicate the PFD has reverted to using attitude and air data from the standby
flight display instead of a dedicated ADAHRS unit.
AFCS
Annun Alerts
Appendix
Index
COMPARISON ALERTS
Overview
System
Critical values generated by redundant sensors are monitored by comparators. If
differences in the sensors exceed a specified amount, the Comparator Window
Instruments
appears in the lower right corner of the PFD and the discrepancy is annunciated in the
Flight
Comparator Window as a ‘MISCOMP’ (miscompare).
If a Garmin G5 standby flight display is configured, the following comparison alerts
may appear:
EIS
G5 Annunciation/ G3X Touch PFD Description
Message Annunciation
Interface
CNS
! Attitude miscompare ATT MISCOMP
The attitude, heading, airspeed, or
HDG MISCOMP altitude information between the
Navigation
! Heading miscompare
GPS
! Airspeed miscompare IAS MISCOMP GSU 25 ADAHRS unit and the G5
is conflicting.
Planning
! Altitude miscompare ALT MISCOMP
Flight
! Attitude no compare ATT NO COMP
The attitude, heading, airspeed, or
Avoidance
Hazard
! Heading no compare HDG NO COMP altitude information between the
! Airspeed no compare IAS NO COMP GSU 25 ADAHRS unit and the G5
cannot be compared.
Additional
Features
! Altitude no compare ALT NO COMP
Comparison Alerts
AFCS
Each of the given MISCOMP/NO COMP messages relate to a parameter communicated

to the G3X Touch PFD and G5 from the GSU 25 ADAHRS unit. The G3X Touch PFD
Annun/Alerts
and G5 both conduct checks to validate the ADAHRS data. If there is a disagreement
between the GSU 25 ADAHRS unit and the PFD or G5, the yellow MISCOMP message
for the specific parameter (e.g., heading) is displayed. If the PFD or G5 determines it
Appendix
is unable to perform miscompare monitoring for any of the given attitude, heading,
airspeed, and altitude parameters communicated by the ADAHRS, the unit will display
a white NO COMP message for that parameter.
Index
AFCS ALERTS (OPTIONAL)

Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
AFCS Alerts
Interface
CNS
STATUS ALERTS
Navigation
If the commanded operation cannot be achieved due to the limitations

GPS
configured, the following messages can be displayed over the pitch scale. The
annunciation is removed once the condition is resolved.
Planning
Flight
Alert Condition Annunciation Description

TRIM UP The autopilot does not have the
Avoidance
Up-elevator Trim Required

Hazard
required elevator authority to

Down-elevator Trim Required TRIM DOWN reach the desired flight condition.
Manual Electric Pitch Trim is
Pitch Trim PTRIM
Additional
Features
inoperative.
Status Alerts
AFCS
The following messages are displayed in the AFCS Status Field.

Annun Alerts

Autopilot Failure AP Autopilot inoperative
Manual Autopilot
Appendix
AP Autopilot Disengaged
Disengagement
Yaw Damper Failure YD Yaw Damper inoperative
Index
Overview
System
Yaw Damper Manual
YD Yaw Damper Disengaged
Disengagement
Flight Director and Flight Director and Autopilot
Instruments
AFCS
Flight
Autopilot Failure inoperative
Autopilot inoperative, Flight Director
Autopilot Failure
operative
EIS
Autopilot preflight test is in
Autopilot Preflight Test
progress.
Interface
CNS
AFCS System Alerts
A flashing yellow mode annunciation (ROL, GPS, etc.) and annunciator light indicate
Navigation
GPS
loss of sensor (ADC, AHRS) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS, VNAV) required to
compute commands.
Planning
AFCS AURAL ALERT
Flight
Manual disengagement of the autopilot is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow
‘AP’ annunciation and an aural (bee-boop) alert. Cancel the aural alert by pressing and
Avoidance
Hazard
releasing the AP Button again.
The aural alert can also be canceled by touching the 'AP' annunciation in the
Additional
Autopilot Status Box at the top of the PFD. Note that if the AP circuit breaker is pulled, Features
touching the 'AP' annunciation is the only means of canceling the aural alert.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Additional Hazard Flight GPS CNS Flight System
Index Appendix Annun Alerts AFCS Features Avoidance Planning Navigation Interface EIS Instruments Overview
350
Blank Page

190-02472-00 Rev. D
Appendix A
SECTION 11 APPENDICES
Overview
System
APPENDIX A: DATA FIELD OPTIONS
Instruments
Flight
DATA BAR FIELD OPTIONS
Data Bar Field Definition
EIS
AGL - Height Above Ground Level Height Above Ground Level. This field will
display dashes when below a specified AGL.
Interface
BRG - Bearing to Waypoint The compass direction from the present position
CNS
to the next waypoint.
CABIN - Cabin Altitude Current pressure altitude of aircraft cabin
Navigation
GPS
(Requires a compatible CO detector)
CLG - Climb Gradient Current climb gradient (climb rate divided by
groundspeed) in percent.
Planning
Flight
CLM - Climb Gradient (ALT/NM) Current climb gradient (climb rate divided by
groundspeed) in altitude per nautical mile.
Avoidance
CO -Carbon Monoxide (PPM) Displays current carbon monoxide level in
Hazard
parts per million. (Requires a compatible CO
detector.)
Additional
DA - Density Altitude Pressure Altitude adjusted for non-standard Features
temperature.
DIST - Distance to Waypoint The distance to the next waypoint in the Active
Flight Plan.
AFCS
DISTD - Distance to Destination The distance to the destination waypoint in the

Waypoint Active Flight Plan.
Annun/Alerts
DTK - Desired Track The desired course between the active “from”
and “to” waypoints.
ECO - Fuel Economy This value is calculated by dividing the current
Appendix
ground speed by the current fuel flow.

EDR - Fuel Endurance This value is obtained by dividing the amount
of fuel on board by the current fuel flow
Index
(endurance to empty - no reserve included).
351
Appendix A

Overview
System

ESA - En Route Safe Altitude The recommended minimum altitude within ten
Instruments
miles left or right of the desired course on an

Flight
active flight plan or direct-to.

ETA - Estimated Time of Arrival The estimated time at which the aircraft should
reach the next waypoint, based upon current
EIS
ground speed and track.

ETAD - Estimated Time of Arrival The estimated time at which the aircraft should
reach the destination waypoint, based upon
Interface
CNS
current ground speed and track.

ETE - Estimated Time En Route The estimated time it takes to reach the next
Navigation
waypoint from the present position, based upon

GPS
current ground speed.

ETED - Estimated Time Enroute to The estimated time it takes to reach the
Planning
Destination destination waypoint from the present position,

Flight
based upon current ground speed.

ETV - Estimated Time to VNAV The estimated time it takes to reach the VNAV
Avoidance
Hazard
waypoint form the present position, based upon

FOD - Fuel Over Destination The estimated amount of fuel remaining when
Additional
Features
the aircraft reaches the destination waypoint.

Calculated by multiplying fuel flow times
estimated time enroute (ETED) and subtracting
AFCS
from fuel remaining (REM).

FL - Flight Level Altitude in hundreds of feet (regardless of
system set altitude units).
Annun/Alerts
FLT - Flight Time The total time in flight.

FF - Fuel Flow The current fuel flow.
Appendix
G - G-Meter The amount of positive or negative G’s.

GPS ALT - GPS Altitude The current altitude in geometric height above
Mean Sea Level (MSL).
Index
Appendix A
Overview
System
GR - Glide Ratio The ratio of horizontal distance (distance
traveled over the ground) to vertical distance
Instruments
Flight
traveled (nn.n:1).
GS - Ground Speed The velocity the aircraft is traveling relative to a
ground position.
EIS
ISA - ISA Temperature Deviation The difference between OAT and the standard
atmospheric temperature at the current altitude.
Interface
LCL - Time of Day (Local) The current time and date in 12-hour or 24-
CNS
hour format.
MACH - Mach Number A unit of speed that measures the ratio of the
Navigation
speed of an airplane to the speed of sound in
GPS
the same atmospheric conditions.
MSA - Minimum Safe Altitude Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe altitude
Planning
Flight
within ten miles of the aircraft’s present
position.
OAT - Outside Air Temperature The static air temperature outside the aircraft.
Avoidance
Hazard
This is the temperature measured by the OAT
probe, with correction for ram temperature rise.
RAT - Ram Air Temperature The temperature measured by the OAT probe,
Additional
Features
without correction for ram temperature rise.
REM - Fuel Remaining The current fuel remaining adjusted for fuel
burn and based on fuel flow.
AFCS
TRK - Ground Track Direction of aircraft movement relative to a

ground position.
Annun/Alerts
USD - Fuel Used The quantity of fuel used based on fuel flow.
UTC - Time The current time in Universal (UTC) time.
VSR - Vertical Speed Required The vertical speed necessary to descend/climb
Appendix
from the current position and altitude to the

previously selected VNAV position and altitude,
Index
353
Appendix A

Overview
System

WPT - Next Waypoint The next waypoint in the flight plan or direct-to
Instruments
route.
Flight
WX ALTIM The altimeter setting at the nearest METAR

reporting station.
WX WIND The surface wind at the nearest METAR
EIS
reporting station.
XTK - Crosstrack Error The distance the aircraft is from a desired
Interface
course in either direction, left or right.

CNS
Navigation
GPS
INFO PAGE DATA FIELD OPTIONS

Planning
Info Page Data Field Option Definition

Flight
Accuracy (ACCURACY) The current accuracy of the GPS determined

location.
Avoidance
Hazard
Bearing (BRG) The compass direction from the present position

to a destination waypoint.
Cabin Altitude (CABIN ALT) Current pressure altitude of aircraft cabin
Additional
Features
(Requires a compatible CO detector)

Climb Gradient (Percent) Current climb gradient in (climb rate divided by
(CLIMB GRAD) groundspeed) in percent.
AFCS
Climb Gradient (ALT/NM) Current climb gradient (climb rate divided by

(CLIMB/NM) groundspeed) in altitude per nautical mile.
Annun/Alerts
Course to Steer (CTS) The recommended direction to steer in order

to reduce cross-track error and return to the
course line.
Appendix
Crosstrack Error (XTK) The distance the aircraft is off a desired course
in either direction, left or right.
Density Altitude (DENSITY ALT) Pressure Altitude adjusted for non-standard
Index
temperature.
Appendix A
Overview
System
Desired Track (DTK) The desired course between the active “from”
and “to” waypoints.
Instruments
Flight
Distance (Destination) The distance to the destination waypoint in the
(DIST DEST) Active Flight Plan.
Distance (Next Waypoint) (DIST The distance to the next waypoint in the Active
EIS
NEXT) Flight Plan.
Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA) The recommended minimum altitude within ten
Interface
miles left or right of the desired course on a
CNS
active flight plan or direct-to.
FL - Flight Level Altitude in hundreds of feet (regardless of
Navigation
system set altitude units).
GPS
Flight Timer (FLT TIMER) Total time in-flight (HH:MM).
Fuel Economy (ECONOMY) Current Mile Per Gallon (MPG), based upon
Planning
Flight
ground speed and fuel flow.
Fuel Endurance (ENDURANCE) This value is obtained by dividing the amount
of fuel on board by the current fuel flow
Avoidance
Hazard
(endurance to empty - no reserve included).
Fuel Flow (FUEL FLOW) The current fuel flow.
Additional
Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM) The current fuel remaining adjusted for fuel Features
burn and based on fuel flow.

Fuel Timer (FUEL TIMER) Elapsed time since the Fuel Tank Reminder
Alarm was last issued (HH:MM).
AFCS
Fuel Used (FUEL USED) The quantity of fuel used based on fuel flow.
Fuel Over Destination (FOD) The estimated amount of fuel remaining when
Annun/Alerts
the aircraft reaches the destination waypoint.

This value is calculated by multiplying fuel
flow times estimated time enroute (ETED) and
Appendix
subtracting from fuel remaining (REM).

Glide Ratio (G/R) The ratio of horizontal distance (distance
traveled over the ground) to vertical distance
Index
traveled (nn.n:1).
355
Appendix A

Overview
System

GPS ALT - GPS Altitude The current altitude in geometric height above
Instruments
Mean Sea Level (MSL).

Flight
Ground Speed (GS) The velocity the aircraft is traveling relative to a

ground position.
Ground Track (TRK) The direction of aircraft movement relative to a
EIS
ground position.
Height Above Ground Level (AGL) Height Above Ground Level. This field will
Interface
display dashes when below a specified AGL.

CNS
ISA Temp Deviation (ISA) The difference between OAT and the standard
atmospheric temperature at the current altitude.
Navigation
GPS
Mach Number (MACH) A unit of speed that measures the ratio of the
speed of an airplane to the speed of sound in
the same atmospheric conditions.
Planning
Flight
Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA) Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe altitude
within ten miles of the aircraft’s present
position.
Avoidance
Hazard
Next Waypoint (Next Waypoint) The next waypoint in the flight plan or direct-to
route.
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
Additional
The static air temperature outside the aircraft.

Features
This is the temperature measured by the OAT

probe, with correction for ram temperature rise.
Ram Air Temperature (RAT) The temperature measured by the OAT probe,
AFCS
without correction for ram temperature rise.

Sunrise (SUNRISE) The time at which the sun rises on this day
Annun/Alerts
(current location).
Sunset (SUNSET) The time at which the sun sets on this day
(current location).
Appendix
SXM (Now Playing)

The selection now playing on SiriusXM Radio.
(SXM)
Index
Appendix A
Overview
System
Time En Route (Destination) The estimated time it takes to reach the
destination waypoint from the present position,
Instruments
(ETE DEST)
Flight
Time En Route (Next) The estimated time it takes to reach the next
(ETE NEXT) waypoint form the present position, based upon
EIS
Time of Arrival (Destination) (ETA The estimated time at which the aircraft should
DEST) reach the destination waypoint, based upon
Interface
CNS
current speed and track.
Time of Arrival (Next Waypoint) The estimated time at which the aircraft should
Navigation
(ETA NEXT) reach the next waypoint, based upon current
GPS
speed and track.
Time to VNAV (VNAV TIME) The estimated time it takes to reach the VNAV
Planning
waypoint form the present position, based upon
Flight
Time (Local) (TIME) The current time and date in 12-hour or 24-
Avoidance
Hazard
hour format.
Time (UTC) (TIME) The current time and date in Universal (UTC)
time.
Additional
Features
Vertical Speed (VS) The rate of climb or descent (GPS-derived).
Vertical Speed Required (VSR) The vertical speed necessary to descend/climb
from the current position and altitude to the
AFCS
previously selected VNAV position and altitude,

Annun/Alerts
Wx (Altimeter) The altimeter setting at the nearest METAR

(WX ALTIM) reporting station.
Wx (Dew Point) The dew point at the nearest weather reporting
Appendix
(WX DEW PT) station.

Wx (Rel. Humidity) The relative humidity at the nearest weather
(WX HUMIDITY) reporting station.
Index
357
Appendix A

Overview
System

Wx (Temperature) The temperature at the nearest weather
Instruments
(WX TEMP) reporting station.

Flight
Wx (Wind) (WX WIND) The surface wind at the nearest METAR

reporting station.
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Appendix B
APPENDIX B: UTILITIES
Overview
System
FLIGHT LOG
Instruments
Flight
The Flight Log shows a list of any recorded flights, including date, route of flight, and
flight time. The G3X Touch™ saves up to 50 recorded flights. Entries on this list are
automatically created for each flight.
EIS
With EIS items configured, recording begins when the engine hours timer or airframe
total hours is running. This allows recording of time spent on ground before takeoff
and after landing while the engine is running.
Interface
CNS
With no EIS items configured, recording begins when the aircraft reaches 250 feet
of altitude. When the aircraft’s groundspeed drops below 30 knots, the flight entry is
Navigation
saved and a new entry is recorded when departing the airport. A touch-and-go or brief
GPS
stop of less than 10 minutes appends to the current flight record, rather than starting
a new entry.
Planning
Flight
VIEWING THE FLIGHT LOG
Select any listed entry in the log to view additional information, including a map
Avoidance
Hazard
displaying the actual path flown.
Viewing details for a flight:
Additional
Features
1) From the split-screen or standalone MFD, press the MENU Key twice to
display the Main Menu.
2) Touch the Flight Log Button. The Flight Log Page is displayed. (Hours
AFCS
and minutes can be displayed by pressing the MENU Key and touching the
Show Hours and Minutes Button). Tenths of hours is the default.
3) Touch the desired flight log in the list. The Flight Log Map Window is
Annun/Alerts
displayed. Date, start/stop times, route, hours, distance, and actual flight
path are displayed.
4) Press the Back Key, or touch the Flight Log Page beside the Flight Log Map
Appendix
Window, to return to the Flight Log Page.

Index
359
Index Appendix Annun/Alerts AFCS Features Avoidance Planning Navigation Interface EIS Instruments Overview
360
Appendix B
Flight Log List
Flight Log Map

190-02472-00 Rev. D
Appendix B
DELETING FLIGHT LOGS
Overview
System
You can delete a single flight log or delete all flight logs from the Flight Log.
Deleting a single flight log:
Instruments
Flight
1) From the split-screen and/or full-screen MFD, press the MENU Key twice to
display the Main Menu. (The ‘Flight Log’ option is not available from the
full-screen PFD Main Menu).
2) Touch the Flight Log Button. The Flight Log Page is displayed.
EIS
3) Touch the desired flight log in the list. The Flight Log Map Window is
displayed.
Interface
CNS
4) Press the MENU Key to display the flight log map menu.
5) Touch the Delete Flight Button.
Navigation
6) Touch the Yes Button to delete the flight log.
GPS
Deleting all flight records:
Planning
Flight
2) Touch the Flight Log Button. The Flight Log Page is displayed.
Avoidance
Hazard
3) Press the MENU Key to display the flight log menu.
4) Touch the Delete All Button.
Additional
5) Touch the Yes Button to delete the flight log. Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
361
Appendix B
TRACK LOG
Overview
System
The G3X Touch draws an electronic breadcrumb trail or “track log” on the Map Page.
The track log contains points along its path, including time and location for each point.
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Track Log
Interface
CNS
Track Log (Map Page)

Navigation
GPS
The track log starts recording as soon as the G3X Touch gets a location fix. For the
best results, clear the track log before each flight.
Planning
Flight
The percentage of memory used by the current track log appears at the top of the
Track Log Window. After the track log is cleared, it shows zero percent. When the
screen reaches 100%, the most recent track points start to overwrite the least recent
Avoidance
Hazard
track points (if ‘Wrap’ is selected in the Record Mode Field).

The Save feature allows storage of up to 15 track logs.
Additional
Features
Displaying/removing the track log on the Map Page:

1) From the Map Page, press the MENU Key. The Map Options Window is
displayed.
AFCS
2) Touch the Set Up Map... Button to display the Map Setup Page.
3) Touch the Line Tab to display the track log setup options.
Annun/Alerts
4) Touch the Track Log Show/Hide Button.

5) Touch the Show Button to display the track log. Touch the Hide Button to
remove the track log.
Appendix
Index
363
Appendix B

Map Setup Page - Line Tab
Map Page Menu
190-02472-00 Rev. D
Appendix B
Changing track log settings:

Overview
System
1) From the Map Page, press the MENU Key. The Map Page Menu is
displayed.
Instruments
Flight
3) Touch the Line Tab to display the track log setup options.
4) Touch the button associated with the desired setting.
5) Touch the button to select the desired option. Repeat step for each setting
EIS
to be changed.
6) Press the BACK Key to return to the Map Page.
Interface
• Track Record Mode - ’Wrap’ records over the oldest tracks when the track log
CNS
reaches 100%. ‘Fill’ records a track log until the track log is full (100%).
Navigation
• Track Interval - ’Distance’ records track points after a specified distance has been
GPS
traveled. ‘Time’ creates track points after a specified time has elapsed. 'Auto'
records track points only when necessary to recreate the track (this has the benefit
of saving memory on long straight flights).
Planning
Flight
• Track Color - Select a color for the track when it appears on the map.
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Track Log Window (Split-Screen)
Appendix B
Saving a track log:
Overview
System
1) From the split-screen or full-screen MFD, press the MENU Key twice. (The
‘Track Log’ option is not available from the full-screen PFD Main Menu).
2) Touch the Track Log Button. The Track Log Page is displayed.
Instruments
Flight
3) Press the MENU Key to display the track log menu.
4) Touch the Save Active Track Button.
5) Touch the track selection button to choose what will be saved.
EIS
Entire Active Track, Past 24 Hours, Past 7 Days, Selected Flight, or
Selected Dates
Interface
6) If Selected Flight or Selected Dates are chosen, select the flight or dates
CNS
using the buttons.
7) Touch the OK Button to save the track, or touch the Cancel Button to
Navigation
cancel the save.
GPS
Editing a track log:
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
3) Touch the desired track log in the list. The Saved Track Window is displayed.
4) Touch the Name Button to display the keypad. Use the keypad to select
Additional
the name, then touch the Enter Button. Touch the Cancel Button to exit Features
without changing the name.

5) Touch the Color Button to display a list of color choices. Touch the button
for the desired color
AFCS
6) Touch the Show on Map Button to show the track on the map.
Annun/Alerts
Deleting a single saved track log:

Appendix
3) Touch the desired track log in the list. The Saved Track Window is displayed.
Index
4) Press the MENU Key to display the saved track menu.
365
Appendix B
5) Touch the Delete Saved Track Button.

Overview
System
6) Touch the Yes Button to delete the saved track, or touch the No Button to
cancel the deletion.
Deleting all saved track logs:
Instruments
Flight
EIS
3) Press the MENU Key to display the track log menu.
Interface
4) Touch the Delete All Saved Tracks Button.

CNS
5) Touch the Yes Button to delete all saved tracks, or touch the No Button to
cancel the deletion.
Navigation
GPS
TRACK VECTOR
The G3X Touch draws an electronic “Track Vector” on the Map Page. The horizontal
Planning
Flight
marks on the Track Vector can be set to 'time' or 'distance'. The entire length of the
track is set to the specified time or distance and the lines are 'whole' values. When
configured to 'time', the tick marks will always be on the whole minute, even if the
Avoidance
Hazard
total distance is set to XX:30 (mm:ss). When configured to 'distance' and the units are
miles, the tick marks will always be on the whole mile, even if the total distance is a
fraction (in this case, there would not be a tick mark at the end of the line).
Additional
Features
AFCS
Track
Vector
Annun/Alerts
Track Vector (Map Page)

Appendix
Index
Appendix B
Changing the Track Vector settings on the Map Page:
Overview
System
1) From the Map Page, press the MENU Key. The Map Page Menu is
displayed.
Instruments
Flight
3) Touch the Line Tab to display the Track Vector setup options.
4) Touch the Track Vector Off/Distance/Time Button.
5) Touch the Off Button to turn the Track Vector On or Off.
EIS
Or:
Touch the Distance Button to define the length of the Track Vector by
Interface
distance. Touch the distance value button to bring up the keypad to select
CNS
the distance, and touch the Enter Button.
Or:
Navigation
GPS
Touch the Time Button to define the length of the Track Vector by time.
Touch the + Button or - Button to select the time. (Time is displayed in
MM:SS)
Planning
Flight
6) Press the BACK Key to return to the Map Page.
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Track Vector Settings (Map Setup Page)
367
Appendix B
WEIGHT & BALANCE

Overview
System
NOTE: Refer to the G3X Touch Installation Manual for information on con-
figuring the Weight & Balance Page.
Instruments
Flight
Weight & Balance may be used during pre-flight preparations to verify the weight
and balance conditions of the aircraft. By entering the weight values on this page, the
G3X Touch can calculate the total weight, moment, and center of gravity (CG).
EIS
NOTE: This information is only for flight planning purposes. Consult the
aircraft’s pilot operating handbook for the official weight and balance data.
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
C.G.
Location
Avoidance
(in range)
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Stations
Annun/Alerts
Weight and Balance Page - Weight vs C.G. (C.G. in Range)

Appendix
Index
Appendix B
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
C.G.
Location
(out of
range)
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Weight and Balance Page - Weight vs C.G. (C.G. Out of Range)
Avoidance
Hazard
Performing weight and balance calculations:
Additional
Features
2) Touch the Weight & Balance Button. The Weight & Balance Page is
displayed. (Kilograms can be displayed by pressing the MENU Key and
touching the Show Kilograms Button)
AFCS
3) Touch the desired station button. The FUEL keypad is displayed.

4) Use the keypad to select the desired weight, then touch the Enter Button.
The calculated moment, weight, and CG figures are calculated and appear
Annun/Alerts
at the top of the page. Touch the Cancel Button to exit without changing
the weight.
5) Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to enter the weights for each station.
Appendix
Index
369
Appendix B
Resetting weight & balance page:

Overview
System
1) From the Weight & Balance page, press the MENU Key.
2) Touch the Empty Aircraft Button.
3) Touch the Yes Button to empty the aircraft, or touch the No Button to
Instruments
Flight
cancel the action.

EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
Weight & Balance Page Menu

GPS
If the Loading Limit for a particular station is exceeded, the station data will turn
yellow.
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Loading Limit Exceeded

Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Appendix B
DISPLAYING WEIGHT VS MOMENT
Overview
System
When configured, the Weight & Balance page can also display Weight vs Moment
instead of Weight vs C.G.. Refer to the G3X Touch Installation Manual for more
Instruments
information on configuring the Weight & Balance page.
Flight
Displaying Weight vs Moment:
EIS
2) Touch the Weight & Balance Button. The Weight & Balance Page is
displayed.
Interface
CNS
4) Touch Show Weight vs Moment.
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
Weight and Balance Page - Weight vs Moment

AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
371
Appendix B
PROXIMITY WAYPOINTS AND ALARMS

Overview
System
The Proximity Waypoints Page allows the pilot to define an alarm circle around a
waypoint location. The Proximity Alarm will alert the pilot when the aircraft enters
Instruments
the boundary of the defined radius, however does not alert the pilot when leaving the
Flight
radius.
Proximity Waypoint Alarms must be 'On' for alerting to occur, otherwise the Proximity
Waypoint is simply a red circle on the navigation map.
EIS
Creating proximity waypoints:

1) Press the MENU Key twice to open the Main Menu.
Interface
CNS
2) Touch the User Waypoints Button. The User Waypoints Page is displayed.
3) Touch the Proximity Tab. The Proximity Waypoints List is displayed.
Navigation
GPS
4) Press the MENU Key. The Proximity Waypoint Menu is displayed.

5) Touch the New Proximity Waypoint Button.
6) Touch the Use Map Button or the Use Identifier Button.
Planning
Flight
7) If using an identifier, select the desired waypoint using the Waypoint

Identifier Window. Touch the Enter Key to create the proximity waypoint.
Avoidance
Touch the Cancel Key to exit without creating a proximity waypoint.

Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Appendix B
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
Proximity
Circle
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Proximity
Alarm
Proximity Waypoint Alarm
Avoidance
Hazard
Enabling/disabling proximity waypoint alarms:
Additional
Features
3) Touch the Proximity Tab. The Proximity Waypoints List is displayed.
AFCS
5) Touch the Enable Proximity Alarms Button, or the Disable Proximity

Alarms Button, to enable/disable proximity alarms.
Annun/Alerts
Or:
2) Touch the Setup Button. The Setup Page is displayed.
Appendix
3) Touch the Alarms Button. The Alarms Setup Page is displayed.

4) Touch the Proximity Waypoint On Button or Off Button, to enable/disable
proximity alarms.
Index
373
Appendix B
Deleting a single proximity waypoint:

Overview
System

3) Touch the PROXIMITY Tab. The Proximity Waypoints List is displayed.
Instruments
Flight
4) Touch the desired proximity waypoint in the list. The Proximity Waypoint
Menu is displayed.
5) Touch the Delete Proximity Waypoint Button.
EIS
6) Touch the Yes Button to delete the proximity waypoint, or touch the No
Button to cancel the deletion.
Interface
Deleting all proximity waypoints:

CNS

Navigation
GPS
3) Touch the PROXIMITY Tab. The Proximity Waypoints List is displayed.

Planning
Flight
5) Touch the Delete All Button.

6) Touch the Yes Button to delete all proximity waypoints, or touch the No
Button to cancel the deletion.
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Appendix C
APPENDIX C: SD CARD USE AND DATABASES
Overview
System
NOTE: It is recommended to maintain three SD cards for the G3X system.
Instruments
Flight
One SD card should be used exclusively for loading software, another SD
card should be used exclusively for loading databases, and a third card
should be used exclusively for flight purposes.
EIS
NOTE: When flying the G3X system, any SD card(s) used in the GDU™(s)
should contain only files which are necessary for the flight of the aircraft.
Interface
CNS
Non-essential files may have a negative effect on display performance.
Navigation
GPS
NOTE: When database files are loaded to the SD card, any previously
loaded database files of the same type residing on the SD card will be
overwritten. This includes loading a database of a different coverage
Planning
Flight
area or data cycle than that currently residing on the SD card.
Avoidance
NOTE: In the event there is a file corruption problem with the SD card,
Hazard
it may be necessary to reformat the card. This can cause an issue when
formatting the SD card using Mac OS, where the newly formatted card
Additional
will not be recognized by the G3X Touch. When using a Macintosh Features
computer to format the SD card, Garmin recommends using the SD

Memory Card Formatter application available as a download from
SDcard.org. When running the application, use the Quick Format option.
AFCS
The G3X Touch uses an SD Card for software updates, database updates, MapSource®
Annun/Alerts
data, checklist files, Chartview, Flight Data Logging, exporting Track Logs/User
Waypoints, importing/exporting Flight Plans and user-downloaded vehicles. Garmin
recommends using a 8 GB SanDisk® or Toshiba® SD Card.
Appendix
MapSource detailed maps are available from FlyGarmin.com. Refer to the Garmin
website (www.garmin.com) for instructions on downloading software updates. Refer
to the latest revision of the G3X Touch Installation Manual for software update
Index
instructions.
375
Appendix C
INSTALLING AND REMOVING SD CARDS

Overview
System
NOTE: SD Cards are not waterproof. They should not be exposed to moisture
or excessive static charges, and should be stored in the case supplied with
Instruments
the card.
Flight
SD Card Slot
EIS
Interface
CNS
SD Card Slot - GDU™ 460 (10.6 inch)

Installing an SD Card:
Navigation
GPS
1) Insert the card into the slot at the lower, center, front of the bezel. Be sure
the SD Card contacts are facing downwards. (GDU 470: Insert card in the
slot at the upper right, with the contacts facing right).
Planning
Flight
2) Firmly push the card into the unit. It is not necessary to force the card.
If you insert an SD Card and get a card format not recognized message, try removing
Avoidance
the card and reinserting it. If the card is still not recognized, contact Garmin Product
Hazard
Support or your Garmin dealer.

Removing an SD Card:
Additional
Features
1) Push the card into the unit until it stops.

2) Release the card. The card should eject for easy removal.
3) With the card ejected, pull the card out of the slot.
AFCS
G3X TOUCH DATABASES

Annun/Alerts
The following databases are available with the G3X Touch. See the Additional
Feature section for information on Airport Directories, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi®. See
the Hazard Avoidance section for information on Obstacles and Terrain.
Appendix
Refer to www.fly.garmin.com for available databases.

Index
Appendix C
Database
Overview
System
Worldwide Basemap
Airport Directory (AOPA or AC-U-KWIK)
Instruments
Navigation Database (Jeppesen® or by Garmin)
Flight
FliteCharts®
SafeTaxi®
EIS
Obstacle
Terrain
Interface
CNS
VFR Sectionals
IFR Charts
Navigation
GPS
Available Databases
BASEMAP
Planning
Flight
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as
river, lakes, and towns. It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is
Avoidance
Hazard
no expiration date.
AIRPORT DIRECTORY DATABASES

Additional
Features
The AOPA Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the
U.S. and it is updated on a 56-day cycle. Detailed information for over 5,300 U.S.
airports, along with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs can be
AFCS
viewed. This service allows the pilot to plan an overnight, choose fuel stops, find
ground transportation, etc.
Annun/Alerts
Optional airport directory databases such as AC-U-KWIK are also supported. AC-
U-KWIK provides complete listings of FBOs, charter companies, fuel suppliers, ground
transportation, maintenance and catering services at public airports across the world.
Appendix
Index
377
Appendix C
NAVIGATION DATABASE
Overview
System
The G3X Touch includes an internal navigation database that provides location and
facility information for thousands of airports, VORs, NDBs, and more. Updates to the
Instruments
navigation database are available every 28 days online. There are two navigation
Flight
database products available: the Jeppesen Navigation Database, which is sourced by

Jeppesen, and Navigation Databases sourced by Garmin.
EIS
NOTE: Although the Jeppesen Navigation Database and the US VFR

Navigation Database contain much of the same information, pilots may notice
differences in behavior, nearest list functionality, direct-to functionality, and
Interface
CNS
map page display due to data content variations. The Navigation Databases
do not contain any approach data.
Navigation
• *Airport—identifier, facility name, city/state/country, latitude/longitude, field

GPS
elevation, available fuel types, runway designations and layout, runway surface,
runway length, runway width, runway lighting, communication frequencies, and
published approaches.
Planning
Flight
• Weather—frequencies associated with an airport (ASOS, ATIS, and AWOS).

• *VORs—identifier, facility name, city/state/country, location (latitude/longitude),
Avoidance
Hazard
frequency, service volume (high, low, terminal), and type (such as VOR-DME,
TACAN, and VORTAC).
Additional
Features
• *NDBs—identifier, facility name, city/state/country, location (latitude/longitude),

and frequency.
• Intersections—identifier, nearest VOR, radial and distance from nearest VOR,
AFCS
location (latitude/longitude), and region/country.

• ARTCC—Air Route Traffic Control Centers.
Annun/Alerts
• Airspace—boundaries (Class B, Class C, Control Zones, SUAs, and MOAs),

controlling agency, and vertical boundaries.
• FSS—Flight Service Stations.
Appendix
* Symbology used for NDBs, VORs, and airports is consistent with those used on a
sectional chart.
Index
Appendix C
Overview
NOTE: After performing a navigation database update, verify all flight plan(s)
System
(routes) are current. If there is an obsolete aviation point in a saved route,
the flight plan cannot be activated until the obsolete points are removed.
Instruments
Flight
FLITECHARTS
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts. This database is updated on a
28-day cycle. FliteCharts will not longer function 180 days after the expiration date.
EIS
CHARTVIEW
Interface
CNS
Chartview is Jeppesen's version of FliteCharts. The two versions of charts have the
same basic information.
Navigation
ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a
GPS
period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is
disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no longer available for viewing. The
Planning
ChartView database is always on the SD Card and is not copied to the GDU’s internal
Flight
memory.
A Chartview Key is available for purchase from FlyGarmin.com, but Chartview
Avoidance
Hazard
displays Jepp Charts available only from Jeppesen.
SAFETAXI
Additional
Features
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports.
These diagrams aid in following ground control instructions by accurately displaying
the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways, ramps, runways, terminals, and
AFCS
services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
OBSTACLE
Annun/Alerts
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a
potential hazard to aircraft. Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle
Appendix
database. It is very important to note that not all obstacles are necessarily charted and
therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is updated on
a 56-day cycle.
Index
379
Appendix C
TERRAIN
Overview
System
The terrain database is updated periodically and has no expiration date.

Instruments
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from
Flight
government agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates the

data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
EIS
UPDATING G3X TOUCH DATABASES

The G3X Touch database updates can be obtained by visiting the ‘flyGarmin’ website
Interface
(www.fly.garmin.com). The ‘flyGarmin’ website requires the unit’s System ID to update

CNS
databases. This allows the databases to be encrypted with the unit’s unique System ID
when copied to the SD Card.
Navigation
GPS
Obtaining the System ID:

1) Press the MENU Key twice to access the Main Menu.
Planning
2) Touch the Tools Button.

Flight
3) Touch the Database Information Button. The Database Information

Page is displayed. Scroll down if necessary to see the System ID.
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
381
Appendix C

Database Information Page
190-02472-00 Rev. D
System ID
Appendix C
Updating G3X Touch Databases:

Overview
System
Equipment required to perform the update:

• Windows-compatible PC computer
Instruments
• Verbatim 96504 SD Card Reader or equivalent

Flight
• Updated database obtained from the flyGarmin website

• SD Card, 8 GB recommended (Garmin recommends SanDisk® or Toshiba® SD
EIS
cards)
1) After the data has been copied to the SD Card, insert the SD card in the SD
Interface
card slot of the display.

CNS
2) Power on the display. The Update Databases Page is displayed. A green

checkbox indicates the database installed on the G3X Touch is up to date.
Navigation
An empty checkbox indicates the database on the SD card is more current

GPS
and should be installed.

Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Update Databases Page
Appendix C
3) Touch the Update All Button. The database status is updated.
Overview
System
Or:

Touch a single database, and touch NO/YES on the 'Update selected
database?' window. The selected database status is updated.
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Update Databases Page (Database Status Updated)
4) Once the database(s) have been successfully updated, the SD Card can be
Avoidance
Hazard
removed from the unit.
5) Repeat steps 1-4 for the remaining GDUs if applicable.
Additional
Reloading G3X Touch Databases: Features
1) Insert the SD card containing the data to be reloaded into the SD card slot
of the display.
AFCS
2) Power on the display.

Annun/Alerts
4) Touch Tools.
5) Touch Database Information.
Appendix
7) Proceed with step 1-4 above.

Index
383
Appendix C
IMPORTING/EXPORTING FLIGHT PLANS TO/FROM THE SD

Overview
System
CARD
Refer to Section 6.1 for information on importing/exporting/renaming flight plans.
Instruments
Flight
FLIGHT DATA LOGGING

The G3X Touch also has the ability to log flight data. Refer to the Additional Features
section for more information.
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Appendix D
APPENDIX D: MAP DATUM AND LOCATION
Overview
System
FORMATS
Instruments
MAP DATUMS
Flight
A datum is a mathematical model of the Earth that approximates the shape of the
Earth and enables calculations to be carried out in a consistent and accurate manner.
EIS
The datum is physically represented by a framework of ground monuments (such as
trig. stations) whose locations have been accurately measured and calculated on
Interface
this reference surface. Lines of latitude and longitude on a chart are referenced to a
CNS
specific map datum. Every chart has a map datum reference and the G3X Touch can
be set to match most of those commonly used.
Navigation
GPS
LOCATION FORMATS
Your current location can be viewed on the GPS in the form of coordinates. Since
Planning
Flight
different charts use different location formats, Garmin GPS units allow you to choose
the correct coordinate system for the type of chart you are using. The most common
format is latitude and longitude, which is used by all Garmin units. You can change the
Avoidance
Hazard
location format to use with other coordinate systems.
Map Datum and Location Format selection can be performed on the Position Setup
Additional
Page. Features
Changing position settings:

AFCS
2) Touch the Setup Button. The Setup Page is displayed.

3) Touch the Position Button. The Position Setup Page is displayed.
Annun/Alerts
4) Touch the Location Format button. The Location Format choices are
displayed. Touch the button with the desired format.
5) Touch the Map Datum button. The Map Datum choices are displayed.
Appendix
Touch the button with the desired format.

6) Press the MENU Key to display the Position Menu. Touch the Restore
Defaults Button to restore the default settings for all the position items.
Index
385
386
Appendix D
Position Setup Page

190-02472-00 Rev. D
Appendix E
APPENDIX E: GENERAL TIS-A INFORMATION
Overview
System
NOTE: Aircraft without an operational transponder are invisible to TIS-A.
Instruments
Flight
avoidance resolution advisories and does not, under any circumstances or
EIS
conditions, relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
the display.
The Traffic Information Service (TIS-A) provides traffic advisory information to non-
Planning
Flight
TAS/TCAS-equipped aircraft. TIS-A is a ground-based service providing the relative
locations of all ATCRBS (Air Traffic Control Radar Beacon System) Mode-A and Mode-C
transponder equipped aircraft within a specified service volume. The TIS-A ground
Avoidance
Hazard
sensor uses real-time track reports to generate traffic notification. The G3X Touch
displays TIS-A traffic information on the Navigation Map. Surveillance data includes
all transponder-equipped aircraft within the coverage volume. The G3X Touch displays
Additional
Features
up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3,000 feet below, to 3,500 feet
above the requesting aircraft.
TIS-A VS. TAS/TCAS

AFCS
The main difference between the Traffic Information System (TIS-A) and Traffic
Annun/Alerts
Advisory (TAS) or Traffic Collision Avoidance Systems (TCAS) is the source of surveillance
data. TAS/TCAS uses an airborne interrogator with a half-second update rate, while
TIS-A utilizes the terminal Mode-S ground interrogator and accompanying data link to
provide a five-second update rate. TIS-A and TAS/TCAS have similar ranges.
Appendix
Index
387
Appendix E
TIS-A LIMITATIONS
Overview
System
TIS-A relies on surveillance of the Mode-S radar system, which is a “secondary

surveillance” radar system similar to that used by ATCRBS. Many limitations are
Instruments
inherent in secondary radar surveillance. Information provided by TIS-A is neither

Flight
better nor more accurate than the information used by ATC. TIS-A is intended only to
assist in visual acquisition of other aircraft in visual meteorological conditions (VMC).
While TIS-A is a useful aid for visual traffic avoidance, system limitations must be
EIS
considered to ensure proper use. No recommended avoidance maneuvers are given,

nor authorized, as a direct result of a TIS-A intruder display or TIS-A advisory.
Interface
• TIS-A operation may be intermittent during turns or other maneuvering.

CNS
• TIS-A is dependent on two-way, line-of-sight communications between the aircraft

and the Mode-S radar antenna. Whenever the structure of the aircraft comes
Navigation
GPS
between the transponder antenna and the ground-based radar antenna, the signal
may be temporarily interrupted.
Planning
Flight
NOTE: Refer to the TIS-A Limitations section of the Aeronautical Informa-

tion Manual (AIM) for a more comprehensive explanation of limitations and
anomalies associated with TIS-A.
Avoidance
Hazard
NOTE: TIS-A is unavailable at low altitudes in many area of the United States.
This is often the case in mountainous regions.
Additional
Features
NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for Mode S geographical coverage. Opera-

tion of the ground stations is the responsibility of the FAA. Refer to the AIM
AFCS
for a Terminal Mode S radar site map.

Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Appendix E
TIS-A information is collected during a single radar sweep. Collected information
Overview
is then sent through the Mode S uplink on the next radar sweep. Because of this, the
System
surveillance information is approximately five seconds old. TIS-A ground station tracking
software uses prediction algorithms to compensate for this delay. These algorithms
Instruments
use track history data to calculate expected intruder positions consistent with the time
Flight
of display. Occasionally, aircraft maneuvering may cause variations in this calculation
and create slight errors on the Map Page which affect relative bearing information and
the target track vector and may delay display of the intruder information. However,
EIS
intruder distance and altitude typically remain relatively accurate and may be used to
assist in spotting traffic. The following errors are common examples:
Interface
CNS
• When the client or intruder aircraft maneuvers excessively or abruptly, the tracking
algorithm may report incorrect horizontal position until the maneuvering aircraft
stabilizes.
Navigation
GPS
• When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that intercepts the client aircraft
course at a shallow angle (either overtaking or head-on) and either aircraft abruptly
Planning
changes course within 0.25 nm, TIS-A may display the intruder aircraft on the
Flight
incorrect side of the client aircraft.
These are rare occurrences and are typically resolved within a few radar sweeps once
Avoidance
Hazard
the client/intruder aircraft course stabilizes.
Pilots using TIS-A can provide valuable assistance in the correction of malfunctions
Additional
by reporting observations of undesirable performance. Reports should identify the time Features
of observation, location, type and identity of the aircraft, and describe the condition
observed. Reports should also include the type of transponder and transponder
software version. Since TIS-A performance is monitored by maintenance personnel,
AFCS
not ATC, malfunctions should be reported in the following ways:

• By telephone to the nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) facility
Annun/Alerts
• By FAA Form 8000-7, Safety Improvement Report (postage-paid card can be obtained
at FAA FSSs, General Aviation District Offices, Flight Standards District Offices, and
General Aviation Fixed Base Operators)
Appendix
Index
389
390
Appendix E
Blank Page

190-02472-00 Rev. D
Appendix F
APPENDIX F: ABNORMAL OPERATION
Overview
System
LOSS OF GPS POSITION
Instruments
Flight
When the G3X Touch loses the GPS signal for any reason, the following will occur:
• A red 'X' will appear over the airplane icon on the map.
• Any GPS dependent data fields will not be available.
EIS
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
GPS Signal Lost
Planning
Flight
HAZARD DISPLAY WITH LOSS OF GPS POSITION
Avoidance
Hazard
If the Terrain Page doesn’t have at least a 3D fix (i.e. altitude unknown), a
Red X will be displayed.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Terrain Page Red X Map Page Red X (Terrain)

Index
(Split-Screen) (Split-Screen)
391
Appendix F
G3X TOUCH SYSTEM FAILURE ANNUNCIATIONS

Overview
System
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed over
the instrument(s) or data experiencing the failure. After starting the system, certain
Instruments
instruments remain invalid as equipment begins to initialize. All instruments should

Flight
be operational within one minute of starting the system. If any instrument remains
flagged, the G3X Touch should be serviced.
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook for additional information
EIS
regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.

Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
G3X Touch System Failure Annunciations

AFCS
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
Annun/Alerts
The Attitude Indicator includes permanent red warning chevrons to indicate extreme
pitch angles. A series of downward-pointing chevrons appear at 50˚ above the horizon
line, and upward-pointing chevrons at 30˚ below the horizon line.
Appendix
By default, the PFD will also declutter non-essential information when the G3X Touch
detects unusual attitude. The declutter is triggered if the aircraft exceeds 30˚ nose up,
OR 20˚ nose down, OR˚ 65 of bank in either direction. This can be disabled in the G3X
Index
Touch Configuration Mode; refer to the Installation Manual for more information.
Appendix F
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Interface
CNS
Pitch Attitude Warnings
REVERSIONARY MODE (FULL-SCREEN)
Navigation
GPS
In the event of a display failure, the G3X Touch System automatically switches to
reversionary (backup) mode. In reversionary mode, the information is presented on the
Planning
Flight
remaining display in the split-screen configuration.
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
G3X Touch Full-Screen Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)

Annun/Alerts
The G3X Touch will revert to showing ADAHRS data from a standby flight display
(such as a Garmin G5 Electronic Flight Instrument) if no data is available from a
dedicated ADAHRS unit.
Appendix
Index
393
Appendix F
AFCS REVERSIONARY MODE

Overview
System
In a two display system, in the event of a PFD failure, the MFD goes into reversionary
mode, and the autopilot is disengaged. If the MFD fails, the PFD goes into reversionary
Instruments
mode and the autopilot continues to function.

Flight
In a GMC 507 installation, in the event of display failure(s), basic autopilot

functionality remains as long as a ADAHRS unit is still available. The FD is no longer
available, but LVL, AP, ALT, and YD are available.
EIS

Interface
CNS
If the PFD has automatically reverted to using its own internal GPS navigation source
due to unavailability of external GPS navigation data, 'REV' is displayed in the lower
left quadrant of the HSI and 'VFR' is displayed in the lower right quadrant. In addition,
Navigation
GPS
a "Using internal GPS flight plan for navigation" system message is displayed.
SYNTHETIC VISION TROUBLESHOOTING

Planning
Flight
Synthetic Vision is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading,

obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs (in most areas). Synthetic Vision is disabled
Avoidance
Hazard
when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case
of invalid Synthetic Vision data, the PFD display reverts to the standard blue-
over-brown attitude display.
Additional
Features
Synthetic Vision becomes disabled without the following data resources:

• Attitude data
AFCS
• Heading data
• GPS position data
Annun/Alerts
• Terrain data
• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database
Appendix
REVERSIONARY MODE WITH SYNTHETIC VISION

Synthetic Vision can be displayed on the remaining display(s) in Reversionary
Mode. If it is enabled when the system switches to Reversionary Mode,
Index
Synthetic Vision may take up to 30 seconds to display. The standard display

will be shown in the interim.
Appendix F
EMERGENCY PAGE
Overview
System
The Emergency Page provides helpful information to enhance situational
awareness in the event of an in-flight emergency. This page includes several
Instruments
shortcuts to aid a pilot during an emergency including:
Flight
Squawk 7700 Button Touch to quickly enter 7700 on a configured and
(Optional)* connected transponder.
EIS
Tune COM 121.500 Touch to quickly tune the standby frequency of a
Button connected COM radio to 121.500.
Best Glide Airport** Touch to quickly tune the Best Glide Airport tower/CTAF
Interface
CNS
frequency.
Emergency Checklist Touch to quickly access the emergency checklist.
Navigation
Button (Optional)
GPS
Smart Glide Button Touch to activate Smart Glide. Refer to the following
Planning
(Optional) section for more information on Smart Glide emergency
Flight
operations.
*For the Squawk 7700 Button to appear on the G3X Touch, the transponder must be wired to the G3X
Avoidance
Touch and GSU and the G3X Touch must be configured as the transponder controller.
Hazard
**The Best Glide Airport is determined by the GTN™ based on the configured runway surface
requirements and prioritized based on METAR reported flight rules (MVFR or better), higher arrival
Additional
estimated altitude (AGL), and longer runway. Weather information affects prioritization only if the aircraft Features
is equipped for weather data and the weather information is current.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Emergency Page (without Smart Glide) Emergency Page (with Smart Glide)
395
Appendix F
Accessing the Emergency Page:

Overview
System
From the Main Menu, touch Emergency.

Or:
Touch the Emergency Data Bar Button (if displayed).
Instruments
Flight
(Refer to the following procedure to display the Emergency button on the Data Bar.)
Displaying the Emergency Button on the Data Bar:

EIS

2) Touch Setup > Data Bar > Data Fields.
Interface
CNS
4) Touch Emergency from the list.
SMART GLIDE TM EMERGENCY OPERATIONS

Navigation
GPS
NOTE: Smart Glide is only supported when the G3X Touch is installed with
Planning
a GTN™ Xi running software version 20.22 or later.

Flight
NOTE: This section is a general overview of Smart Glide as it pertains to the

Avoidance
G3X Touch. For more information about Smart Glide operation refer to the
Hazard
GTN Xi Pilot's Guide.
Smart Glide is designed to assist the pilot by enhancing situational awareness

Additional
Features
and providing helpful automation during an emergency inoperative engine

event. The Smart Glide features referenced here are driven by the GTN Xi's
external navigator.
AFCS
Upon activation, Smart Glide assists the pilot with three critical components
of a safe recovery from an engine failure:
Annun/Alerts
• When equipped with a GFC 500 autopilot, the autopilot provides

vertical and lateral guidance:
- IAS mode with configured Best Glide airspeed reference
Appendix
- GPS mode with guidance to the destination airport

• Identifies and provides navigation guidance, as well as flight director
Index
guidance to a suitable landing location (if one is available)
Appendix F
• Provides quick access to relevant communication channels and
Overview
emergency checklists
System
ACTIVATING SMART GLIDE
Instruments
Flight
NOTE: Smart Glide is armed, meaning it is available for activation, after
passing through 1,000 feet above ground level (AGL) after takeoff. Up until
that point Smart Glide cannot be armed. Smart Glide remains armed and
EIS
available for use throughout the remainder of the flight until the aircraft
descends below 200 feet AGL. The Smart Glide Button is subdued when
Smart Glide is not armed.
Interface
CNS
Activating Smart Glide:
Press and hold the Direct-To Key for two seconds.
Navigation
GPS
Or:
From the Main Menu, touch Emergency > Smart Glide.
Or:
Planning
Flight
Touch the Emergency Data Bar Button (if displayed) > Smart Glide.
(Refer to previous section to display the Emergency Data Bar button.)
Avoidance
Hazard
Or:
Press the optional Smart Glide discrete switch (if equipped).
Note: If the Smart Glide Discrete Switch is installed, the GTN Direct-To Switch will not activate
Additional
Smart Glide. The G3X Touch Direct-To Switch will activate Smart Glide with or without the Features
Smart Glide discrete switch installed.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
397
Appendix F
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
Touch to
Activate
Smart Glide
Tower, CTAF, or
Unicom (based
EIS
Selected Best Glide on the airport's

Airport: Upon primary frequency)
Smart Glide Frequency for Best
activation, naviga- Glide Airport:
Interface
Upon Smart Glide

CNS
tion guidance is
provided to this activation, the fre-
waypoint. quency is automati-
cally tuned in the
Navigation
Standby COM.
GPS
Emergency Page
Planning
When Smart Glide is active and the Emergency Data Bar button is not displayed,
Flight
the Status Bar displays a Glide button. Touch Glide to display the Emergency Page.
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
Shortcut To Emergency Page

AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Appendix F
When Smart Glide is active, the Glide button replaces the Message (MSG) button
Overview
on the Data Bar. If a message appears that would cause the MSG button the flash,
System
the Glide button is replaced with the MSG button until the pilot views the message.
Instruments
Flight
EIS
Glide Button
AUTOPILOT OPERATION UPON SMART GLIDE ACTIVATION
Interface
CNS
The GFC 500 autopilot engages servos when the aircraft is more than 2 nm from the
destination airport. Coupling will not occur if less than 2 nm; however, the autopilot
Navigation
will remain coupled if servos are already engaged. Flight director modes activate as
GPS
follows:
• ROL mode (no airport in range) or GPS mode (airport in range)
Planning
Flight
• IAS (regardless of airport/no airport in range)
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
399
Appendix F
SMART GLIDE FUNCTIONALITY

Overview
System
Smart Glide functionality changes based on whether or not a suitable destination

airport is within the estimated glide range:
Instruments
Flight
No Suitable Airport Within Glide

Suitable Airport Within Glide Range
Range
• Replaces existing flight plan with a direct • Indicates the configured best
glide route to the destination airport glide speed*
EIS
• Triggers autopilot flight director modes • Triggers autopilot flight director

to target configured best glide speed modes to target configured
Interface
CNS
and follow the Smart Glide guidance best glide speed and level the
to the destination airport** wings**
• Alerts pilot if glide destination falls • The aural alert "No airports
Navigation
GPS
outside the Smart Glide Range Ring with within glide range" is played
the aural alert "Airport out of range"
• The alert message 'No
Planning
Flight
• Allows direct tuning of emergency

Airport - Find Alternate
transponder code 7700 from
Landing Area' is displayed
the Emergency Page***
on the Emergency Page
Avoidance
Hazard
• Allows direct tuning of the

• Tunes standby COM to destination emergency transponder code
Additional
Tower, CTAF, or Unicom frequency 7700 from the Emergency Page

Features
***
• At Smart Glide engagement, provides • Tunes standby COM to
an audible annunciation of bearing and emergency frequency 121.500
AFCS
distance to the destination airport in the

form of "Airport 'X' o'clock, 'X' miles".
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Appendix F
No Suitable Airport Within Glide

Suitable Airport Within Glide Range
Overview
System
Range
• Approximately 4 NM from the • Provides altitude voice callouts
destination airport the aural alert for 2,000 and 1,000 ft
Instruments
Flight
"Approaching airport" is played
• Approximately 2 NM from the
destination airport the aural alert
EIS
"Maneuver and Land. Airport 'X'
o'clock, 2 miles" is played
Interface
• Approximately 10 seconds after the
CNS
aircraft is 2 NM from the destination
airport, the aural alert "Disconnect
Navigation
Autopilot" is played****
GPS
* The configured best glide speed should always be set to the POH/AFM recommended glide
speed at the highest gross weight (most limiting case).
** Requires a GFC 500 autopilot.
Planning
Flight
*** Requires a compatible transponder. If the transponder is controlled by the G3X Touch,
the Squawk 7700 button is on the G3X Touch Emergency Page only. If the transponder is
controlled by the GTN, the Squawk 7700 button is on the GTN Emergency Page only. If this is
the case, the transponder can not be tuned from the G3X Touch.
Avoidance
Hazard
**** The "Disconnect Autopilot" aural alert will not play if the aircraft has enough altitude to
complete a turn back to the airport with an arrival of greater than 2,000 ft AGL.
Smart Glide Operation Upon Activation
Additional
Features
NOTE: When a CTAF or Tower frequency cannot be identified for the selected
airport, the standby frequency is automatically tuned to 121.500.
AFCS
CAUTION: During an emergency glide (with a GFC 500 autopilot coupled),

up to 30 degrees of bank may be reached when initiating a turn to get on
Annun/Alerts
course.
Appendix
Index
401
Appendix F
Autopilot Smart Glide

Engaged Active
Overview
System
Instruments
Flight
Smart Glide
Active
Displays waypoint
EIS
information for the

destination airport
Interface
CNS
Cancel Smart
Glide Button
Navigation
Smart Glide Active - Airport Within Range

GPS
NOTE: If desired, the pilot may adjust the airspeed using the pitch wheel.
Planning
Flight
AIRPORT WITHIN RANGE

Avoidance
The GTN Xi navigates the aircraft to the center of the destination airport. Approximately
Hazard
4 NM from the destination airport the aural alert "Approaching Airport" is played. At
approximately 2 NM from the destination airport the aural alert "Maneuver and Land.
Additional
Features
Airport 'X' o'clock, 2 Miles" is played. Approximately 10 seconds after the aircraft is
2 NM from the destination airport the aural alert "Disconnect Autopilot" is played.
NOTE: The "Disconnect Autopilot" aural will not play if the aircraft has enough
AFCS
altitude to complete a turn back to the field with an arrival of greater than
2,000 ft AGL.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Appendix F
Overview
System
CAUTION: At 2 NM from the destination airport (regardless of altitude AGL),
Smart Glide provides the latest appropriate time for the pilot to take control
of the aircraft by issuing an aural "Maneuver and Land" alert. It is the pilot's
Instruments
responsibility to disengage the autopilot and safely land the aircraft.
Flight
The GTN Xi monitors the performance of the descent throughout the glide to the
airport environment. If the destination airport falls out of the glide range, the aural
alert 'Airport Out of Range' is played. The GTN Xi will attempt to establish a new
EIS
destination airport, if a suitable airport can be located.
Selecting an Alternate Airport:
Interface
CNS
Selection of an alternate airport is accomplished using the GTN Xi only.
Refer to the GTN Xi Pilot's Guide for more information.
Navigation
GPS
AIRPORT NOT WITHIN RANGE
When the GTN Xi determines there is not a suitable airport within glide range, the
Planning
Flight
alert message 'No Airport - Find Alternate Landing Area' is displayed on the Emergency
Page and the aural alert "No Airports Within Glide Range" is played. When the GFC
500 is installed, the flight director modes are ROL with a wings level roll attitude and
Avoidance
Hazard
IAS with a configured best glide speed reference. The autopilot automatically engages
and follows the Smart Glide flight director guidance.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Airport Not Within Range Airport Not Within Range

(Smart Glide Not Active) (Smart Glide Active)
Index
403
Appendix F
When determining if an airport is within range, the system uses the configured Sink
Overview
Rate at VG value. When under partial power, range will be greater than expected by
System
the system. The system monitors for suitable runways that may come into glide range;
if an airport comes into glide range, the GTN Xi provides that airport as a Smart Glide
Instruments
option in the 'Alternate Airports' List on the GTN Xi for selection by the pilot. The G3X
Flight
Touch does not allow for selection of an alternate airport or modification of the flight
plan. The flight director and autopilot remain engaged until pilot action is taken.
EIS
GLIDE RANGE RING

The Glide Range Ring is displayed on the G3X Touch when the pilot configures it
Interface
CNS
'ON' in the G3X Touch Map Settings. However, the Glide Range Ring is not displayed
on the G3X Touch when Smart Glide is active regardless of settings.
Navigation
The Glide Range Ring is displayed on the GTN Xi as a cyan free-form closed shape
GPS
that accounts for the aircraft's glide range using the configured glide ratio, terrain,
obstacles, and winds to provide the pilot with a dynamic estimate of the aircraft's glide
Planning
range based on database information and altitude AGL. Refer to the GTN Xi Pilot's
Flight
Guide for more information about the Glide Range Ring operation with Smart Glide.
CANCELLING SMART GLIDE

Avoidance
Hazard
In the event engine power is restored at any point, the pilot may cancel the
emergency glide by touching Cancel Glide. The flight director will remain engaged
Additional
Features
in the previously selected lateral and vertical modes. If in GPS mode, the lateral mode
will revert to ROL. The autopilot will remain engaged.
Canceling Smart Glide:
AFCS
From the Emergency Page, touch Cancel Glide.

Or:
Annun/Alerts
Use the Smart Glide Discrete Switch (if installed).

Appendix
Index
Appendix G
APPENDIX G: DISPLAY SYMBOLS
Overview
System
VFR SYMBOLS
Instruments
Flight
Item Symbol Item Symbol
Unknown Civilian, Non-serviced
EIS
Non-towered, Non-serviced Military, Non-serviced
Interface
CNS
Towered, Non-serviced Civilian, Serviced
Navigation
GPS
Non-towered, Serviced Military, Serviced
Civilian, Soft/Unknown
Towered, Serviced
Planning
Surface, Non-serviced
Flight
Civilian, Soft/Unknown
Soft Surface, Non-serviced
Surface, Serviced
Avoidance
Hazard
Soft Surface, Serviced Atlantic Database Airports
Additional
Features
Soft Surface, Private
Paved, Private
AFCS
Seaplane Base
Annun/Alerts
Heliport
Appendix
Americas/Pacific Database Airports

Index
405
Appendix G

Overview
System
Intersection Interstate Highway

Instruments
Flight
Visual Reporting Point US Highway
LOM (compass locator at

State Highway
outer marker)
EIS
NDB (non-directional radio

National Highway
beacon)
Interface
CNS
VOR Small City

Navigation
VOR/DME Medium City

GPS
ILS/DME or DME only Large City

Planning
Flight
VORTAC Miscellaneous
Avoidance
Hazard
TACAN
Additional
Features
Navaids
AFCS
IFR SYMBOLS
Annun/Alerts

VFR, Soft/unknown Surface,
Non-serviced Low-Altitude
Appendix
VFR, Soft/unknown Surface,

Serviced High- Altitude
Atlantic Database Airports

Index
Airways
Appendix G
Overview
System
Unknown Intersection
Instruments
LOM (compass locator at
Flight
VFR Airport, Non-serviced
outer marker)
NDB (non-directional radio
IFR Airport, Non-serviced
beacon)
EIS
VFR Airport, Serviced VOR
Interface
CNS
IFR Airport, Serviced VOR/DME
Navigation
VFR, Soft Surface, Non-
GPS
ILS/DME or DME Only
serviced
VFR, Soft Surface, Serviced VORTAC
Planning
Flight
VFR, Soft Surface, Private TACAN
Avoidance
Hazard
VFR, Paved, Private Navaids
Additional
Features
VFR Seaplane Base
VFR Heliport
AFCS
Americas/Pacific Database Airports

Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
407
Appendix G
AIRSPACE SYMBOLS
Overview
System

Class B, Class E, Class B, Class E,
Instruments
Flight
CTA CTA
Class A, Class C, Class A, Class C,
TMA TMA, TRSA
EIS
Class D Class D
Interface
CNS
Mode C Veil MOA
Danger, Alert, or
Navigation
TRSA
GPS
Training Area
Restricted,
MOA Prohibited, or
Planning
Flight
Danger, Alert, or Warning Area

Training Area Radar Area
Avoidance
Hazard
Restricted,
Prohibited, or ATZ, TIZ
Warning Area
Additional
Features
Radar Area Misc/Unknown
ATZ, TIZ IFR Americas/Pacific Database

AFCS
MATZ
Annun/Alerts
ADIZ
Appendix
Misc/Unknown
VFR Americas/Pacific Database

Index
Appendix G
Overview
System
Danger or Alert
Training Area
Area
Instruments
Restricted,
Flight
Prohibited, or IFR Atlantic Database Exceptions
Warning Area
Training Area
EIS
VFR Atlantic Database Exceptions
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
409
410
Appendix G
Blank Page

190-02472-00 Rev. D
Appendix H
APPENDIX H: GLOSSARY
Overview
System
ADIZ Air Defense Identification Zone
ADS-B Automatic Dependant Surveillance-Broadcast
Instruments
Flight
Ability to receive ADS-B information from other aircraft and
ADS-B In
Ground Based Transceivers (GBTs)
ADS-B Out Ability to transmit ADS-B data on 1090 ES or 978 MHz
EIS
ADS-B
An aircraft that has both ADS-B In and ADS-B Out
Participating
capabilities.
Aircraft
Interface
CNS
ADS-R Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Rebroadcast
AGL Above Ground Level
Navigation
AIM Airman’s Information Manual
GPS
AIRMET Airman’s Meteorological Information
AP Autopilot
Planning
Flight
APT airport
ASPC airspace
Avoidance
Hazard
ARTCC Air Route Traffic Control Center
ASOS Automated Surface Observing System
ATC Air Traffic Control
Additional
Features
ATIS Automatic Terminal Information Service
AWOS Automated Weather Observing System
AFCS
The compass direction from the present position to a

Bearing
destination waypoint.
Annun/Alerts
ºC degrees Celsius
Appendix
Calibrated Indicated airspeed corrected for installation and instrument

Airspeed errors.
cm centimeter
Index
COM communication radio
411
Appendix H
Course The line between two points to be followed by the aircraft.

Overview
System
The recommended direction to steer in order to reduce

course error or stay on course. Provides the most efficient
Course to Steer
heading to get back to the desired course and proceed along
Instruments
Flight
the flight plan.

The distance the aircraft is off a desired course in either
Crosstrack Error
direction, left or right.
EIS
CTS Course to Steer

Interface
dBZ decibels ‘Z’ (radar return)

CNS
deg degree
The desired course between the active “from” and “to”
Navigation
Desired Track
GPS
waypoints.
DIS distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the present position to a
Planning
Flight
Distance
destination waypoint.
DTK Desired Track
Avoidance
Hazard
The recommended minimum altitude within ten miles left or

Enroute Safe
right of the desired course on an active flight plan or direct-
Additional
Altitude
Features
to.
ENT enter
ESA Enroute Safe Altitude
AFCS
Estimated Time of The estimated time at which the aircraft should reach the
Arrival destination waypoint, based upon current speed and track.
Annun/Alerts
Estimated Time The estimated time it takes to reach the destination waypoint
Enroute from the present position, based upon current ground speed.
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival
Appendix
ETE Estimated Time Enroute
ºF degrees Fahrenheit
Index
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
Appendix H
FAF Final Approach Fix
Overview
System
FCC Federal Communication Commission
FPL flight plan
Instruments
fpm feet per minute
Flight
FSS Flight Service Station
ft foot/feet
EIS
gal gallon(s)
geodetic altitude GPS calculated altitude
Interface
CNS
The ratio of horizontal distance (distance traveled over the
Glide Ratio, G/R
ground) to vertical distance traveled (nn.n:1).
Navigation
GND ground
GPS
gph gallons per hour
GPS Global Positioning System
Planning
Flight
Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitude; one degree latitude by
one degree longitude in size and clears the highest elevation
Grid MORA
reference point in the grid by 1000 feet for all areas of the
Avoidance
Hazard
grid
The velocity the aircraft is travelling relative to a ground
Groundspeed
Additional
position. Features
Ground-Based Provides ADS-R, TIS-B and FIS-B broadcasts to ADS-B

Transceiver participating aircraft.
Ground Track see Track
AFCS
GS Ground speed
Annun/Alerts
The direction an aircraft is pointed, based upon indications

Heading
from a magnetic compass or a properly set directional gyro.
Appendix
Hg mercury
hPa hectopascal
hr hour
Index
HSI Horizontal Situation Indicator

Hz Hertz
413
Appendix H
IAF Initial Approach Fix

Overview
System
IAT Indicated Air Temperature

ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization
Instruments
IFR Instrument Flight Rules

Flight
ILS Instrument Landing System

IMC Instrument Meteorological Conditions
EIS
in inch
Information provided by properly calibrated and set
Indicated
instrumentation on the aircraft panel.
Interface
CNS
in HG inches of mercury
Navigation
kg kilogram
GPS
kHz kilohertz
km kilometer
Planning
Flight
kt knot
Avoidance
Hazard
LAT latitude
lb pound
Leg The portion of a flight plan between two waypoints.
Additional
Features
LON longitude
AFCS
m meter
MAP Missed Approach Point
Annun/Alerts
METAR Meteorological Aviation Routine

MHz megahertz
Minimum Safe Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe altitude within ten
Appendix
Altitude miles of the aircraft present position.

MOA Military Operations Area
MSA Minimum Safe Altitude
Index
MSL Mean Sea Level
Appendix H
Overview
System
NAVAID NAVigation AID
NDB Non-directional Beacon
Instruments
NEXRAD Next Generation Radar
Flight
nm nautical mile(s)
NRST nearest
EIS
OAT Outside Air Temperature
OBS Omni Bearing Selector
Interface
CNS
psi pounds per square inch
Navigation
GPS
QTY quantity
Planning
Flight
rpm revolutions per minute
Avoidance
Hazard
SBAS Satellite-Based Augmentation System
SD Secure Digital
Additional
sec second(s) Features
SIGMET Significant Meteorological Information

AFCS
TACAN Tactical Air Navigation System

TAF Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
Annun/Alerts
TAS True Airspeed

TER terrain
TFR Temporary Flight Restriction
Appendix
TOPO topographic
TIS-A Traffic Information Service
TIS-B Traffic Information Service-Broadcast
Index
415
Appendix H
Direction of aircraft movement relative to a ground position;

Track
Overview
System
also ‘Ground Track’

TRSA Terminal Radar Service Area
Instruments
Flight
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
VFR Visual Flight Rules

EIS
VHF Very High Frequency

VNAV vertical navigation
Interface
CNS
VOL volume
VOR VHF Omni-directional Range
Navigation
very high frequency omnidirectional range station and

GPS
VORTAC
tactical air navigation
VSI Vertical Speed Indicator
Planning
Flight
VSR Vertical Speed Required

VTF vector to final
Avoidance
Hazard
WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System

WPT waypoint
Additional
Features
WX weather
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Appendix I
APPENDIX I: LICENSE AGREEMENT AND
Overview
System
WARRANTY
Instruments
CONTACT GARMIN
Flight
Contact Garmin if you have any questions while using your G3X Touch. Contact Garmin Product Support at www.
fly.garmin.com.
EIS
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
BY USING THE DEVICE, COMPONENT OR SYSTEM MANUFACTURED OR SOLD BY GARMIN (“THE GARMIN
Interface
PRODUCT”), YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE FOLLOWING SOFTWARE
CNS
LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY. Garmin Ltd. and its subsidiaries
(“Garmin”) grants you a limited license to use the software embedded in the Garmin Product (the
Navigation
“Software”) in binary executable form in the normal operation of the Garmin Product. Title, ownership
GPS
rights, and intellectual property rights in and to the Software remain with Garmin and/or its third-party
providers. You acknowledge the Software is the property of Garmin and/or its third-party providers and is
protected under the United States of America copyright laws and international copyright treaties. You further
Planning
acknowledge the structure, organization, and code of the Software are valuable trade secrets of Garmin
Flight
and/or its third-party providers and the Software in source code form remains a valuable trade secret of
Garmin and/or its third-party providers. You agree not to reproduce, decompile, disassemble, modify, reverse
assemble, reverse engineer, or reduce to human readable form the Software or any part thereof or create any
Avoidance
Hazard
derivative works based on the Software. You agree not to export or re-export the Software to any country in
violation of the export control laws of the United States of America.
Additional
LIMITED WARRANTY FOR G3X TOUCH PRODUCTS Features
Garmin G3X Touch LRUs GAD 29B/29D, GAP 26, GDU 37X, GDU 45X/46X/470, GEA 24, GMC 305, GMC 307,
GMU 22, GMU 44, GPS 20A, GSA 28, GSU 25/25B, GSU 73, GTP 59, & GTR 20 are warranted to be free
from defects in materials or workmanship for two years from the date of purchase. Within the applicable
AFCS
period, Garmin will, at its sole option, repair or replace any components that fail in normal use. Such repairs
or replacement will be made at no charge to the customer for parts or labor, provided the customer shall be
responsible for any transportation cost. This warranty does not apply to: (i) cosmetic damage, such as scratches,
Annun/Alerts
nicks and dents; (ii) consumable parts, such as batteries, unless product damage has occurred due to a defect
in materials or workmanship; (iii) damage caused by accident, abuse, misuse, water, flood, fire, or other acts of
nature or external causes; (iv) damage caused by service performed by anyone who is not an authorized service
provider of Garmin; or (v) damage to a product that has been modified or altered without the written permission
Appendix
of Garmin. In addition, Garmin reserves the right to refuse warranty claims against products or services that are
obtained and/or used in contravention of the laws of any country.
THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. THIS
Index
WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.
417
Appendix I
IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, WHETHER RESULTING FROM THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT OR FROM
Overview
System
DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace (with a new or newly-overhauled replacement product) the
Instruments
product or software or offer a full refund of the purchase price at its sole discretion. SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE
Flight
YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY.

Online Auction Purchases: Products purchased through online auctions are not eligible for warranty coverage.
Online auction confirmations are not accepted for warranty verification. To obtain warranty service, an original or
copy of the sales receipt from the original retailer is required. Garmin will not replace missing components from
EIS
any package purchased through an online auction.

International Purchases: A separate warranty may be provided by international distributors for devices
purchased outside the United States depending on the country. If applicable, this warranty is provided by the local
Interface
in-country distributor and this distributor provides local service for your device. Distributor warranties are only
CNS
valid in the area of intended distribution. Devices purchased in the United States or Canada must be returned to
the Garmin service center in the United Kingdom, the United States, Canada, or Taiwan for service.
Navigation
Garmin International, Inc. Garmin (Europe) Ltd.

GPS
1200 East 151st Street Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park

Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A. Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR, U.K.
Refer to the G3X Installation Manual for warranty registration instructions.
Planning
Flight
AOPA AIRPORT DIRECTORY NOTICE

AOPA MEMBERSHIP PUBLICATIONS, INC. AND ITS RELATED ORGANIZATIONS (HEREINAFTER COLLECTIVELY
Avoidance
“AOPA”) EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, WITH RESPECT TO THE AOPA INFORMATION INCLUDED
Hazard
IN THIS DATA, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE INFORMATION IS PROVIDED “AS IS”
AND AOPA DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING ITS ACCURACY, RELIABILITY,
Additional
Features
OR OTHERWISE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL AOPA BE LIABLE FOR ANY
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES THAT RESULT FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
THE SOFTWARE OR RELATED DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF AOPA OR AN AOPA AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. USER AGREES NOT TO SUE AOPA AND, TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, TO RELEASE AND HOLD HARMLESS AOPA FROM ANY CAUSES OF
AFCS
ACTION, CLAIMS OR LOSSES RELATED TO ANY ACTUAL OR ALLEGED INACCURACIES IN THE INFORMATION
ARISING OUT OF GARMIN’S USE OF THE INFORMATION IN THE DATASETS. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR
Annun/Alerts
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Appendix
Index
Appendix I
AC-U-KWIK LICENSE AGREEMENT
Overview
System
AC-U-KWIK AND ITS RELATED ORGANIZATIONS (HEREINAFTER COLLECTIVELY “AC-U-KWIK ORGANIZATIONS”)
EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE AC-U-KWIK INFORMATION INCLUDED IN THIS DATA,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
Instruments
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE INFORMATION IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND AC-U-KWIK ORGANIZATIONS
Flight
DO NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING ITS ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE.
LICENSEE AGREES NOT TO SUE AC-U-KWIK ORGANIZATIONS AND, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, TO
RELEASE AND HOLD HARMLESS AC-U-KWIK ORGANIZATIONS FROM ANY CAUSES OF ACTION, CLAIMS OR LOSSES
RELATED TO ANY ACTUAL OR ALLEGED INACCURACIES IN THE INFORMATION ARISING OUT OF GARMIN’S USE OF
EIS
THE INFORMATION IN THE DATASETS. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO LICENSEE.
Interface
CNS
SiriusXM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICE AGREEMENT
Hardware and required monthly subscription sold separately. USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT GARMIN HAS NO
CONTROL OVER THE TERMS AND REQUIREMENTS OF THE SUBSCRIPTION. COMPATABILITY OF HARDWARE
Navigation
EQUIPMENT WITH THEN-CURRENT SUBSCRIPTION OFFERING OF SERVICE PROVIDER IS ALSO BEYOND
GPS
GARMIN’S CONTROL. GARMIN SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY IF CHANGES IN SERVICE PROVIDER’S SUBCRIPTION
OFFERING NEGATIVELY IMPACTS OR RENDERS IMPOSSIBLE THE USE OF PURCHASED GARMIN HARDWARE
EQUIPMENT WITH THE SERVICE PROVIDER’S OFFERING IN THE FUTURE. Subscription fee is consumer only. Other
Planning
Flight
fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. All programming fees and weather data subject
to change. Sirius XM weather data and individual product availability vary by hardware equipment. Reception
of the Sirius XM signal may vary depending on location. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement included
with the Sirius XM Welcome Kit and available at www.siriusxm.com. USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT GARMIN IS
Avoidance
Hazard
AN INTENDED THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY OF SUCH CUSTOMER AGREEMENT, AND THAT ALL DISCLAIMERS
CONTAINED THEREIN EQUALLY APPLY AS IF SUCH DISCLAIMERS WERE MADE DIRECTLY BY GARMIN. Available
only in the 48 contiguous United States.
Additional
THE USER AGREES THE SIRIUS XM WEATHER SERVICE OFFERING IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, THAT YOUR GARMIN
Features
HARDWARE EQUIPMENT ONLY ALLOWS THE DISPLAY OF SUCH SERVICE OFFERING, AND THAT ANY CHANGES
BY THE SERVICE PROVIDER MAY INTERFERE WITH THE ABILITY OF YOUR GARMIN HARDWARE EQUIPMENT
TO RECEIVE OR DISPLAY SUCH SERVICE OFFERING. FURTHER, SUCH SERVICE OFFERING CONTAINS
INFORMATION FURNISHED BY OTHERS WHO ARE NOT UNDER THE CONTROL OF GARMIN, AND THEREFORE
AFCS
THE SERVICE OFFERING IS ACCORDINGLY FURNISHED WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF GARMIN, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Annun/Alerts
Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio by phone at 800.985.9200 to subscribe to XM WX Weather and/or SiriusXM
Radio.
WEATHER DATA WARRANTY

Appendix
THE WEATHER DATA SOFTWARE PRODUCT IS PROVIDED “AS IS.” ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OF
NON-INFRINGEMENT ARE HEREBY EXCLUDED.
Index
419
Appendix I
USER SAFETY
Overview
If you use XM Services it is your responsibility to exercise prudent discretion and observe all safety measures
System
required by law and your own common sense. You assume the entire risk related to your use of the Services.
XM and Garmin assume no responsibility for accidents resulting from or associated with use of the Services.
Your Radio Service includes traffic and weather information, and you acknowledge that such information is not
Instruments
for “safety for life”, but is merely supplemental and advisory in nature, and therefore cannot be relied upon as
Flight
safety-critical in connection with any aircraft, sea craft or automobile usage. This information is provided “as is”
and XM and Garmin disclaim any and all warranties, express and implied, with respect thereto or the transmission
or reception thereof. XM and Garmin further do not warrant the accuracy, reliability, completeness or timeliness
of the traffic and weather information disclosed on the Radio Service. In no event will XM and Garmin, their data
EIS
suppliers, service providers, marketing/distribution, software or Internet partners or hardware manufacturers be

liable to you or to any third party for any direct, indirect, incidental, consequential, special, exemplary or punitive
damages or lost profits resulting from use of or interruptions in the transmission or reception of the Services.
Interface
CNS
LIMITS ON OUR RESPONSIBILITY

a) DISCLAIMERS.
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED HEREIN, WE MAKE NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EITHER EXPRESS
Navigation
OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE RADIO SERVICE. YOUR USE OF THE SERVICE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK. THE CONTENT
GPS
AND FUNCTIONALITY OF THE SERVICE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED. ALL SUCH WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT)
ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED.
Planning
Flight
b) LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY.
WE ARE NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES
RELATING TO THE USE OF THE RADIO SERVICE, WHETHER BASED ON NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE. OUR TOTAL
Avoidance
Hazard
LIABILITY TO YOU AND ANY OTHER PERSONS RECEIVING OUR SERVICES, REGARDLESS OF THE CAUSE, WILL IN
NO EVENT EXCEED THE AMOUNTS THAT YOU HAVE PAID TO US FOR THE SERVICE THAT YOU RECEIVED DURING
THE SIX (6) MONTH PERIOD IMMEDIATELY PRIOR TO THE SPECIFIC EVENT THAT GAVE RISE TO THE APPLICABLE
DAMAGE OR LOSS. THIS ALLOCATION OF RISK IS REFLECTED IN OUR PRICES. YOU MAY HAVE GREATER RIGHTS
Additional
Features
THAN DESCRIBED ABOVE UNDER YOUR STATE’S LAWS

This product was developed using DAFIF™, a product of the National Geospatial-Intelligence Agency.
This product has not been endorsed or otherwise approved by the National Geospatial-Intelligence Agency, or the
United States Department of Defense (10 U.S.C. 425)
AFCS
a. Under 10 U.S.C. 456, no civil action may be brought against the United States on the basis of the content
of a navigational aid prepared or disseminated by either the former Defense Mapping Agency (DMA), National
Imagery and Mapping Agency (NIMA), or the National Geospatial-Intelligence Agency (NGA).
Annun/Alerts
b. The DAFIF™ product is provided “as is,” and no warranty, express or implied, including, but not limited to the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for particular purpose or arising by statute or otherwise in law or
from a course of dealing or usage in trade, is made by NGA as to the accuracy and functioning of the product.
Appendix
c. Neither NGA nor its personnel will be liable for any claims, losses, or damages arising from or connected with
the use of this product. The user agrees to hold harmless the United States National Geospatial-Intelligence
Agency. The user’s sole and exclusive remedy is to stop using the DAFIF product.
Index
Index
A Automatic Dependent Surveillance-
Overview
System
Broadcast 237
Acquiring Satellites 31 Automatic Dependent Surveillance-
ADS-B 246 Rebroadcast 239
Instruments
ADS-B In 238
Flight
Automatic Reversion 313
ADS-B Out 238 Automatic squelch 101
ADS-B participating 238 Autopilot Disconnect 299
ADS-R 239 Auto-Slewing 74
EIS
Air Data Computer (ADC) 2
AIRMET 205, 206 B
Airport
Interface
Barometric setting, Altimeter 49, 56–57
CNS
Review 153
Basemap 377
Weather 157
Bearing/Distance, Measuring 141, 142,
Airspace 138, 162
Navigation
144, 146
Alerts 162
GPS
Bearing source 67
Selecting and Viewing 162
Bluetooth 284
Smart 163
Planning
Airspeed Indicator 50 C
Flight
Airways 150
Reviewing 151 CDI source 65
Alarms 43, 45 Chart Not Available 266, 270
Avoidance
Hazard
Alerts 335 Cloud Tops 198
Altimeter 54–59 Cloud Tops Forecast 198
Altitude Alerting 58 Command Bars 303
Additional
Features
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT) 309 Comparator Window 347
Altitude Reference 308 Compass Arc 133
AOPA 271 Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) 65
Crew Alerting System (CAS) 90, 94, 95,
AFCS
Approach 182
Activating Vectors-to-Final 185 96, 344, 345
Chart 184 Current Icing Product (CIP) 212
Annun/Alerts
Loading 183, 184 D

Removing 185
Selecting 183 Data Bar Fields 34, 351
Approach Mode 325 Databases 376
Appendix
Attitude and Heading Reference System Updating 380

(AHRS) 2, 24 Data Entry 25–26
Attitude Indicator 52 Date & Time 40
Index
190-02472-00 Rev. D Garmin G3X Touch™ Pilot’s Guide for Certified Aircraft Index-1
Index
Delete Data Fields 168

Overview
System
Flight Plans 177, 179 Editing 176

Flight Records 361 Fuel Flow 178
Individual Waypoint 180 Inverting 181
Instruments
Flight
Direct-to 164 Name 177

Cancelling 166 Speed 177
Display Waypoints, Adding 176
Backlighting 33 Flight Plan (FPL) Pages 28
EIS
Overview 14 FliteCharts 268

Symbols 405 Expiration 271
Range 266, 271
Interface
CNS
E FMS Joystick 15
Echo Tops 199 Freezing Levels 211
Frequencies 102, 104
Navigation
Emergency Page 395

GPS
Engine Indication System (EIS) 87 Fuel Calculator 94

Engine Manifold Pressure 89 Fuel Flow Indicator 89
ENG Page 87 Fuel Pressure Indicator 89
Planning
Flight
Exhaust Gas Temperature 89 Fuel Quantity Indicator 89

Fuel Range Ring 141, 142, 144, 146
F
G
Avoidance
Hazard
Field of View 262

FIS-B 239 Garmin Display Unit (GDU) 156
Flight director (FD) 294 Garmin Sensor Unit (GSU) 2, 6, 7
Additional
Features
Flight Information Service-Broadcast GBT 238

239 GDU 370 2, 8
Flight Instruments 47 Glidepath Mode (GP) 315
Flight Level Change Mode 311 Glideslope Mode 316
AFCS
Flight Log 359 GMC 507 6, 7

Flight Plan 167 GMU 44 3
Annun/Alerts
Activation 175 GPS Receiver Status 29

Active 170 Ground Based Transceivers 238
Adding Waypoints 176 GTP 59 2, 3, 4, 5
Approaches 182
Appendix
H
Copying 179
Creation 169 Hazard Display 391
Index
Index-2 Garmin G3X Touch™ Pilot’s Guide for Certified Aircraft 190-02472-00 Rev. D
Index
Heading 49 Customizing 138
Overview
System
Heading Line 366 Detail 148
Heading Select Mode 319 Displays 134
Heading Strip 74 Orientation 135
Instruments
Flight
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) 49, Panning 140
63 Range 139
Annunciations 65 Satellite View 148
Setup 135
EIS
I Symbols 148, 405
Icing Forecast 212 Map Datum 385
MAP Page
Interface
Information Window 67
CNS
Integrated Autopilot Defaults 192
Alerts 348 XM Weather 192
Map Range 139
Navigation
Disengaging 299
GPS
Engaging 299 Map Symbols 148
Intersections 157 Measuring
Inverting, Flight Plan 181 Bearing 147
Planning
Flight
Distance 147
K MENU Key 15
Keyboard 46 Menus 25
Avoidance
Hazard
Navigating 301
L Messages
Miscellaneous 335, 336
Lean Assist 90
Additional
System 337
Legends 192 Features
METAR 204
License Agreement 417
Flag Color 204
Limited Warranty 417
Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) 1 N
AFCS
Location Formats 43, 385

Navigation Mode 321–322
Annun/Alerts
M Navigation Source 12, 69

NDBs 158
Magnetometer 3
Nearest
Main Pages 27, 28
Airport 156
Appendix
Map
Airspaces 162
Airways 151
NDB 158
Index
Index
VORs 159 S
Overview
System
Nearest Information 155

Nearest Type SafeTaxi 250, 264
Changing 32 Satellite Information 32
Instruments
Satellite View 148

Flight
NEXRAD 194, 197

NRST Key 15 Secure Digital (SD) Cards 16, 375
Installing 16
O Selected Altitude 307, 308, 310
EIS
Selected Altitude Capture Mode 307,

OBS Mode 75
308, 310
Obstacles 218
Selected Ground Track 320
Interface
Oil Pressure Indicator 89

CNS
Selected Heading 63, 319

Oil Temperature Indicator 89
Settings 33
Outside Air Temperature (OAT) 76
SIGMET 206
Navigation
P SiriusXM 188, 191, 192, 249, 273,

GPS
274, 419
Pages 27 Smart Airspace 163
Flight Plan (FPL) 28
Planning
Smart Glide 396

Flight
MAIN 27, 28 Sound 40

Panning 140 Standard Rate Turn Bank Angle Point-
PFD
Avoidance
ers 53
Hazard
Annunciations 344 Storm Cells 203

PIREP 209 Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) 212
Pitch Hold Mode 306 Surface Pressure 202
Additional
Features
Position 32 Symbols 148

Settings 43 Synthetic Vision (SVX) 249
Proximity Waypoints 372 System
AFCS
R Annunciations 23
Date & Time 42, 43
Red X 23, 391 Functionality 25
Annun/Alerts
Roll Hold Mode 319 Initialization 16

Runway Extension line 137 Power-up 16
Runway Number 137 Settings 33
Appendix
Index
Index
System ID 380 Turbulence Forecast 211
Overview
System
Turn Rate Indicator 49
T
U
Tachometer (RPM) 89
Instruments
Flight
TAFs 204 UAT 238
Takeoff Mode 317 Universal Access Transceiver 237
TAS 387 User Waypoints 159
TCAS 387 Creating 159, 160, 162
EIS
Temperature Probe 3 Deleting 161
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRS) Editing 161
Interface
208 Nearest 161
CNS
Terrain 213, 216 Renaming 161
Alerts 219, 220
V
Navigation
Annunciations 346
GPS
Obstacle Information 218 Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) 60
Shading 217 Vertical Navigation Mode (VNAV) 312
Views 218 Vertical Navigation (VNAV)
Planning
Flight
TIS-B 239 Capturing 83
Topography 147 Configuring 82
Track Log 362 Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) 59
Avoidance
Hazard
Track Select Mode 320 Vertical Speed Mode 310
Traffic Information Service-Broadcast Vertical Speed Reference 310
239 VNAV Target Altitude Capture Mode
Additional
Features
Traffic Information Service (TIS) 222, (ALTV) 314
387–388 Voltmeter 89
Annunciations 225, 346 VORs 159
Audio Alerts 227 Vspeed Reference 44
AFCS
General Information 387

Ground Track 228 W
Annun/Alerts
Limitations 388 Warranty 417

Traffic Warning Window 227 Waypoints 152, 159
Transponder Creating 159, 160, 162
Status Box 49 User 159
Appendix
True Airspeed (TAS) 49, 50 Weather Information 157

Index
Index
Weight & Balance 368

Overview
System
Wind Data 78
Winds Aloft 200
Instruments
X
Flight
XM
Accessing 191
XM Satellite Radio 273, 275
EIS
X Symbol 217
Interface
CNS
Navigation
GPS
Planning
Flight
Avoidance
Hazard
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Garmin AT, Inc.

2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.

Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
www.garmin.com
© 2022 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries 190-02472-00 Rev. D

G3X Garmin

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

G3X Garmin

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

™

ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS

Web Site Address: www.garmin.com

January, 2022 190-02472-00 Rev. D Printed in the U.S.A.

WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon

WARNING: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and

WARNING: The altitude calculated by G3X Touch internal GPS receivers is

WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used in the

WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, operating the

WARNING: The United States government operates the Global Positioning

WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to

WARNING: For safety reasons, G3X Touch operational procedures must be

Anatel Warning (GMA 245R)

Rev Date Description

Section 1 System Overview................................................................................................... 1

Section 2 Flight Instruments................................................................................................ 47

Turn Rate Indicator.............................................................................................................. 74

Section 3 Engine Indication System................................................................................. 87

Section 4 CNS Interface (Optional)................................................................................... 97

Section 5 GPS Navigation..................................................................................................... 133

5.2 Using Map Displays........................................................................................................ 134

Section 6 Flight Planning...................................................................................................... 167

Deleting Flight Plans......................................................................................................... 179

Section 7 Hazard Avoidance............................................................................................... 187

Section 8 Additional Features............................................................................................ 249

8.8 Flight Data Logging Using the SD Card..................................................................... 276

Section 9 Automatic Flight Control Systems (Optional)..................................... 291

Section 10 Annunciations & Alerts.................................................................................. 335

10.4 Audio Alerts................................................................................................................... 342

Section 11 Appendices.......................................................................................................... 351

Emergency Page................................................................................................................ 395

SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW

GDU 460 (10.6 inch)

GDU 470 (7 inch) (Portrait Orientation)

The AHRS contains advanced sensors (including accelerometers and rate

– Temperature Probe: Provides raw air temperature data.

• GMC 507 (AFCS Mode Controller)

• GTR 20 (VHF Communications Radio)

• GTR 200B (VHF Communications Radio)

– GDL 50R: ADS-B receiver

– GDL 52R: ADS-B/SXM combination receiver

G3X TOUCH SYSTEM

• Standalone MFD with optional EIS. NOTE: Remote annunciator 'Engine'

the pilot's primary field of view.

GDU 460 (split-screen PFD/MFD, EIS optional)

Dual GDU 470s (PFD & MFD, EIS optional)

G3X Touch AML STC Avionics System

G3X Touch System (Example)

EXTERNAL NAVIGATORS (OPTIONAL)

• GNC® series Nav/Comm Transceiver

USING THE G3X TOUCH WITH AN EXTERNAL GPS NAVIGATOR

WARNING: Do not use the approach information provided by the VFR

navigation database residing within the G3X Touch as a means of navigating

Changing the Navigation Source

Selection Between Multiple Navigators

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

Refer to Section 9 (AFCS) for more information.

1.2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW

Left Knob Nearest Direct-to SD Card Menu Back Right Knob

Bezel Overview (GDU 460)

Press a third time to clear the Main Menu

Press and hold to toggle between full-screen and split-screen modes